<?xml version="1.0"?>
<feed xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xml:lang="en">
	<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=DellaRossa</id>
	<title>Ianseo - User contributions [en]</title>
	<link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=DellaRossa"/>
	<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Special:Contributions/DellaRossa"/>
	<updated>2026-06-19T23:18:25Z</updated>
	<subtitle>User contributions</subtitle>
	<generator>MediaWiki 1.39.7</generator>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Qualification&amp;diff=3811</id>
		<title>Qualification</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Qualification&amp;diff=3811"/>
		<updated>2026-06-19T07:12:31Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;DellaRossa: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Page in progress}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;languages/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:1--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The qualification round is a key phase in each tournament, from local ones to the most important competitions in Archery. Qualification can be before match-play as normal, or as the only part of a tournament to give final results (e.g. a WA1440). Everything that is related to scoring, scorecards, and printouts is available in the Qualification item of the main menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Input Score ==&amp;lt;!--T:2--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The main feature in the scores management. Selecting this option, the software will open dropdown submenu with some other items, which are related to the different procedures through which users can input scores in i@nseo. Users can enter scores in the system in some separate ways:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Standard Table=== &amp;lt;!--T:4--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Qualification ScoringTable Simple.png|thumb|Input score, Standard Table]]&lt;br /&gt;
After selecting the desired Session, Targets and Distance, clicking on &#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;, a screen with a spreadsheet layout will be displayed: here the user can input scores in a simple and fast way. Ticking the box &#039;&#039;G/X&#039;&#039;, the user can manage Xs and 10s (or 9s in indoor tournaments) that each athlete will shoot. Generally, this is a required activity during competitions; it can be skipped when the user needs to manage only some parts of scorecards and Tie-Break data is not relevant (e.g. for scoring at half distance).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:5--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In this page and in all the others, when you enter a value and press &#039;Tab&#039; the cursor will move to the next cell, which is essential for entering data quickly.&lt;br /&gt;
When entering values into the boxes, if you enter a number that is invalid or conflicts with another, the box will turn yellow. That value will not be saved.&lt;br /&gt;
Some of the checks are carried out using the competition’s default settings, which can be modified in [[Competition/Edit_Competition_Info#Advanced_Parameters|Advanced Parameters]] (&#039;&#039;&#039;Change the values in this page only if you know what you&#039;re doing!&#039;&#039;&#039;).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:6--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|type=reminder|text=Once scores of all archers have been input, or if a score is changed, the user has to click on &#039;&#039;&#039;Re-Build Teams&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;Re-Calculate Distance Rank&#039;&#039;&#039; and, then &#039;&#039;&#039;Re-Calculate Final Rank&#039;&#039;&#039;. The software will open 3 different pop-ups: always click &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;OK&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The software will, then, generate the Final Rank for the tournament.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:7--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The user could also click on &#039;&#039;&#039;Save results for snapshot feature&#039;&#039;&#039;, to generate data for the real time displaying of ranks, but it is not necessary, unless there are visual electronic devices (TV or similar systems) in use, for they need to manage in real time the athletes ranks or positions in the entire competition. When not using the HHT or Electronic devices the results will be ranked and displayed only considering sessions and distances in the tournament.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:8--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SetIRMStatus.png|thumb|IRM Status Setting]]&lt;br /&gt;
If an athlete decides to retire from the competition, or they have not shown up, the user can set the archers state using the &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Set&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; button on the left side.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color: #FFD700; color: #000000;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;DNS-DID NOT START&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;: The athlete will still be counted in the tournament statistics (payments, targets list, and so on), but the software won’t let the user input any scores. &lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color: #3CB371; color: #ffffff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;DNF-DID NOT FINISH&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;: The athletes line will turn green, scores cannot be updated but the athlete will continue to the Head to Head event (if any) or receive a final rank from the qualification round&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color: #3CB371; color: #FFFFFF;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;DNF-DID NOT FINISH (NO RANK)&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;: The athlete will not receive a rank from the qualification round and will not continue into the Head to Head event&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For a more detailed description of these states, see the [[Participants#IRM Status Management|IRM Status Management]] section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Extended Table===&amp;lt;!--T:9--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EnterScores ExtendedInput.png|thumb|Input score, Extended Table]]&lt;br /&gt;
It works just as the Standard Table. You can select all the distances to edit, or just one, but in addition to scores to be input the other distances totals are also shown. It is useful to check the scores that have been&lt;br /&gt;
previously input, have been entered without mistakes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Arrow by Arrow (Advanced users)===&amp;lt;!--T:10--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ArrowbyArrowInsert.png|thumb|Input score, Arrow by arrow-Advanced users]]&lt;br /&gt;
This function enables the user to manage the score of each arrow in an end for each athlete. This scoring method should not be used when scoring with electronic devices, if the arrow values need editing in this case then use the scorecards view during the verification process [[Qualification#Get_Score_Barcodes | verification process]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Arrow by Arrow (Scorecards View)===&amp;lt;!--T:11--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ArrowbyArrowSC.png|thumb|Input score, Arrow by arrow-Scorecards View]]&lt;br /&gt;
This function works just as the previous method, but on a different view, that displays a chart, which is similar to a standard printed scorecard.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Check Data Update===&amp;lt;!--T:12--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CheckDataUpdate.PNG|thumb|Check data updates]]&lt;br /&gt;
This command enables the user to check Data Updates of scores, when the&lt;br /&gt;
competition is managed with different networked computers. The table shows the target numbers and they change colour based on when they last updated their data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Snapshot Configuration===&amp;lt;!--T:13--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Get Score Barcodes===&amp;lt;!--T:15--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ScorecardValidator.PNG|thumb|Check Scorecard using the Barcode]]&lt;br /&gt;
This is the area where, when using arrow-by-arrow scoring (e.g. Ianseo Scorekeeper NG / NG Pro), you can validate the scorecards. &lt;br /&gt;
* Open the link&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter the separator character in the box (usually a - ) and click &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Go&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Select the Distance and Session in the drop down boxes, and scan the first scorecard. &lt;br /&gt;
* Once you have scanned the first scorecard, and the values are all correctly matching the paper, scan the same scorecard again to confirm it, the target will vanish from the list of missing cards on the right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:16--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The other options after scanning are:&lt;br /&gt;
* Edit arrows: This will take you to the scorecard screen and allow you to edit the arrow values, or search for the mathematical error&lt;br /&gt;
* Edit totals: This will allow you to change the totals electronically recorded (although the WA rules allow you to alter the electronic arrows to match the paper and then use the electronic total) &lt;br /&gt;
* Remove 10: remove all the first tie break arrow totals (again if under WA rules the box is blank) &lt;br /&gt;
* Remove X/nine: remove all the second tie break arrow totals, as above&lt;br /&gt;
* Remove both: If needed and both boxes are blank.&lt;br /&gt;
* Reset both: Used if you have mistakenly removed the totals of the tie break arrows.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Print barcode Directives===&amp;lt;!--T:17--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This allows you to print a sheet to perform the barcode verification actions without needing to use a mouse during the process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Export text file == &amp;lt;!--T:18--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This function enables the user to save a text file (.txt) with all&lt;br /&gt;
the scores input in the tournament.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scorecard Printout ==  &amp;lt;!--T:19--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ScorecardPrintout.PNG|thumb|Scorecard Printout]]&lt;br /&gt;
This function has been recently optimized for being as adaptable as possible. The first part is split into two columns, where the user can manage all the variables needed for customizing the Scorecard Printout. Generally, to help users print what they need, the first part of the screen includes the REQUIRED options by default for a standard printed scorecard.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:20--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Should the user need to print any other kind of scorecards (e.g. &#039;&#039;Only Data&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;Only Target Number&#039;&#039;, or &#039;&#039;Only Drawings&#039;&#039;), the screen offers a selection list (on the left), where the user can choose the options needed. The user can also modify a scorecard, to omit any text string, or picture included in the tournament using the boxes on the right. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:21--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Once the scorecard type is selected and the final appearance is selected, the user can proceed to the actual printing page. In the lower row, the software shows some editable boxes, that enables the user to choose the Session and Number of Targets to be printed (and if empty targets are included or not). Once the Session is selected the target numbers autocomplete any empty part with all the available targets. Once Session and Targets are selected, the user has to choose the distance to be printed below the distance area. When electronic devices are in use for the automatic score management, the user can print scorecards created by the software with scores input directly by the archers, using the &#039;Print Scorecards filled in with all the value from single arrow&#039; option.&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to print a manual collection slip using the &#039;Intermediate Results collecting paper&#039; option at the very bottom.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Athlete Numbers == &amp;lt;!--T:22--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AthleteBadge.PNG|thumb|Athlete Numbers]]&lt;br /&gt;
This option enables the user to print the Athlete Numbers for the event. &lt;br /&gt;
* Open the page and select the badge type to &#039;Qualification Athlete number&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter a name for the design (such as &#039;Athlete Number&#039; and click on &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Create new badge&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To edit the parameters of the badge and move/add and remove elements click on &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Edit Badge&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The printing procedure is similar to the Scorecards one, for the user needs to select the desired Session and Targets.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Personal Rank ==&amp;lt;!--T:23--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PersonalRank.PNG|thumb|Personal Rank]]&lt;br /&gt;
This option enables the user to view a selected athlete in the referring Division and Class Ranking. As search values, the user can opt for the &#039;&#039;BIB number&#039;&#039;, the &#039;&#039;Family Name&#039;&#039; or the &#039;&#039;Name of the archer&#039;&#039;. After clicking on &#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;, the software will open a page displaying the athlete position in the ranking (the corresponding row will be highlighted in yellow), together with the archers in the two places before and after the selected one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Class and Division Result Lists ==&amp;lt;!--T:24--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CDResults.PNG|thumb|Class and Division Result Lists]]&lt;br /&gt;
Clicking on this item, the software will open all the printout layouts for the Qualification Rounds. On this page, the main function is represented by the central icon &#039;&#039;Class &amp;amp; Division Result List&#039;&#039;. Clicking on this command, the user can print the Division and Class Ranking, both in the &#039;&#039;Class &amp;amp; Division Result List - Individual&#039;&#039; and in the &#039;&#039;Class &amp;amp; Division Result List - Team&#039;&#039; lists. Similarly, the user can click on the corresponding command on the right and on the left, but, then, only Individual (left) or Team Rankings (right) will be printed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:25--&amp;gt; Below these options, the software offers another row of icons that enable the user to print the rankings, where Medals Winners are highlighted.  These commands enable the user to choose the rankings to be printed, by Division and Class, or extracting a specific number of places and scores (starting from a cutoff) and so on. It will also allow the user to print results based on subclasses, or various groupings if desired. It is recommended that a user checks the printouts they need in advance, and tests to ensure what they need is actually generated sensibly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Events (Ind/Team) Result Lists ==&amp;lt;!--T:26--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:QRanking.PNG|thumb|Events (Ind/Team) Result Lists]]&lt;br /&gt;
This page displays another set of printout layouts. From this page, the user can manage the printing of the tournament Qualification Round, the options are defined by the &#039;Events&#039; that are created for the Tournament defined in the areas below. &lt;br /&gt;
* Individual - [[Competition/Individual Events Setup]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Team - [[ Competition/Team Events Setup ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:27--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These printouts are very important if in the tournament there is a scheduled elimination and final round, on the other hand, they are not necessary for any competition that is not including this kind of matches. The order of the printouts can be defined in the two event setup areas if required. As for the previous printout pages, there is a .pdf file in the central part of the screen, with the complete &#039;&#039;Qualification Round - Complete&#039;&#039; report, on the side columns. The user can find the &#039;&#039;Individual&#039;&#039; and the &#039;&#039;Team&#039;&#039; ones separately too. In the other printout pages, there is a parameter section, with which the user can customize the layouts. Plus, the last default .pdf created by the software is &#039;&#039;Shoot Off/Coin Toss Status Printout&#039;&#039;, that immediately displays if there is any Shot-Off or Coin Toss to be broken, before proceeding to the Elimination and Final Round.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Speaker ==&amp;lt;!--T:28--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This page displays the video printouts for the on-venue speaker. These printouts are mainly used in national and international events.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:29--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Qualification]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:30--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Content}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>DellaRossa</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Qualification&amp;diff=3810</id>
		<title>Qualification</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Qualification&amp;diff=3810"/>
		<updated>2026-06-19T07:07:18Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;DellaRossa: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Page in progress}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;languages/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:1--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The qualification round is a key phase in each tournament, from local ones to the most important competitions in Archery. Qualification can be before match-play as normal, or as the only part of a tournament to give final results (e.g. a WA1440). Everything that is related to scoring, scorecards, and printouts is available in the Qualification item of the main menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Input Score ==&amp;lt;!--T:2--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The main feature in the scores management. Selecting this option, the software will open dropdown submenu with some other items, which are related to the different procedures through which users can input scores in i@nseo. Users can enter scores in the system in some separate ways:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Standard Table=== &amp;lt;!--T:4--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Qualification ScoringTable Simple.png|thumb|Input score, Standard Table]]&lt;br /&gt;
After selecting the desired Session, Targets and Distance, clicking on &#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;, a screen with a spreadsheet layout will be displayed: here the user can input scores in a simple and fast way. Ticking the box &#039;&#039;G/X&#039;&#039;, the user can manage Xs and 10s (or 9s in indoor tournaments) that each athlete will shoot. Generally, this is a required activity during competitions; it can be skipped when the user needs to manage only some parts of scorecards and Tie-Break data is not relevant (e.g. for scoring at half distance).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:5--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In this page and in all the others, when you enter a value and press &#039;Tab&#039; the cursor will move to the next cell, which is essential for entering data quickly.&lt;br /&gt;
When entering values into the boxes, if you enter a number that is invalid or conflicts with another, the box will turn yellow. That value will not be saved.&lt;br /&gt;
Some of the checks are carried out using the competition’s default settings, which can be modified in [[Competition/Edit_Competition_Info#Advanced_Parameters|Advanced Parameters]] (&#039;&#039;&#039;Change the values in this page only if you know what you&#039;re doing!&#039;&#039;&#039;) page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:6--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|type=reminder|text=Once scores of all archers have been input, or if a score is changed, the user has to click on &#039;&#039;&#039;Re-Build Teams&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;Re-Calculate Distance Rank&#039;&#039;&#039; and, then &#039;&#039;&#039;Re-Calculate Final Rank&#039;&#039;&#039;. The software will open 3 different pop-ups: always click &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;OK&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The software will, then, generate the Final Rank for the tournament.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:7--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The user could also click on &#039;&#039;&#039;Save results for snapshot feature&#039;&#039;&#039;, to generate data for the real time displaying of ranks, but it is not necessary, unless there are visual electronic devices (TV or similar systems) in use, for they need to manage in real time the athletes ranks or positions in the entire competition. When not using the HHT or Electronic devices the results will be ranked and displayed only considering sessions and distances in the tournament.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:8--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SetIRMStatus.png|thumb|IRM Status Setting]]&lt;br /&gt;
If an athlete decides to retire from the competition, or they have not shown up, the user can set the archers state using the &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Set&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; button on the left side.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color: #FFD700; color: #000000;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;DNS-DID NOT START&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;: The athlete will still be counted in the tournament statistics (payments, targets list, and so on), but the software won’t let the user input any scores. &lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color: #3CB371; color: #ffffff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;DNF-DID NOT FINISH&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;: The athletes line will turn green, scores cannot be updated but the athlete will continue to the Head to Head event (if any) or receive a final rank from the qualification round&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color: #3CB371; color: #FFFFFF;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;DNF-DID NOT FINISH (NO RANK)&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;: The athlete will not receive a rank from the qualification round and will not continue into the Head to Head event&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For a more detailed description of these states, see the [[Participants#IRM Status Management|IRM Status Management]] section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Extended Table===&amp;lt;!--T:9--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EnterScores ExtendedInput.png|thumb|Input score, Extended Table]]&lt;br /&gt;
It works just as the Standard Table. You can select all the distances to edit, or just one, but in addition to scores to be input the other distances totals are also shown. It is useful to check the scores that have been&lt;br /&gt;
previously input, have been entered without mistakes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Arrow by Arrow (Advanced users)===&amp;lt;!--T:10--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ArrowbyArrowInsert.png|thumb|Input score, Arrow by arrow-Advanced users]]&lt;br /&gt;
This function enables the user to manage the score of each arrow in an end for each athlete. This scoring method should not be used when scoring with electronic devices, if the arrow values need editing in this case then use the scorecards view during the verification process [[Qualification#Get_Score_Barcodes | verification process]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Arrow by Arrow (Scorecards View)===&amp;lt;!--T:11--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ArrowbyArrowSC.png|thumb|Input score, Arrow by arrow-Scorecards View]]&lt;br /&gt;
This function works just as the previous method, but on a different view, that displays a chart, which is similar to a standard printed scorecard.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Check Data Update===&amp;lt;!--T:12--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CheckDataUpdate.PNG|thumb|Check data updates]]&lt;br /&gt;
This command enables the user to check Data Updates of scores, when the&lt;br /&gt;
competition is managed with different networked computers. The table shows the target numbers and they change colour based on when they last updated their data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Snapshot Configuration===&amp;lt;!--T:13--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Get Score Barcodes===&amp;lt;!--T:15--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ScorecardValidator.PNG|thumb|Check Scorecard using the Barcode]]&lt;br /&gt;
This is the area where, when using arrow-by-arrow scoring (e.g. Ianseo Scorekeeper NG / NG Pro), you can validate the scorecards. &lt;br /&gt;
* Open the link&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter the separator character in the box (usually a - ) and click &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Go&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Select the Distance and Session in the drop down boxes, and scan the first scorecard. &lt;br /&gt;
* Once you have scanned the first scorecard, and the values are all correctly matching the paper, scan the same scorecard again to confirm it, the target will vanish from the list of missing cards on the right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:16--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The other options after scanning are:&lt;br /&gt;
* Edit arrows: This will take you to the scorecard screen and allow you to edit the arrow values, or search for the mathematical error&lt;br /&gt;
* Edit totals: This will allow you to change the totals electronically recorded (although the WA rules allow you to alter the electronic arrows to match the paper and then use the electronic total) &lt;br /&gt;
* Remove 10: remove all the first tie break arrow totals (again if under WA rules the box is blank) &lt;br /&gt;
* Remove X/nine: remove all the second tie break arrow totals, as above&lt;br /&gt;
* Remove both: If needed and both boxes are blank.&lt;br /&gt;
* Reset both: Used if you have mistakenly removed the totals of the tie break arrows.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Print barcode Directives===&amp;lt;!--T:17--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This allows you to print a sheet to perform the barcode verification actions without needing to use a mouse during the process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Export text file == &amp;lt;!--T:18--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This function enables the user to save a text file (.txt) with all&lt;br /&gt;
the scores input in the tournament.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scorecard Printout ==  &amp;lt;!--T:19--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ScorecardPrintout.PNG|thumb|Scorecard Printout]]&lt;br /&gt;
This function has been recently optimized for being as adaptable as possible. The first part is split into two columns, where the user can manage all the variables needed for customizing the Scorecard Printout. Generally, to help users print what they need, the first part of the screen includes the REQUIRED options by default for a standard printed scorecard.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:20--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Should the user need to print any other kind of scorecards (e.g. &#039;&#039;Only Data&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;Only Target Number&#039;&#039;, or &#039;&#039;Only Drawings&#039;&#039;), the screen offers a selection list (on the left), where the user can choose the options needed. The user can also modify a scorecard, to omit any text string, or picture included in the tournament using the boxes on the right. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:21--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Once the scorecard type is selected and the final appearance is selected, the user can proceed to the actual printing page. In the lower row, the software shows some editable boxes, that enables the user to choose the Session and Number of Targets to be printed (and if empty targets are included or not). Once the Session is selected the target numbers autocomplete any empty part with all the available targets. Once Session and Targets are selected, the user has to choose the distance to be printed below the distance area. When electronic devices are in use for the automatic score management, the user can print scorecards created by the software with scores input directly by the archers, using the &#039;Print Scorecards filled in with all the value from single arrow&#039; option.&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to print a manual collection slip using the &#039;Intermediate Results collecting paper&#039; option at the very bottom.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Athlete Numbers == &amp;lt;!--T:22--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AthleteBadge.PNG|thumb|Athlete Numbers]]&lt;br /&gt;
This option enables the user to print the Athlete Numbers for the event. &lt;br /&gt;
* Open the page and select the badge type to &#039;Qualification Athlete number&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter a name for the design (such as &#039;Athlete Number&#039; and click on &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Create new badge&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To edit the parameters of the badge and move/add and remove elements click on &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Edit Badge&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The printing procedure is similar to the Scorecards one, for the user needs to select the desired Session and Targets.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Personal Rank ==&amp;lt;!--T:23--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PersonalRank.PNG|thumb|Personal Rank]]&lt;br /&gt;
This option enables the user to view a selected athlete in the referring Division and Class Ranking. As search values, the user can opt for the &#039;&#039;BIB number&#039;&#039;, the &#039;&#039;Family Name&#039;&#039; or the &#039;&#039;Name of the archer&#039;&#039;. After clicking on &#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;, the software will open a page displaying the athlete position in the ranking (the corresponding row will be highlighted in yellow), together with the archers in the two places before and after the selected one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Class and Division Result Lists ==&amp;lt;!--T:24--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CDResults.PNG|thumb|Class and Division Result Lists]]&lt;br /&gt;
Clicking on this item, the software will open all the printout layouts for the Qualification Rounds. On this page, the main function is represented by the central icon &#039;&#039;Class &amp;amp; Division Result List&#039;&#039;. Clicking on this command, the user can print the Division and Class Ranking, both in the &#039;&#039;Class &amp;amp; Division Result List - Individual&#039;&#039; and in the &#039;&#039;Class &amp;amp; Division Result List - Team&#039;&#039; lists. Similarly, the user can click on the corresponding command on the right and on the left, but, then, only Individual (left) or Team Rankings (right) will be printed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:25--&amp;gt; Below these options, the software offers another row of icons that enable the user to print the rankings, where Medals Winners are highlighted.  These commands enable the user to choose the rankings to be printed, by Division and Class, or extracting a specific number of places and scores (starting from a cutoff) and so on. It will also allow the user to print results based on subclasses, or various groupings if desired. It is recommended that a user checks the printouts they need in advance, and tests to ensure what they need is actually generated sensibly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Events (Ind/Team) Result Lists ==&amp;lt;!--T:26--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:QRanking.PNG|thumb|Events (Ind/Team) Result Lists]]&lt;br /&gt;
This page displays another set of printout layouts. From this page, the user can manage the printing of the tournament Qualification Round, the options are defined by the &#039;Events&#039; that are created for the Tournament defined in the areas below. &lt;br /&gt;
* Individual - [[Competition/Individual Events Setup]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Team - [[ Competition/Team Events Setup ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:27--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These printouts are very important if in the tournament there is a scheduled elimination and final round, on the other hand, they are not necessary for any competition that is not including this kind of matches. The order of the printouts can be defined in the two event setup areas if required. As for the previous printout pages, there is a .pdf file in the central part of the screen, with the complete &#039;&#039;Qualification Round - Complete&#039;&#039; report, on the side columns. The user can find the &#039;&#039;Individual&#039;&#039; and the &#039;&#039;Team&#039;&#039; ones separately too. In the other printout pages, there is a parameter section, with which the user can customize the layouts. Plus, the last default .pdf created by the software is &#039;&#039;Shoot Off/Coin Toss Status Printout&#039;&#039;, that immediately displays if there is any Shot-Off or Coin Toss to be broken, before proceeding to the Elimination and Final Round.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Speaker ==&amp;lt;!--T:28--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This page displays the video printouts for the on-venue speaker. These printouts are mainly used in national and international events.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:29--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Qualification]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:30--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Content}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>DellaRossa</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Qualification&amp;diff=3809</id>
		<title>Qualification</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Qualification&amp;diff=3809"/>
		<updated>2026-06-19T06:55:16Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;DellaRossa: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Page in progress}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;languages/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:1--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The qualification round is a key phase in each tournament, from local ones to the most important competitions in Archery. Qualification can be before match-play as normal, or as the only part of a tournament to give final results (e.g. a WA1440). Everything that is related to scoring, scorecards, and printouts is available in the Qualification item of the main menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Input Score ==&amp;lt;!--T:2--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The main feature in the scores management. Selecting this option, the software will open dropdown submenu with some other items, which are related to the different procedures through which users can input scores in i@nseo. Users can enter scores in the system in some separate ways:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Standard Table=== &amp;lt;!--T:4--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Qualification ScoringTable Simple.png|thumb|Input score, Standard Table]]&lt;br /&gt;
After selecting the desired Session, Targets and Distance, clicking on &#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;, a screen with a spreadsheet layout will be displayed: here the user can input scores in a simple and fast way. Ticking the box &#039;&#039;G/X&#039;&#039;, the user can manage Xs and 10s (or 9s in indoor tournaments) that each athlete will shoot. Generally, this is a required activity during competitions; it can be skipped when the user needs to manage only some parts of scorecards and Tie-Break data is not relevant (e.g. for scoring at half distance).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:5--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In this page and in all the others, when you enter a value and press &#039;Tab&#039; the cursor will move to the next cell, which is essential for entering data quickly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:6--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|type=reminder|text=Once scores of all archers have been input, or if a score is changed, the user has to click on &#039;&#039;&#039;Re-Build Teams&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;Re-Calculate Distance Rank&#039;&#039;&#039; and, then &#039;&#039;&#039;Re-Calculate Final Rank&#039;&#039;&#039;. The software will open 3 different pop-ups: always click &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;OK&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The software will, then, generate the Final Rank for the tournament.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:7--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The user could also click on &#039;&#039;&#039;Save results for snapshot feature&#039;&#039;&#039;, to generate data for the real time displaying of ranks, but it is not necessary, unless there are visual electronic devices (TV or similar systems) in use, for they need to manage in real time the athletes ranks or positions in the entire competition. When not using the HHT or Electronic devices the results will be ranked and displayed only considering sessions and distances in the tournament.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:8--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SetIRMStatus.png|thumb|IRM Status Setting]]&lt;br /&gt;
If an athlete decides to retire from the competition, or they have not shown up, the user can set the archers state using the &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Set&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; button on the left side.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color: #FFD700; color: #000000;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;DNS-DID NOT START&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;: The athlete will still be counted in the tournament statistics (payments, targets list, and so on), but the software won’t let the user input any scores. &lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color: #3CB371; color: #ffffff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;DNF-DID NOT FINISH&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;: The athletes line will turn green, scores cannot be updated but the athlete will continue to the Head to Head event (if any) or receive a final rank from the qualification round&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color: #3CB371; color: #FFFFFF;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;DNF-DID NOT FINISH (NO RANK)&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;: The athlete will not receive a rank from the qualification round and will not continue into the Head to Head event&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For a more detailed description of these states, see the [[Participants#IRM Status Management|IRM Status Management]] section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Extended Table===&amp;lt;!--T:9--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EnterScores ExtendedInput.png|thumb|Input score, Extended Table]]&lt;br /&gt;
It works just as the Standard Table. You can select all the distances to edit, or just one, but in addition to scores to be input the other distances totals are also shown. It is useful to check the scores that have been&lt;br /&gt;
previously input, have been entered without mistakes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Arrow by Arrow (Advanced users)===&amp;lt;!--T:10--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ArrowbyArrowInsert.png|thumb|Input score, Arrow by arrow-Advanced users]]&lt;br /&gt;
This function enables the user to manage the score of each arrow in an end for each athlete. This scoring method should not be used when scoring with electronic devices, if the arrow values need editing in this case then use the scorecards view during the verification process [[Qualification#Get_Score_Barcodes | verification process]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Arrow by Arrow (Scorecards View)===&amp;lt;!--T:11--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ArrowbyArrowSC.png|thumb|Input score, Arrow by arrow-Scorecards View]]&lt;br /&gt;
This function works just as the previous method, but on a different view, that displays a chart, which is similar to a standard printed scorecard.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Check Data Update===&amp;lt;!--T:12--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CheckDataUpdate.PNG|thumb|Check data updates]]&lt;br /&gt;
This command enables the user to check Data Updates of scores, when the&lt;br /&gt;
competition is managed with different networked computers. The table shows the target numbers and they change colour based on when they last updated their data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Snapshot Configuration===&amp;lt;!--T:13--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Get Score Barcodes===&amp;lt;!--T:15--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ScorecardValidator.PNG|thumb|Check Scorecard using the Barcode]]&lt;br /&gt;
This is the area where, when using arrow-by-arrow scoring (e.g. Ianseo Scorekeeper NG / NG Pro), you can validate the scorecards. &lt;br /&gt;
* Open the link&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter the separator character in the box (usually a - ) and click &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Go&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Select the Distance and Session in the drop down boxes, and scan the first scorecard. &lt;br /&gt;
* Once you have scanned the first scorecard, and the values are all correctly matching the paper, scan the same scorecard again to confirm it, the target will vanish from the list of missing cards on the right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:16--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The other options after scanning are:&lt;br /&gt;
* Edit arrows: This will take you to the scorecard screen and allow you to edit the arrow values, or search for the mathematical error&lt;br /&gt;
* Edit totals: This will allow you to change the totals electronically recorded (although the WA rules allow you to alter the electronic arrows to match the paper and then use the electronic total) &lt;br /&gt;
* Remove 10: remove all the first tie break arrow totals (again if under WA rules the box is blank) &lt;br /&gt;
* Remove X/nine: remove all the second tie break arrow totals, as above&lt;br /&gt;
* Remove both: If needed and both boxes are blank.&lt;br /&gt;
* Reset both: Used if you have mistakenly removed the totals of the tie break arrows.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Print barcode Directives===&amp;lt;!--T:17--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This allows you to print a sheet to perform the barcode verification actions without needing to use a mouse during the process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Export text file == &amp;lt;!--T:18--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This function enables the user to save a text file (.txt) with all&lt;br /&gt;
the scores input in the tournament.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scorecard Printout ==  &amp;lt;!--T:19--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ScorecardPrintout.PNG|thumb|Scorecard Printout]]&lt;br /&gt;
This function has been recently optimized for being as adaptable as possible. The first part is split into two columns, where the user can manage all the variables needed for customizing the Scorecard Printout. Generally, to help users print what they need, the first part of the screen includes the REQUIRED options by default for a standard printed scorecard.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:20--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Should the user need to print any other kind of scorecards (e.g. &#039;&#039;Only Data&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;Only Target Number&#039;&#039;, or &#039;&#039;Only Drawings&#039;&#039;), the screen offers a selection list (on the left), where the user can choose the options needed. The user can also modify a scorecard, to omit any text string, or picture included in the tournament using the boxes on the right. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:21--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Once the scorecard type is selected and the final appearance is selected, the user can proceed to the actual printing page. In the lower row, the software shows some editable boxes, that enables the user to choose the Session and Number of Targets to be printed (and if empty targets are included or not). Once the Session is selected the target numbers autocomplete any empty part with all the available targets. Once Session and Targets are selected, the user has to choose the distance to be printed below the distance area. When electronic devices are in use for the automatic score management, the user can print scorecards created by the software with scores input directly by the archers, using the &#039;Print Scorecards filled in with all the value from single arrow&#039; option.&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to print a manual collection slip using the &#039;Intermediate Results collecting paper&#039; option at the very bottom.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Athlete Numbers == &amp;lt;!--T:22--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AthleteBadge.PNG|thumb|Athlete Numbers]]&lt;br /&gt;
This option enables the user to print the Athlete Numbers for the event. &lt;br /&gt;
* Open the page and select the badge type to &#039;Qualification Athlete number&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter a name for the design (such as &#039;Athlete Number&#039; and click on &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Create new badge&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To edit the parameters of the badge and move/add and remove elements click on &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Edit Badge&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The printing procedure is similar to the Scorecards one, for the user needs to select the desired Session and Targets.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Personal Rank ==&amp;lt;!--T:23--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PersonalRank.PNG|thumb|Personal Rank]]&lt;br /&gt;
This option enables the user to view a selected athlete in the referring Division and Class Ranking. As search values, the user can opt for the &#039;&#039;BIB number&#039;&#039;, the &#039;&#039;Family Name&#039;&#039; or the &#039;&#039;Name of the archer&#039;&#039;. After clicking on &#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;, the software will open a page displaying the athlete position in the ranking (the corresponding row will be highlighted in yellow), together with the archers in the two places before and after the selected one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Class and Division Result Lists ==&amp;lt;!--T:24--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CDResults.PNG|thumb|Class and Division Result Lists]]&lt;br /&gt;
Clicking on this item, the software will open all the printout layouts for the Qualification Rounds. On this page, the main function is represented by the central icon &#039;&#039;Class &amp;amp; Division Result List&#039;&#039;. Clicking on this command, the user can print the Division and Class Ranking, both in the &#039;&#039;Class &amp;amp; Division Result List - Individual&#039;&#039; and in the &#039;&#039;Class &amp;amp; Division Result List - Team&#039;&#039; lists. Similarly, the user can click on the corresponding command on the right and on the left, but, then, only Individual (left) or Team Rankings (right) will be printed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:25--&amp;gt; Below these options, the software offers another row of icons that enable the user to print the rankings, where Medals Winners are highlighted.  These commands enable the user to choose the rankings to be printed, by Division and Class, or extracting a specific number of places and scores (starting from a cutoff) and so on. It will also allow the user to print results based on subclasses, or various groupings if desired. It is recommended that a user checks the printouts they need in advance, and tests to ensure what they need is actually generated sensibly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Events (Ind/Team) Result Lists ==&amp;lt;!--T:26--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:QRanking.PNG|thumb|Events (Ind/Team) Result Lists]]&lt;br /&gt;
This page displays another set of printout layouts. From this page, the user can manage the printing of the tournament Qualification Round, the options are defined by the &#039;Events&#039; that are created for the Tournament defined in the areas below. &lt;br /&gt;
* Individual - [[Competition/Individual Events Setup]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Team - [[ Competition/Team Events Setup ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:27--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These printouts are very important if in the tournament there is a scheduled elimination and final round, on the other hand, they are not necessary for any competition that is not including this kind of matches. The order of the printouts can be defined in the two event setup areas if required. As for the previous printout pages, there is a .pdf file in the central part of the screen, with the complete &#039;&#039;Qualification Round - Complete&#039;&#039; report, on the side columns. The user can find the &#039;&#039;Individual&#039;&#039; and the &#039;&#039;Team&#039;&#039; ones separately too. In the other printout pages, there is a parameter section, with which the user can customize the layouts. Plus, the last default .pdf created by the software is &#039;&#039;Shoot Off/Coin Toss Status Printout&#039;&#039;, that immediately displays if there is any Shot-Off or Coin Toss to be broken, before proceeding to the Elimination and Final Round.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Speaker ==&amp;lt;!--T:28--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This page displays the video printouts for the on-venue speaker. These printouts are mainly used in national and international events.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:29--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Qualification]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:30--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Content}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>DellaRossa</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Qualification&amp;diff=3808</id>
		<title>Qualification</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Qualification&amp;diff=3808"/>
		<updated>2026-06-19T06:50:30Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;DellaRossa: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Page in progress}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;languages/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:1--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The qualification round is a key phase in each tournament, from local ones to the most important competitions in Archery. Qualification can be before match-play as normal, or as the only part of a tournament to give final results (e.g. a WA1440). Everything that is related to scoring, scorecards, and printouts is available in the Qualification item of the main menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Input Score ==&amp;lt;!--T:2--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The main feature in the scores management. Selecting this option, the software will open dropdown submenu with some other items, which are related to the different procedures through which users can input scores in i@nseo. Users can enter scores in the system in some separate ways:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Standard Table=== &amp;lt;!--T:4--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Qualification ScoringTable Simple.png|thumb|Input score, Standard Table]]&lt;br /&gt;
After selecting the desired Session, Targets and Distance, clicking on &#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;, a screen with a spreadsheet layout will be displayed: here the user can input scores in a simple and fast way. Ticking the box &#039;&#039;G/X&#039;&#039;, the user can manage Xs and 10s (or 9s in indoor tournaments) that each athlete will shoot. Generally, this is a required activity during competitions; it can be skipped when the user needs to manage only some parts of scorecards and Tie-Break data is not relevant (e.g. for scoring at half distance).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:5--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In this page and in all the others, when you enter a value and press &#039;Tab&#039; the cursor will move to the next cell, which is essential for entering data quickly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:6--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|type=reminder|text=Once scores of all archers have been input, or if a score is changed, the user has to click on &#039;&#039;&#039;Re-Build Teams&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;Re-Calculate Distance Rank&#039;&#039;&#039; and, then &#039;&#039;&#039;Re-Calculate Final Rank&#039;&#039;&#039;. The software will open 3 different pop-ups: always click &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;OK&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The software will, then, generate the Final Rank for the tournament.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:7--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The user could also click on &#039;&#039;&#039;Save results for snapshot feature&#039;&#039;&#039;, to generate data for the real time displaying of ranks, but it is not necessary, unless there are visual electronic devices (TV or similar systems) in use, for they need to manage in real time the athletes ranks or positions in the entire competition. When not using the HHT or Electronic devices the results will be ranked and displayed only considering sessions and distances in the tournament.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:8--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SetIRMStatus.png|thumb|IRM Status Setting]]&lt;br /&gt;
If an athlete decides to retire from the competition, or they have not shown up, the user can set the archers state using the &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Set&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; button on the left side.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color: #FFD700; color: #000000;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;DNS-DID NOT START&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;: The athlete will still be counted in the tournament statistics (payments, targets list, and so on), but the software won’t let the user input any scores. &lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color: #3CB371; color: #ffffff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;DNF-DID NOT FINISH&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;: The athletes line will turn green, scores cannot be updated but the athlete will continue to the Head to Head event (if any) or receive a final rank from the qualification round&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color: #3CB371; color: #FFFFFF;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;DNF-DID NOT FINISH (NO RANK)&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;: The athlete will not receive a rank from the qualification round and will not continue into the Head to Head event&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For a more detailed description of these states, see the [[Participants/IRM Status Management|IRM Status Management]] page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Extended Table===&amp;lt;!--T:9--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EnterScores ExtendedInput.png|thumb|Input score, Extended Table]]&lt;br /&gt;
It works just as the Standard Table. You can select all the distances to edit, or just one, but in addition to scores to be input the other distances totals are also shown. It is useful to check the scores that have been&lt;br /&gt;
previously input, have been entered without mistakes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Arrow by Arrow (Advanced users)===&amp;lt;!--T:10--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ArrowbyArrowInsert.png|thumb|Input score, Arrow by arrow-Advanced users]]&lt;br /&gt;
This function enables the user to manage the score of each arrow in an end for each athlete. This scoring method should not be used when scoring with electronic devices, if the arrow values need editing in this case then use the scorecards view during the verification process [[Qualification#Get_Score_Barcodes | verification process]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Arrow by Arrow (Scorecards View)===&amp;lt;!--T:11--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ArrowbyArrowSC.png|thumb|Input score, Arrow by arrow-Scorecards View]]&lt;br /&gt;
This function works just as the previous method, but on a different view, that displays a chart, which is similar to a standard printed scorecard.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Check Data Update===&amp;lt;!--T:12--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CheckDataUpdate.PNG|thumb|Check data updates]]&lt;br /&gt;
This command enables the user to check Data Updates of scores, when the&lt;br /&gt;
competition is managed with different networked computers. The table shows the target numbers and they change colour based on when they last updated their data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Snapshot Configuration===&amp;lt;!--T:13--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Get Score Barcodes===&amp;lt;!--T:15--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ScorecardValidator.PNG|thumb|Check Scorecard using the Barcode]]&lt;br /&gt;
This is the area where, when using arrow-by-arrow scoring (e.g. Ianseo Scorekeeper NG / NG Pro), you can validate the scorecards. &lt;br /&gt;
* Open the link&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter the separator character in the box (usually a - ) and click &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Go&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Select the Distance and Session in the drop down boxes, and scan the first scorecard. &lt;br /&gt;
* Once you have scanned the first scorecard, and the values are all correctly matching the paper, scan the same scorecard again to confirm it, the target will vanish from the list of missing cards on the right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:16--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The other options after scanning are:&lt;br /&gt;
* Edit arrows: This will take you to the scorecard screen and allow you to edit the arrow values, or search for the mathematical error&lt;br /&gt;
* Edit totals: This will allow you to change the totals electronically recorded (although the WA rules allow you to alter the electronic arrows to match the paper and then use the electronic total) &lt;br /&gt;
* Remove 10: remove all the first tie break arrow totals (again if under WA rules the box is blank) &lt;br /&gt;
* Remove X/nine: remove all the second tie break arrow totals, as above&lt;br /&gt;
* Remove both: If needed and both boxes are blank.&lt;br /&gt;
* Reset both: Used if you have mistakenly removed the totals of the tie break arrows.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Print barcode Directives===&amp;lt;!--T:17--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This allows you to print a sheet to perform the barcode verification actions without needing to use a mouse during the process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Export text file == &amp;lt;!--T:18--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This function enables the user to save a text file (.txt) with all&lt;br /&gt;
the scores input in the tournament.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scorecard Printout ==  &amp;lt;!--T:19--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ScorecardPrintout.PNG|thumb|Scorecard Printout]]&lt;br /&gt;
This function has been recently optimized for being as adaptable as possible. The first part is split into two columns, where the user can manage all the variables needed for customizing the Scorecard Printout. Generally, to help users print what they need, the first part of the screen includes the REQUIRED options by default for a standard printed scorecard.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:20--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Should the user need to print any other kind of scorecards (e.g. &#039;&#039;Only Data&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;Only Target Number&#039;&#039;, or &#039;&#039;Only Drawings&#039;&#039;), the screen offers a selection list (on the left), where the user can choose the options needed. The user can also modify a scorecard, to omit any text string, or picture included in the tournament using the boxes on the right. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:21--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Once the scorecard type is selected and the final appearance is selected, the user can proceed to the actual printing page. In the lower row, the software shows some editable boxes, that enables the user to choose the Session and Number of Targets to be printed (and if empty targets are included or not). Once the Session is selected the target numbers autocomplete any empty part with all the available targets. Once Session and Targets are selected, the user has to choose the distance to be printed below the distance area. When electronic devices are in use for the automatic score management, the user can print scorecards created by the software with scores input directly by the archers, using the &#039;Print Scorecards filled in with all the value from single arrow&#039; option.&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to print a manual collection slip using the &#039;Intermediate Results collecting paper&#039; option at the very bottom.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Athlete Numbers == &amp;lt;!--T:22--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AthleteBadge.PNG|thumb|Athlete Numbers]]&lt;br /&gt;
This option enables the user to print the Athlete Numbers for the event. &lt;br /&gt;
* Open the page and select the badge type to &#039;Qualification Athlete number&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter a name for the design (such as &#039;Athlete Number&#039; and click on &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Create new badge&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To edit the parameters of the badge and move/add and remove elements click on &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Edit Badge&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The printing procedure is similar to the Scorecards one, for the user needs to select the desired Session and Targets.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Personal Rank ==&amp;lt;!--T:23--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PersonalRank.PNG|thumb|Personal Rank]]&lt;br /&gt;
This option enables the user to view a selected athlete in the referring Division and Class Ranking. As search values, the user can opt for the &#039;&#039;BIB number&#039;&#039;, the &#039;&#039;Family Name&#039;&#039; or the &#039;&#039;Name of the archer&#039;&#039;. After clicking on &#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;, the software will open a page displaying the athlete position in the ranking (the corresponding row will be highlighted in yellow), together with the archers in the two places before and after the selected one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Class and Division Result Lists ==&amp;lt;!--T:24--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CDResults.PNG|thumb|Class and Division Result Lists]]&lt;br /&gt;
Clicking on this item, the software will open all the printout layouts for the Qualification Rounds. On this page, the main function is represented by the central icon &#039;&#039;Class &amp;amp; Division Result List&#039;&#039;. Clicking on this command, the user can print the Division and Class Ranking, both in the &#039;&#039;Class &amp;amp; Division Result List - Individual&#039;&#039; and in the &#039;&#039;Class &amp;amp; Division Result List - Team&#039;&#039; lists. Similarly, the user can click on the corresponding command on the right and on the left, but, then, only Individual (left) or Team Rankings (right) will be printed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:25--&amp;gt; Below these options, the software offers another row of icons that enable the user to print the rankings, where Medals Winners are highlighted.  These commands enable the user to choose the rankings to be printed, by Division and Class, or extracting a specific number of places and scores (starting from a cutoff) and so on. It will also allow the user to print results based on subclasses, or various groupings if desired. It is recommended that a user checks the printouts they need in advance, and tests to ensure what they need is actually generated sensibly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Events (Ind/Team) Result Lists ==&amp;lt;!--T:26--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:QRanking.PNG|thumb|Events (Ind/Team) Result Lists]]&lt;br /&gt;
This page displays another set of printout layouts. From this page, the user can manage the printing of the tournament Qualification Round, the options are defined by the &#039;Events&#039; that are created for the Tournament defined in the areas below. &lt;br /&gt;
* Individual - [[Competition/Individual Events Setup]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Team - [[ Competition/Team Events Setup ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:27--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These printouts are very important if in the tournament there is a scheduled elimination and final round, on the other hand, they are not necessary for any competition that is not including this kind of matches. The order of the printouts can be defined in the two event setup areas if required. As for the previous printout pages, there is a .pdf file in the central part of the screen, with the complete &#039;&#039;Qualification Round - Complete&#039;&#039; report, on the side columns. The user can find the &#039;&#039;Individual&#039;&#039; and the &#039;&#039;Team&#039;&#039; ones separately too. In the other printout pages, there is a parameter section, with which the user can customize the layouts. Plus, the last default .pdf created by the software is &#039;&#039;Shoot Off/Coin Toss Status Printout&#039;&#039;, that immediately displays if there is any Shot-Off or Coin Toss to be broken, before proceeding to the Elimination and Final Round.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Speaker ==&amp;lt;!--T:28--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This page displays the video printouts for the on-venue speaker. These printouts are mainly used in national and international events.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:29--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Qualification]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:30--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Content}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>DellaRossa</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Qualification&amp;diff=3796</id>
		<title>Qualification</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Qualification&amp;diff=3796"/>
		<updated>2026-06-17T21:24:38Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;DellaRossa: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Page in progress}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;languages/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:1--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The qualification round is a key phase in each tournament, from local ones to the most important competitions in Archery. Qualification can be before match-play as normal, or as the only part of a tournament to give final results (e.g. a WA1440). Everything that is related to scoring, scorecards, and printouts is available in the Qualification item of the main menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Input Score ==&amp;lt;!--T:2--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The main feature in the scores management. Selecting this option, the software will open dropdown submenu with some other items, which are related to the different procedures through which users can input scores in i@nseo. Users can enter scores in the system in some separate ways:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Standard Table=== &amp;lt;!--T:4--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Qualification ScoringTable Simple.png|thumb|Input score, Standard Table]]&lt;br /&gt;
After selecting the desired Session, Targets and Distance, clicking on &#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;, a screen with a spreadsheet layout will be displayed: here the user can input scores in a simple and fast way. Ticking the box &#039;&#039;G/X&#039;&#039;, the user can manage Xs and 10s (or 9s in indoor tournaments) that each athlete will shoot. Generally, this is a required activity during competitions; it can be skipped when the user needs to manage only some parts of scorecards and Tie-Break data is not relevant (e.g. for scoring at half distance).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:5--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In this page and in all the others, when you enter a value and press &#039;Tab&#039; the cursor will move to the next cell, which is essential for entering data quickly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:6--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|type=reminder|text=Once scores of all archers have been input, or if a score is changed, the user has to click on &#039;&#039;&#039;Re-Build Teams&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;Re-Calculate Distance Rank&#039;&#039;&#039; and, then &#039;&#039;&#039;Re-Calculate Final Rank&#039;&#039;&#039;. The software will open 3 different pop-ups: always click &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;OK&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The software will, then, generate the Final Rank for the tournament.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:7--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The user could also click on &#039;&#039;&#039;Save results for snapshot feature&#039;&#039;&#039;, to generate data for the real time displaying of ranks, but it is not necessary, unless there are visual electronic devices (TV or similar systems) in use, for they need to manage in real time the athletes ranks or positions in the entire competition. When not using the HHT or Electronic devices the results will be ranked and displayed only considering sessions and distances in the tournament.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:8--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SetIRMStatus.png|thumb|IRM Status Setting]]&lt;br /&gt;
If an athlete decides to retire from the competition, or they have not shown up, the user can set the archers state using the &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Set&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; button on the left side.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color: #FFD700; color: #000000;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;DNS-DID NOT START&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;: The athlete will still be counted in the tournament statistics (payments, targets list, and so on), but the software won’t let the user input any scores. &lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color: #3CB371; color: #ffffff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;DNF-DID NOT FINISH&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;: The athletes line will turn green, scores cannot be updated but the athlete will continue to the Head to Head event (if any) or receive a final rank from the qualification round&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color: #3CB371; color: #FFFFFF;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;DNF-DID NOT FINISH (NO RANK)&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;: The athlete will not receive a rank from the qualification round and will not continue into the Head to Head event&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Extended Table===&amp;lt;!--T:9--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EnterScores ExtendedInput.png|thumb|Input score, Extended Table]]&lt;br /&gt;
It works just as the Standard Table. You can select all the distances to edit, or just one, but in addition to scores to be input the other distances totals are also shown. It is useful to check the scores that have been&lt;br /&gt;
previously input, have been entered without mistakes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Arrow by Arrow (Advanced users)===&amp;lt;!--T:10--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ArrowbyArrowInsert.png|thumb|Input score, Arrow by arrow-Advanced users]]&lt;br /&gt;
This function enables the user to manage the score of each arrow in an end for each athlete. This scoring method should not be used when scoring with electronic devices, if the arrow values need editing in this case then use the scorecards view during the verification process [[Qualification#Get_Score_Barcodes | verification process]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Arrow by Arrow (Scorecards View)===&amp;lt;!--T:11--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ArrowbyArrowSC.png|thumb|Input score, Arrow by arrow-Scorecards View]]&lt;br /&gt;
This function works just as the previous method, but on a different view, that displays a chart, which is similar to a standard printed scorecard.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Check Data Update===&amp;lt;!--T:12--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CheckDataUpdate.PNG|thumb|Check data updates]]&lt;br /&gt;
This command enables the user to check Data Updates of scores, when the&lt;br /&gt;
competition is managed with different networked computers. The table shows the target numbers and they change colour based on when they last updated their data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Snapshot Configuration===&amp;lt;!--T:13--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Get Score Barcodes===&amp;lt;!--T:15--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ScorecardValidator.PNG|thumb|Check Scorecard using the Barcode]]&lt;br /&gt;
This is the area where, when using arrow-by-arrow scoring (e.g. Ianseo Scorekeeper NG / NG Pro), you can validate the scorecards. &lt;br /&gt;
* Open the link&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter the separator character in the box (usually a - ) and click &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Go&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Select the Distance and Session in the drop down boxes, and scan the first scorecard. &lt;br /&gt;
* Once you have scanned the first scorecard, and the values are all correctly matching the paper, scan the same scorecard again to confirm it, the target will vanish from the list of missing cards on the right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:16--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The other options after scanning are:&lt;br /&gt;
* Edit arrows: This will take you to the scorecard screen and allow you to edit the arrow values, or search for the mathematical error&lt;br /&gt;
* Edit totals: This will allow you to change the totals electronically recorded (although the WA rules allow you to alter the electronic arrows to match the paper and then use the electronic total) &lt;br /&gt;
* Remove 10: remove all the first tie break arrow totals (again if under WA rules the box is blank) &lt;br /&gt;
* Remove X/nine: remove all the second tie break arrow totals, as above&lt;br /&gt;
* Remove both: If needed and both boxes are blank.&lt;br /&gt;
* Reset both: Used if you have mistakenly removed the totals of the tie break arrows.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Print barcode Directives===&amp;lt;!--T:17--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This allows you to print a sheet to perform the barcode verification actions without needing to use a mouse during the process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Export text file == &amp;lt;!--T:18--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This function enables the user to save a text file (.txt) with all&lt;br /&gt;
the scores input in the tournament.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scorecard Printout ==  &amp;lt;!--T:19--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ScorecardPrintout.PNG|thumb|Scorecard Printout]]&lt;br /&gt;
This function has been recently optimized for being as adaptable as possible. The first part is split into two columns, where the user can manage all the variables needed for customizing the Scorecard Printout. Generally, to help users print what they need, the first part of the screen includes the REQUIRED options by default for a standard printed scorecard.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:20--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Should the user need to print any other kind of scorecards (e.g. &#039;&#039;Only Data&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;Only Target Number&#039;&#039;, or &#039;&#039;Only Drawings&#039;&#039;), the screen offers a selection list (on the left), where the user can choose the options needed. The user can also modify a scorecard, to omit any text string, or picture included in the tournament using the boxes on the right. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:21--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Once the scorecard type is selected and the final appearance is selected, the user can proceed to the actual printing page. In the lower row, the software shows some editable boxes, that enables the user to choose the Session and Number of Targets to be printed (and if empty targets are included or not). Once the Session is selected the target numbers autocomplete any empty part with all the available targets. Once Session and Targets are selected, the user has to choose the distance to be printed below the distance area. When electronic devices are in use for the automatic score management, the user can print scorecards created by the software with scores input directly by the archers, using the &#039;Print Scorecards filled in with all the value from single arrow&#039; option.&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to print a manual collection slip using the &#039;Intermediate Results collecting paper&#039; option at the very bottom.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Athlete Numbers == &amp;lt;!--T:22--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AthleteBadge.PNG|thumb|Athlete Numbers]]&lt;br /&gt;
This option enables the user to print the Athlete Numbers for the event. &lt;br /&gt;
* Open the page and select the badge type to &#039;Qualification Athlete number&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter a name for the design (such as &#039;Athlete Number&#039; and click on &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Create new badge&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To edit the parameters of the badge and move/add and remove elements click on &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Edit Badge&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The printing procedure is similar to the Scorecards one, for the user needs to select the desired Session and Targets.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Personal Rank ==&amp;lt;!--T:23--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PersonalRank.PNG|thumb|Personal Rank]]&lt;br /&gt;
This option enables the user to view a selected athlete in the referring Division and Class Ranking. As search values, the user can opt for the &#039;&#039;BIB number&#039;&#039;, the &#039;&#039;Family Name&#039;&#039; or the &#039;&#039;Name of the archer&#039;&#039;. After clicking on &#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;, the software will open a page displaying the athlete position in the ranking (the corresponding row will be highlighted in yellow), together with the archers in the two places before and after the selected one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Class and Division Result Lists ==&amp;lt;!--T:24--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CDResults.PNG|thumb|Class and Division Result Lists]]&lt;br /&gt;
Clicking on this item, the software will open all the printout layouts for the Qualification Rounds. On this page, the main function is represented by the central icon &#039;&#039;Class &amp;amp; Division Result List&#039;&#039;. Clicking on this command, the user can print the Division and Class Ranking, both in the &#039;&#039;Class &amp;amp; Division Result List - Individual&#039;&#039; and in the &#039;&#039;Class &amp;amp; Division Result List - Team&#039;&#039; lists. Similarly, the user can click on the corresponding command on the right and on the left, but, then, only Individual (left) or Team Rankings (right) will be printed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:25--&amp;gt; Below these options, the software offers another row of icons that enable the user to print the rankings, where Medals Winners are highlighted.  These commands enable the user to choose the rankings to be printed, by Division and Class, or extracting a specific number of places and scores (starting from a cutoff) and so on. It will also allow the user to print results based on subclasses, or various groupings if desired. It is recommended that a user checks the printouts they need in advance, and tests to ensure what they need is actually generated sensibly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Events (Ind/Team) Result Lists ==&amp;lt;!--T:26--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:QRanking.PNG|thumb|Events (Ind/Team) Result Lists]]&lt;br /&gt;
This page displays another set of printout layouts. From this page, the user can manage the printing of the tournament Qualification Round, the options are defined by the &#039;Events&#039; that are created for the Tournament defined in the areas below. &lt;br /&gt;
* Individual - [[Competition/Individual Events Setup]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Team - [[ Competition/Team Events Setup ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:27--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These printouts are very important if in the tournament there is a scheduled elimination and final round, on the other hand, they are not necessary for any competition that is not including this kind of matches. The order of the printouts can be defined in the two event setup areas if required. As for the previous printout pages, there is a .pdf file in the central part of the screen, with the complete &#039;&#039;Qualification Round - Complete&#039;&#039; report, on the side columns. The user can find the &#039;&#039;Individual&#039;&#039; and the &#039;&#039;Team&#039;&#039; ones separately too. In the other printout pages, there is a parameter section, with which the user can customize the layouts. Plus, the last default .pdf created by the software is &#039;&#039;Shoot Off/Coin Toss Status Printout&#039;&#039;, that immediately displays if there is any Shot-Off or Coin Toss to be broken, before proceeding to the Elimination and Final Round.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Speaker ==&amp;lt;!--T:28--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This page displays the video printouts for the on-venue speaker. These printouts are mainly used in national and international events.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:29--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Qualification]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:30--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Content}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>DellaRossa</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Qualification&amp;diff=3795</id>
		<title>Qualification</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Qualification&amp;diff=3795"/>
		<updated>2026-06-17T21:22:57Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;DellaRossa: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Page in progress}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;languages/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:1--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The qualification round is a key phase in each tournament, from local ones to the most important competitions in Archery. Qualification can be before match-play as normal, or as the only part of a tournament to give final results (e.g. a WA1440). Everything that is related to scoring, scorecards, and printouts is available in the Qualification item of the main menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Input Score ==&amp;lt;!--T:2--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The main feature in the scores management. Selecting this option, the software will open dropdown submenu with some other items, which are related to the different procedures through which users can input scores in i@nseo. Users can enter scores in the system in some separate ways:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Standard Table=== &amp;lt;!--T:4--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Qualification ScoringTable Simple.png|thumb|Input score, Standard Table]]&lt;br /&gt;
After selecting the desired Session, Targets and Distance, clicking on &#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;, a screen with a spreadsheet layout will be displayed: here the user can input scores in a simple and fast way. Ticking the box &#039;&#039;G/X&#039;&#039;, the user can manage Xs and 10s (or 9s in indoor tournaments) that each athlete will shoot. Generally, this is a required activity during competitions; it can be skipped when the user needs to manage only some parts of scorecards and Tie-Break data is not relevant (e.g. for scoring at half distance).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:5--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In this page and in all the others, when you enter a value and press &#039;Tab&#039; the cursor will move to the next cell, which is essential for entering data quickly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:6--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|type=reminder|text=Once scores of all archers have been input, or if a score is changed, the user has to click on &#039;&#039;&#039;Re-Build Teams&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;Re-Calculate Distance Rank&#039;&#039;&#039; and, then &#039;&#039;&#039;Re-Calculate Final Rank&#039;&#039;&#039;. The software will open 3 different pop-ups: always click &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;OK&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The software will, then, generate the Final Rank for the tournament.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:7--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The user could also click on &#039;&#039;&#039;Save results for snapshot feature&#039;&#039;&#039;, to generate data for the real time displaying of ranks, but it is not necessary, unless there are visual electronic devices (TV or similar systems) in use, for they need to manage in real time the athletes ranks or positions in the entire competition. When not using the HHT or Electronic devices the results will be ranked and displayed only considering sessions and distances in the tournament.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:8--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SetIRMStatus.png|thumb|IRM Status Setting]]&lt;br /&gt;
If an athlete decides to retire from the competition, or they have not shown up, the user can set the archers state using the &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Set&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; button on the left side.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color: #FFD700; color: #000000;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;DNS-DID NOT START&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;: The athlete will still be counted in the tournament statistics (payments, targets list, and so on), but the software won’t let the user input any scores. &lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color: #3CB371; color: #000000;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;DNF-DID NOT FINISH&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;: The athletes line will turn green, scores cannot be updated but the athlete will continue to the Head to Head event (if any) or receive a final rank from the qualification round&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color: #3CB371; color: #000000;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;DNF-DID NOT FINISH (NO RANK)&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;: The athlete will not receive a rank from the qualification round and will not continue into the Head to Head event&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Extended Table===&amp;lt;!--T:9--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EnterScores ExtendedInput.png|thumb|Input score, Extended Table]]&lt;br /&gt;
It works just as the Standard Table. You can select all the distances to edit, or just one, but in addition to scores to be input the other distances totals are also shown. It is useful to check the scores that have been&lt;br /&gt;
previously input, have been entered without mistakes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Arrow by Arrow (Advanced users)===&amp;lt;!--T:10--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ArrowbyArrowInsert.png|thumb|Input score, Arrow by arrow-Advanced users]]&lt;br /&gt;
This function enables the user to manage the score of each arrow in an end for each athlete. This scoring method should not be used when scoring with electronic devices, if the arrow values need editing in this case then use the scorecards view during the verification process [[Qualification#Get_Score_Barcodes | verification process]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Arrow by Arrow (Scorecards View)===&amp;lt;!--T:11--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ArrowbyArrowSC.png|thumb|Input score, Arrow by arrow-Scorecards View]]&lt;br /&gt;
This function works just as the previous method, but on a different view, that displays a chart, which is similar to a standard printed scorecard.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Check Data Update===&amp;lt;!--T:12--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CheckDataUpdate.PNG|thumb|Check data updates]]&lt;br /&gt;
This command enables the user to check Data Updates of scores, when the&lt;br /&gt;
competition is managed with different networked computers. The table shows the target numbers and they change colour based on when they last updated their data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Snapshot Configuration===&amp;lt;!--T:13--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Get Score Barcodes===&amp;lt;!--T:15--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ScorecardValidator.PNG|thumb|Check Scorecard using the Barcode]]&lt;br /&gt;
This is the area where, when using arrow-by-arrow scoring (e.g. Ianseo Scorekeeper NG / NG Pro), you can validate the scorecards. &lt;br /&gt;
* Open the link&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter the separator character in the box (usually a - ) and click &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Go&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Select the Distance and Session in the drop down boxes, and scan the first scorecard. &lt;br /&gt;
* Once you have scanned the first scorecard, and the values are all correctly matching the paper, scan the same scorecard again to confirm it, the target will vanish from the list of missing cards on the right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:16--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The other options after scanning are:&lt;br /&gt;
* Edit arrows: This will take you to the scorecard screen and allow you to edit the arrow values, or search for the mathematical error&lt;br /&gt;
* Edit totals: This will allow you to change the totals electronically recorded (although the WA rules allow you to alter the electronic arrows to match the paper and then use the electronic total) &lt;br /&gt;
* Remove 10: remove all the first tie break arrow totals (again if under WA rules the box is blank) &lt;br /&gt;
* Remove X/nine: remove all the second tie break arrow totals, as above&lt;br /&gt;
* Remove both: If needed and both boxes are blank.&lt;br /&gt;
* Reset both: Used if you have mistakenly removed the totals of the tie break arrows.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Print barcode Directives===&amp;lt;!--T:17--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This allows you to print a sheet to perform the barcode verification actions without needing to use a mouse during the process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Export text file == &amp;lt;!--T:18--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This function enables the user to save a text file (.txt) with all&lt;br /&gt;
the scores input in the tournament.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scorecard Printout ==  &amp;lt;!--T:19--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ScorecardPrintout.PNG|thumb|Scorecard Printout]]&lt;br /&gt;
This function has been recently optimized for being as adaptable as possible. The first part is split into two columns, where the user can manage all the variables needed for customizing the Scorecard Printout. Generally, to help users print what they need, the first part of the screen includes the REQUIRED options by default for a standard printed scorecard.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:20--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Should the user need to print any other kind of scorecards (e.g. &#039;&#039;Only Data&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;Only Target Number&#039;&#039;, or &#039;&#039;Only Drawings&#039;&#039;), the screen offers a selection list (on the left), where the user can choose the options needed. The user can also modify a scorecard, to omit any text string, or picture included in the tournament using the boxes on the right. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:21--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Once the scorecard type is selected and the final appearance is selected, the user can proceed to the actual printing page. In the lower row, the software shows some editable boxes, that enables the user to choose the Session and Number of Targets to be printed (and if empty targets are included or not). Once the Session is selected the target numbers autocomplete any empty part with all the available targets. Once Session and Targets are selected, the user has to choose the distance to be printed below the distance area. When electronic devices are in use for the automatic score management, the user can print scorecards created by the software with scores input directly by the archers, using the &#039;Print Scorecards filled in with all the value from single arrow&#039; option.&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to print a manual collection slip using the &#039;Intermediate Results collecting paper&#039; option at the very bottom.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Athlete Numbers == &amp;lt;!--T:22--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AthleteBadge.PNG|thumb|Athlete Numbers]]&lt;br /&gt;
This option enables the user to print the Athlete Numbers for the event. &lt;br /&gt;
* Open the page and select the badge type to &#039;Qualification Athlete number&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter a name for the design (such as &#039;Athlete Number&#039; and click on &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Create new badge&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To edit the parameters of the badge and move/add and remove elements click on &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Edit Badge&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The printing procedure is similar to the Scorecards one, for the user needs to select the desired Session and Targets.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Personal Rank ==&amp;lt;!--T:23--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PersonalRank.PNG|thumb|Personal Rank]]&lt;br /&gt;
This option enables the user to view a selected athlete in the referring Division and Class Ranking. As search values, the user can opt for the &#039;&#039;BIB number&#039;&#039;, the &#039;&#039;Family Name&#039;&#039; or the &#039;&#039;Name of the archer&#039;&#039;. After clicking on &#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;, the software will open a page displaying the athlete position in the ranking (the corresponding row will be highlighted in yellow), together with the archers in the two places before and after the selected one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Class and Division Result Lists ==&amp;lt;!--T:24--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CDResults.PNG|thumb|Class and Division Result Lists]]&lt;br /&gt;
Clicking on this item, the software will open all the printout layouts for the Qualification Rounds. On this page, the main function is represented by the central icon &#039;&#039;Class &amp;amp; Division Result List&#039;&#039;. Clicking on this command, the user can print the Division and Class Ranking, both in the &#039;&#039;Class &amp;amp; Division Result List - Individual&#039;&#039; and in the &#039;&#039;Class &amp;amp; Division Result List - Team&#039;&#039; lists. Similarly, the user can click on the corresponding command on the right and on the left, but, then, only Individual (left) or Team Rankings (right) will be printed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:25--&amp;gt; Below these options, the software offers another row of icons that enable the user to print the rankings, where Medals Winners are highlighted.  These commands enable the user to choose the rankings to be printed, by Division and Class, or extracting a specific number of places and scores (starting from a cutoff) and so on. It will also allow the user to print results based on subclasses, or various groupings if desired. It is recommended that a user checks the printouts they need in advance, and tests to ensure what they need is actually generated sensibly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Events (Ind/Team) Result Lists ==&amp;lt;!--T:26--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:QRanking.PNG|thumb|Events (Ind/Team) Result Lists]]&lt;br /&gt;
This page displays another set of printout layouts. From this page, the user can manage the printing of the tournament Qualification Round, the options are defined by the &#039;Events&#039; that are created for the Tournament defined in the areas below. &lt;br /&gt;
* Individual - [[Competition/Individual Events Setup]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Team - [[ Competition/Team Events Setup ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:27--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These printouts are very important if in the tournament there is a scheduled elimination and final round, on the other hand, they are not necessary for any competition that is not including this kind of matches. The order of the printouts can be defined in the two event setup areas if required. As for the previous printout pages, there is a .pdf file in the central part of the screen, with the complete &#039;&#039;Qualification Round - Complete&#039;&#039; report, on the side columns. The user can find the &#039;&#039;Individual&#039;&#039; and the &#039;&#039;Team&#039;&#039; ones separately too. In the other printout pages, there is a parameter section, with which the user can customize the layouts. Plus, the last default .pdf created by the software is &#039;&#039;Shoot Off/Coin Toss Status Printout&#039;&#039;, that immediately displays if there is any Shot-Off or Coin Toss to be broken, before proceeding to the Elimination and Final Round.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Speaker ==&amp;lt;!--T:28--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This page displays the video printouts for the on-venue speaker. These printouts are mainly used in national and international events.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:29--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Qualification]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:30--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Content}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>DellaRossa</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Qualification&amp;diff=3794</id>
		<title>Qualification</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Qualification&amp;diff=3794"/>
		<updated>2026-06-17T21:18:58Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;DellaRossa: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Page in progress}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;languages/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:1--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The qualification round is a key phase in each tournament, from local ones to the most important competitions in Archery. Qualification can be before match-play as normal, or as the only part of a tournament to give final results (e.g. a WA1440). Everything that is related to scoring, scorecards, and printouts is available in the Qualification item of the main menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Input Score ==&amp;lt;!--T:2--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The main feature in the scores management. Selecting this option, the software will open dropdown submenu with some other items, which are related to the different procedures through which users can input scores in i@nseo. Users can enter scores in the system in some separate ways:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Standard Table=== &amp;lt;!--T:4--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Qualification ScoringTable Simple.png|thumb|Input score, Standard Table]]&lt;br /&gt;
After selecting the desired Session, Targets and Distance, clicking on &#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;, a screen with a spreadsheet layout will be displayed: here the user can input scores in a simple and fast way. Ticking the box &#039;&#039;G/X&#039;&#039;, the user can manage Xs and 10s (or 9s in indoor tournaments) that each athlete will shoot. Generally, this is a required activity during competitions; it can be skipped when the user needs to manage only some parts of scorecards and Tie-Break data is not relevant (e.g. for scoring at half distance).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:5--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In this page and in all the others, when you enter a value and press &#039;Tab&#039; the cursor will move to the next cell, which is essential for entering data quickly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:6--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|type=reminder|text=Once scores of all archers have been input, or if a score is changed, the user has to click on &#039;&#039;&#039;Re-Build Teams&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;Re-Calculate Distance Rank&#039;&#039;&#039; and, then &#039;&#039;&#039;Re-Calculate Final Rank&#039;&#039;&#039;. The software will open 3 different pop-ups: always click &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;OK&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The software will, then, generate the Final Rank for the tournament.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:7--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The user could also click on &#039;&#039;&#039;Save results for snapshot feature&#039;&#039;&#039;, to generate data for the real time displaying of ranks, but it is not necessary, unless there are visual electronic devices (TV or similar systems) in use, for they need to manage in real time the athletes ranks or positions in the entire competition. When not using the HHT or Electronic devices the results will be ranked and displayed only considering sessions and distances in the tournament.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:8--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SetIRMStatus.png|thumb|IRM Status Setting]]&lt;br /&gt;
If an athlete decides to retire from the competition, or they have not shown up, the user can set the archers state using the &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Set&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; button on the left side.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color: #FFD700; color: #000000;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;DNS-DID NOT START&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;: The athlete will still be counted in the tournament statistics (payments, targets list, and so on), but the software won’t let the user input any scores. &lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color: #3CB371; color: #000000;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;DNF-DID NOT FINISH&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;: The athletes line will turn green, scores cannot be updated but the athlete will continue to the Head to Head event (if any) or receive a final rank from the qualification round&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color: #3CB371; color: #000000;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;DNF-DID NOT FINISH (NO RANK)&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;: The athlete will not receive a rank from the qualification round and will not continue into the Head to Head event&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Extended Table===&amp;lt;!--T:9--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EnterScores ExtendedInput.png|thumb|Input score, Extended Table]]&lt;br /&gt;
It works just as the Standard Table. You can select all the distances to edit, or just one, but in addition to scores to be input the other distances totals are also shown. It is useful to check the scores that have been&lt;br /&gt;
previously input, have been entered without mistakes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Arrow by Arrow (Advanced users)===&amp;lt;!--T:10--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ArrowbyArrowInsert.png|thumb|Input score, Arrow by arrow-Advanced users]]&lt;br /&gt;
This function enables the user to manage the score of each arrow in an end for each athlete. This scoring method should not be used when scoring with electronic devices, if the arrow values need editing in this case then use the scorecards view during the verification process [[Qualification#Get_Score_Barcodes | verification process]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Arrow by Arrow (Scorecards View)===&amp;lt;!--T:11--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ArrowbyArrowSC.png|thumb|Input score, Arrow by arrow-Scorecards View]]&lt;br /&gt;
This function works just as the previous method, but on a different view, that displays a chart, which is similar to a standard printed scorecard.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Check Data Update===&amp;lt;!--T:12--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CheckDataUpdate.PNG|thumb|Check data updates]]&lt;br /&gt;
This command enables the user to check Data Updates of scores, when the&lt;br /&gt;
competition is managed with different networked computers. The table shows the target numbers and they change colour based on when they last updated their data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:13--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===Snapshot Configuration===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Get Score Barcodes===&amp;lt;!--T:15--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ScorecardValidator.PNG|thumb|Check Scorecard using the Barcode]]&lt;br /&gt;
This is the area where, when using arrow-by-arrow scoring (e.g. Ianseo Scorekeeper NG / NG Pro), you can validate the scorecards. &lt;br /&gt;
* Open the link&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter the separator character in the box (usually a - ) and click &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Go&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Select the Distance and Session in the drop down boxes, and scan the first scorecard. &lt;br /&gt;
* Once you have scanned the first scorecard, and the values are all correctly matching the paper, scan the same scorecard again to confirm it, the target will vanish from the list of missing cards on the right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:16--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The other options after scanning are:&lt;br /&gt;
* Edit arrows: This will take you to the scorecard screen and allow you to edit the arrow values, or search for the mathematical error&lt;br /&gt;
* Edit totals: This will allow you to change the totals electronically recorded (although the WA rules allow you to alter the electronic arrows to match the paper and then use the electronic total) &lt;br /&gt;
* Remove 10: remove all the first tie break arrow totals (again if under WA rules the box is blank) &lt;br /&gt;
* Remove X/nine: remove all the second tie break arrow totals, as above&lt;br /&gt;
* Remove both: If needed and both boxes are blank.&lt;br /&gt;
* Reset both: Used if you have mistakenly removed the totals of the tie break arrows.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Print barcode Directives===&amp;lt;!--T:17--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This allows you to print a sheet to perform the barcode verification actions without needing to use a mouse during the process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Export text file == &amp;lt;!--T:18--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This function enables the user to save a text file (.txt) with all&lt;br /&gt;
the scores input in the tournament.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scorecard Printout ==  &amp;lt;!--T:19--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ScorecardPrintout.PNG|thumb|Scorecard Printout]]&lt;br /&gt;
This function has been recently optimized for being as adaptable as possible. The first part is split into two columns, where the user can manage all the variables needed for customizing the Scorecard Printout. Generally, to help users print what they need, the first part of the screen includes the REQUIRED options by default for a standard printed scorecard.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:20--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Should the user need to print any other kind of scorecards (e.g. &#039;&#039;Only Data&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;Only Target Number&#039;&#039;, or &#039;&#039;Only Drawings&#039;&#039;), the screen offers a selection list (on the left), where the user can choose the options needed. The user can also modify a scorecard, to omit any text string, or picture included in the tournament using the boxes on the right. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:21--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Once the scorecard type is selected and the final appearance is selected, the user can proceed to the actual printing page. In the lower row, the software shows some editable boxes, that enables the user to choose the Session and Number of Targets to be printed (and if empty targets are included or not). Once the Session is selected the target numbers autocomplete any empty part with all the available targets. Once Session and Targets are selected, the user has to choose the distance to be printed below the distance area. When electronic devices are in use for the automatic score management, the user can print scorecards created by the software with scores input directly by the archers, using the &#039;Print Scorecards filled in with all the value from single arrow&#039; option.&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to print a manual collection slip using the &#039;Intermediate Results collecting paper&#039; option at the very bottom.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Athlete Numbers == &amp;lt;!--T:22--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AthleteBadge.PNG|thumb|Athlete Numbers]]&lt;br /&gt;
This option enables the user to print the Athlete Numbers for the event. &lt;br /&gt;
* Open the page and select the badge type to &#039;Qualification Athlete number&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter a name for the design (such as &#039;Athlete Number&#039; and click on &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Create new badge&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To edit the parameters of the badge and move/add and remove elements click on &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Edit Badge&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The printing procedure is similar to the Scorecards one, for the user needs to select the desired Session and Targets.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Personal Rank ==&amp;lt;!--T:23--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PersonalRank.PNG|thumb|Personal Rank]]&lt;br /&gt;
This option enables the user to view a selected athlete in the referring Division and Class Ranking. As search values, the user can opt for the &#039;&#039;BIB number&#039;&#039;, the &#039;&#039;Family Name&#039;&#039; or the &#039;&#039;Name of the archer&#039;&#039;. After clicking on &#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;, the software will open a page displaying the athlete position in the ranking (the corresponding row will be highlighted in yellow), together with the archers in the two places before and after the selected one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Class and Division Result Lists ==&amp;lt;!--T:24--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CDResults.PNG|thumb|Class and Division Result Lists]]&lt;br /&gt;
Clicking on this item, the software will open all the printout layouts for the Qualification Rounds. On this page, the main function is represented by the central icon &#039;&#039;Class &amp;amp; Division Result List&#039;&#039;. Clicking on this command, the user can print the Division and Class Ranking, both in the &#039;&#039;Class &amp;amp; Division Result List - Individual&#039;&#039; and in the &#039;&#039;Class &amp;amp; Division Result List - Team&#039;&#039; lists. Similarly, the user can click on the corresponding command on the right and on the left, but, then, only Individual (left) or Team Rankings (right) will be printed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:25--&amp;gt; Below these options, the software offers another row of icons that enable the user to print the rankings, where Medals Winners are highlighted.  These commands enable the user to choose the rankings to be printed, by Division and Class, or extracting a specific number of places and scores (starting from a cutoff) and so on. It will also allow the user to print results based on subclasses, or various groupings if desired. It is recommended that a user checks the printouts they need in advance, and tests to ensure what they need is actually generated sensibly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Events (Ind/Team) Result Lists ==&amp;lt;!--T:26--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:QRanking.PNG|thumb|Events (Ind/Team) Result Lists]]&lt;br /&gt;
This page displays another set of printout layouts. From this page, the user can manage the printing of the tournament Qualification Round, the options are defined by the &#039;Events&#039; that are created for the Tournament defined in the areas below. &lt;br /&gt;
* Individual - [[Competition/Individual Events Setup]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Team - [[ Competition/Team Events Setup ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:27--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These printouts are very important if in the tournament there is a scheduled elimination and final round, on the other hand, they are not necessary for any competition that is not including this kind of matches. The order of the printouts can be defined in the two event setup areas if required. As for the previous printout pages, there is a .pdf file in the central part of the screen, with the complete &#039;&#039;Qualification Round - Complete&#039;&#039; report, on the side columns. The user can find the &#039;&#039;Individual&#039;&#039; and the &#039;&#039;Team&#039;&#039; ones separately too. In the other printout pages, there is a parameter section, with which the user can customize the layouts. Plus, the last default .pdf created by the software is &#039;&#039;Shoot Off/Coin Toss Status Printout&#039;&#039;, that immediately displays if there is any Shot-Off or Coin Toss to be broken, before proceeding to the Elimination and Final Round.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Speaker ==&amp;lt;!--T:28--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This page displays the video printouts for the on-venue speaker. These printouts are mainly used in national and international events.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:29--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Qualification]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:30--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Content}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>DellaRossa</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Qualification&amp;diff=3793</id>
		<title>Qualification</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Qualification&amp;diff=3793"/>
		<updated>2026-06-17T21:11:19Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;DellaRossa: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Page in progress}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;languages/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:1--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The qualification round is a key phase in each tournament, from local ones to the most important competitions in Archery. Qualification can be before match-play as normal, or as the only part of a tournament to give final results (e.g. a WA1440). Everything that is related to scoring, scorecards, and printouts is available in the Qualification item of the main menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Input Score ==&amp;lt;!--T:2--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The main feature in the scores management. Selecting this option, the software will open dropdown submenu with some other items, which are related to the different procedures through which users can input scores in i@nseo. Users can enter scores in the system in some separate ways:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Standard Table=== &amp;lt;!--T:4--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Qualification ScoringTable Simple.png|thumb|Input score, Standard Table]]&lt;br /&gt;
After selecting the desired Session, Targets and Distance, clicking on &#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;, a screen with a spreadsheet layout will be displayed: here the user can input scores in a simple and fast way. Ticking the box &#039;&#039;G/X&#039;&#039;, the user can manage Xs and 10s (or 9s in indoor tournaments) that each athlete will shoot. Generally, this is a required activity during competitions; it can be skipped when the user needs to manage only some parts of scorecards and Tie-Break data is not relevant (e.g. for scoring at half distance).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:5--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In this page and in all the others, when you enter a value and press &#039;Tab&#039; the cursor will move to the next cell, which is essential for entering data quickly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:6--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|type=reminder|text=Once scores of all archers have been input, or if a score is changed, the user has to click on &#039;&#039;&#039;Re-Build Teams&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;Re-Calculate Distance Rank&#039;&#039;&#039; and, then &#039;&#039;&#039;Re-Calculate Final Rank&#039;&#039;&#039;. The software will open 3 different pop-ups: always click &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;OK&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The software will, then, generate the Final Rank for the tournament.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:7--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The user could also click on &#039;&#039;&#039;Save results for snapshot feature&#039;&#039;&#039;, to generate data for the real time displaying of ranks, but it is not necessary, unless there are visual electronic devices (TV or similar systems) in use, for they need to manage in real time the athletes ranks or positions in the entire competition. When not using the HHT or Electronic devices the results will be ranked and displayed only considering sessions and distances in the tournament.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:8--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SetIRMStatus.png|thumb|IRM Status Setting]]&lt;br /&gt;
If an athlete decides to retire from the competition, or they have not shown up, the user can set the archers state using the &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Set&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; button on the left side.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color: #FFD700; color: #000000;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;DNS-DID NOT START&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;: The athlete will still be counted in the tournament statistics (payments, targets list, and so on), but the software won’t let the user input any scores. &lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color: #3CB371; color: #000000;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;DNF-DID NOT FINISH&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;: The athletes line will turn green, scores cannot be updated but the athlete will continue to the Head to Head event (if any) or receive a final rank from the qualification round&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color: #3CB371; color: #000000;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;DNF-DID NOT FINISH (NO RANK)&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;: The athlete will not receive a rank from the qualification round and will not continue into the Head to Head event&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Extended Table===&amp;lt;!--T:9--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EnterScores ExtendedInput.png|thumb|Input score, Extended Table]]&lt;br /&gt;
It works just as the Standard Table. You can select all the distances to edit, or just one, but in addition to scores to be input the other distances totals are also shown. It is useful to check the scores that have been&lt;br /&gt;
previously input, have been entered without mistakes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Arrow by Arrow (Advanced users)===&amp;lt;!--T:10--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ArrowbyArrowInsert.png|thumb|Input score, Arrow by arrow-Advanced users]]&lt;br /&gt;
This function enables the user to manage the score of each arrow in an end for each athlete. This scoring method should not be used when scoring with electronic devices, if the arrow values need editing in this case then use the scorecards view during the verification process (Link to Scorecards verification).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Arrow by Arrow (Scorecards View)===&amp;lt;!--T:11--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ArrowbyArrowSC.png|thumb|Input score, Arrow by arrow-Scorecards View]]&lt;br /&gt;
This function works just as the previous method, but on a different view, that displays a chart, which is similar to a standard printed scorecard.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Check Data Update===&amp;lt;!--T:12--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CheckDataUpdate.PNG|thumb|Check data updates]]&lt;br /&gt;
This command enables the user to check Data Updates of scores, when the&lt;br /&gt;
competition is managed with different networked computers. The table shows the target numbers and they change colour based on when they last updated their data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:13--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===Snapshot Configuration===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Get Score Barcodes===&amp;lt;!--T:15--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ScorecardValidator.PNG|thumb|Check Scorecard using the Barcode]]&lt;br /&gt;
This is the area where, when using arrow-by-arrow scoring (e.g. Ianseo Scorekeeper NG / NG Pro), you can validate the scorecards. &lt;br /&gt;
* Open the link&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter the separator character in the box (usually a - ) and click &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Go&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Select the Distance and Session in the drop down boxes, and scan the first scorecard. &lt;br /&gt;
* Once you have scanned the first scorecard, and the values are all correctly matching the paper, scan the same scorecard again to confirm it, the target will vanish from the list of missing cards on the right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:16--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The other options after scanning are:&lt;br /&gt;
* Edit arrows: This will take you to the scorecard screen and allow you to edit the arrow values, or search for the mathematical error&lt;br /&gt;
* Edit totals: This will allow you to change the totals electronically recorded (although the WA rules allow you to alter the electronic arrows to match the paper and then use the electronic total) &lt;br /&gt;
* Remove 10: remove all the first tie break arrow totals (again if under WA rules the box is blank) &lt;br /&gt;
* Remove X/nine: remove all the second tie break arrow totals, as above&lt;br /&gt;
* Remove both: If needed and both boxes are blank.&lt;br /&gt;
* Reset both: Used if you have mistakenly removed the totals of the tie break arrows.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Print barcode Directives===&amp;lt;!--T:17--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This allows you to print a sheet to perform the barcode verification actions without needing to use a mouse during the process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Export text file == &amp;lt;!--T:18--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This function enables the user to save a text file (.txt) with all&lt;br /&gt;
the scores input in the tournament.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scorecard Printout ==  &amp;lt;!--T:19--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ScorecardPrintout.PNG|thumb|Scorecard Printout]]&lt;br /&gt;
This function has been recently optimized for being as adaptable as possible. The first part is split into two columns, where the user can manage all the variables needed for customizing the Scorecard Printout. Generally, to help users print what they need, the first part of the screen includes the REQUIRED options by default for a standard printed scorecard.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:20--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Should the user need to print any other kind of scorecards (e.g. &#039;&#039;Only Data&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;Only Target Number&#039;&#039;, or &#039;&#039;Only Drawings&#039;&#039;), the screen offers a selection list (on the left), where the user can choose the options needed. The user can also modify a scorecard, to omit any text string, or picture included in the tournament using the boxes on the right. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:21--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Once the scorecard type is selected and the final appearance is selected, the user can proceed to the actual printing page. In the lower row, the software shows some editable boxes, that enables the user to choose the Session and Number of Targets to be printed (and if empty targets are included or not). Once the Session is selected the target numbers autocomplete any empty part with all the available targets. Once Session and Targets are selected, the user has to choose the distance to be printed below the distance area. When electronic devices are in use for the automatic score management, the user can print scorecards created by the software with scores input directly by the archers, using the &#039;Print Scorecards filled in with all the value from single arrow&#039; option.&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to print a manual collection slip using the &#039;Intermediate Results collecting paper&#039; option at the very bottom.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Athlete Numbers == &amp;lt;!--T:22--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AthleteBadge.PNG|thumb|Athlete Numbers]]&lt;br /&gt;
This option enables the user to print the Athlete Numbers for the event. &lt;br /&gt;
* Open the page and select the badge type to &#039;Qualification Athlete number&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter a name for the design (such as &#039;Athlete Number&#039; and click on &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Create new badge&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To edit the parameters of the badge and move/add and remove elements click on &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Edit Badge&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The printing procedure is similar to the Scorecards one, for the user needs to select the desired Session and Targets.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Personal Rank ==&amp;lt;!--T:23--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PersonalRank.PNG|thumb|Personal Rank]]&lt;br /&gt;
This option enables the user to view a selected athlete in the referring Division and Class Ranking. As search values, the user can opt for the &#039;&#039;BIB number&#039;&#039;, the &#039;&#039;Family Name&#039;&#039; or the &#039;&#039;Name of the archer&#039;&#039;. After clicking on &#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;, the software will open a page displaying the athlete position in the ranking (the corresponding row will be highlighted in yellow), together with the archers in the two places before and after the selected one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Class and Division Result Lists ==&amp;lt;!--T:24--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CDResults.PNG|thumb|Class and Division Result Lists]]&lt;br /&gt;
Clicking on this item, the software will open all the printout layouts for the Qualification Rounds. On this page, the main function is represented by the central icon &#039;&#039;Class &amp;amp; Division Result List&#039;&#039;. Clicking on this command, the user can print the Division and Class Ranking, both in the &#039;&#039;Class &amp;amp; Division Result List - Individual&#039;&#039; and in the &#039;&#039;Class &amp;amp; Division Result List - Team&#039;&#039; lists. Similarly, the user can click on the corresponding command on the right and on the left, but, then, only Individual (left) or Team Rankings (right) will be printed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:25--&amp;gt; Below these options, the software offers another row of icons that enable the user to print the rankings, where Medals Winners are highlighted.  These commands enable the user to choose the rankings to be printed, by Division and Class, or extracting a specific number of places and scores (starting from a cutoff) and so on. It will also allow the user to print results based on subclasses, or various groupings if desired. It is recommended that a user checks the printouts they need in advance, and tests to ensure what they need is actually generated sensibly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Events (Ind/Team) Result Lists ==&amp;lt;!--T:26--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:QRanking.PNG|thumb|Events (Ind/Team) Result Lists]]&lt;br /&gt;
This page displays another set of printout layouts. From this page, the user can manage the printing of the tournament Qualification Round, the options are defined by the &#039;Events&#039; that are created for the Tournament defined in the areas below. &lt;br /&gt;
* Individual - [[Competition/Individual Events Setup]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Team - [[ Competition/Team Events Setup ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:27--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These printouts are very important if in the tournament there is a scheduled elimination and final round, on the other hand, they are not necessary for any competition that is not including this kind of matches. The order of the printouts can be defined in the two event setup areas if required. As for the previous printout pages, there is a .pdf file in the central part of the screen, with the complete &#039;&#039;Qualification Round - Complete&#039;&#039; report, on the side columns. The user can find the &#039;&#039;Individual&#039;&#039; and the &#039;&#039;Team&#039;&#039; ones separately too. In the other printout pages, there is a parameter section, with which the user can customize the layouts. Plus, the last default .pdf created by the software is &#039;&#039;Shoot Off/Coin Toss Status Printout&#039;&#039;, that immediately displays if there is any Shot-Off or Coin Toss to be broken, before proceeding to the Elimination and Final Round.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Speaker ==&amp;lt;!--T:28--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This page displays the video printouts for the on-venue speaker. These printouts are mainly used in national and international events.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:29--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Qualification]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:30--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Content}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>DellaRossa</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Qualification&amp;diff=3792</id>
		<title>Qualification</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Qualification&amp;diff=3792"/>
		<updated>2026-06-17T20:48:49Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;DellaRossa: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Page in progress}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;languages/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:1--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The qualification round is a key phase in each tournament, from local ones to the most important competitions in Archery. Qualification can be before match-play as normal, or as the only part of a tournament to give final results (e.g. a WA1440). Everything that is related to scoring, scorecards, and printouts is available in the Qualification item of the main menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Input Score ==&amp;lt;!--T:2--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The main feature in the scores management. Selecting this option, the software will open dropdown submenu with some other items, which are related to the different procedures through which users can input scores in i@nseo. Users can enter scores in the system in some separate ways:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Standard Table=== &amp;lt;!--T:4--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Qualification ScoringTable Simple.png|thumb|Input score, Standard Table]]&lt;br /&gt;
after selecting the desired Session, Targets and Distance, clicking on &#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;, a screen with a spreadsheet layout will be displayed: here the user can input scores in a simple and fast way. Ticking the box &#039;&#039;G/X&#039;&#039;, the user can manage Xs and 10s (or 9s in indoor tournaments) that each athlete will shoot. Generally, this is a required activity during competitions; it can be skipped when the user needs to manage only some parts of scorecards and Tie-Break data is not relevant (e.g. for scoring at half distance).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:5--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In this page and in all the others, when you enter a value and press &#039;Tab&#039; the cursor will move to the next cell, which is essential for entering data quickly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:6--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|type=reminder|text=Once scores of all archers have been input, or if a score is changed, the user has to click on &#039;&#039;&#039;Re-Build Teams&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;Re-Calculate Distance Rank&#039;&#039;&#039; and, then &#039;&#039;&#039;Re-Calculate Final Rank&#039;&#039;&#039;. The software will open 3 different pop-ups: always click &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;OK&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The software will, then, generate the Final Rank for the tournament.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:7--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The user could also click on &#039;&#039;&#039;Save results for snapshot feature&#039;&#039;&#039;, to generate data for the real time displaying of ranks, but it is not necessary, unless there are visual electronic devices (TV or similar systems) in use, for they need to manage in real time the athletes ranks or positions in the entire competition. When not using the HHT or Electronic devices the results will be ranked and displayed only considering sessions and distances in the tournament.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:8--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SetIRMStatus.png|thumb|IRM Status Setting]]&lt;br /&gt;
If an athlete decides to retire from the competition, or they have not shown up, the user can set the archers state using the &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Set&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; button on the left side.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Did not start&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;: The athlete will still be counted in the tournament statistics (payments, targets list, and so on), but the software won’t let the user input any scores. &lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Did not finish&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;: The athletes line will turn green, scores cannot be updated but the athlete will continue to the Head to Head event (if any) or receive a final rank from the qualification round&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Did not finish (No Rank)&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;: The athlete will not receive a rank from the qualification round and will not continue into the Head to Head event&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Extended Table===&amp;lt;!--T:9--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EnterScores ExtendedInput.png|thumb|Input score, Extended Table]]&lt;br /&gt;
It works just as the Standard Table. You can select all the distances to edit, or just one, but in addition to scores to be input the other distances totals are also shown. It is useful to check the scores that have been&lt;br /&gt;
previously input, have been entered without mistakes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Arrow by Arrow (Advanced users)===&amp;lt;!--T:10--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ArrowbyArrowInsert.png|thumb|Input score, Arrow by arrow-Advanced users]]&lt;br /&gt;
This function enables the user to manage the score of each arrow in an end for each athlete. This scoring method should not be used when scoring with electronic devices, if the arrow values need editing in this case then use the scorecards view during the verification process (Link to Scorecards verification).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Arrow by Arrow (Scorecards View)===&amp;lt;!--T:11--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ArrowbyArrowSC.png|thumb|Input score, Arrow by arrow-Scorecards View]]&lt;br /&gt;
This function works just as the previous method, but on a different view, that displays a chart, which is similar to a standard printed scorecard.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Check Data Update===&amp;lt;!--T:12--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CheckDataUpdate.PNG|thumb|Check data updates]]&lt;br /&gt;
This command enables the user to check Data Updates of scores, when the&lt;br /&gt;
competition is managed with different networked computers. The table shows the target numbers and they change colour based on when they last updated their data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:13--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===Snapshot Configuration===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Get Score Barcodes===&amp;lt;!--T:15--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ScorecardValidator.PNG|thumb|Check Scorecard using the Barcode]]&lt;br /&gt;
This is the area where, when using arrow-by-arrow scoring (e.g. Ianseo Scorekeeper NG / NG Pro), you can validate the scorecards. &lt;br /&gt;
* Open the link&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter the separator character in the box (usually a - ) and click &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Go&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Select the Distance and Session in the drop down boxes, and scan the first scorecard. &lt;br /&gt;
* Once you have scanned the first scorecard, and the values are all correctly matching the paper, scan the same scorecard again to confirm it, the target will vanish from the list of missing cards on the right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:16--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The other options after scanning are:&lt;br /&gt;
* Edit arrows: This will take you to the scorecard screen and allow you to edit the arrow values, or search for the mathematical error&lt;br /&gt;
* Edit totals: This will allow you to change the totals electronically recorded (although the WA rules allow you to alter the electronic arrows to match the paper and then use the electronic total) &lt;br /&gt;
* Remove 10: remove all the first tie break arrow totals (again if under WA rules the box is blank) &lt;br /&gt;
* Remove X/nine: remove all the second tie break arrow totals, as above&lt;br /&gt;
* Remove both: If needed and both boxes are blank.&lt;br /&gt;
* Reset both: Used if you have mistakenly removed the totals of the tie break arrows.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Print barcode Directives===&amp;lt;!--T:17--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This allows you to print a sheet to perform the barcode verification actions without needing to use a mouse during the process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Export text file == &amp;lt;!--T:18--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This function enables the user to save a text file (.txt) with all&lt;br /&gt;
the scores input in the tournament.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scorecard Printout ==  &amp;lt;!--T:19--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ScorecardPrintout.PNG|thumb|Scorecard Printout]]&lt;br /&gt;
This function has been recently optimized for being as adaptable as possible. The first part is split into two columns, where the user can manage all the variables needed for customizing the Scorecard Printout. Generally, to help users print what they need, the first part of the screen includes the REQUIRED options by default for a standard printed scorecard.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:20--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Should the user need to print any other kind of scorecards (e.g. &#039;&#039;Only Data&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;Only Target Number&#039;&#039;, or &#039;&#039;Only Drawings&#039;&#039;), the screen offers a selection list (on the left), where the user can choose the options needed. The user can also modify a scorecard, to omit any text string, or picture included in the tournament using the boxes on the right. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:21--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Once the scorecard type is selected and the final appearance is selected, the user can proceed to the actual printing page. In the lower row, the software shows some editable boxes, that enables the user to choose the Session and Number of Targets to be printed (and if empty targets are included or not). Once the Session is selected the target numbers autocomplete any empty part with all the available targets. Once Session and Targets are selected, the user has to choose the distance to be printed below the distance area. When electronic devices are in use for the automatic score management, the user can print scorecards created by the software with scores input directly by the archers, using the &#039;Print Scorecards filled in with all the value from single arrow&#039; option.&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to print a manual collection slip using the &#039;Intermediate Results collecting paper&#039; option at the very bottom.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Athlete Numbers == &amp;lt;!--T:22--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AthleteBadge.PNG|thumb|Athlete Numbers]]&lt;br /&gt;
This option enables the user to print the Athlete Numbers for the event. &lt;br /&gt;
* Open the page and select the badge type to &#039;Qualification Athlete number&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter a name for the design (such as &#039;Athlete Number&#039; and click on &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Create new badge&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To edit the parameters of the badge and move/add and remove elements click on &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Edit Badge&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The printing procedure is similar to the Scorecards one, for the user needs to select the desired Session and Targets.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Personal Rank ==&amp;lt;!--T:23--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PersonalRank.PNG|thumb|Personal Rank]]&lt;br /&gt;
This option enables the user to view a selected athlete in the referring Division and Class Ranking. As search values, the user can opt for the &#039;&#039;BIB number&#039;&#039;, the &#039;&#039;Family Name&#039;&#039; or the &#039;&#039;Name of the archer&#039;&#039;. After clicking on &#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;, the software will open a page displaying the athlete position in the ranking (the corresponding row will be highlighted in yellow), together with the archers in the two places before and after the selected one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Class and Division Result Lists ==&amp;lt;!--T:24--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CDResults.PNG|thumb|Class and Division Result Lists]]&lt;br /&gt;
Clicking on this item, the software will open all the printout layouts for the Qualification Rounds. On this page, the main function is represented by the central icon &#039;&#039;Class &amp;amp; Division Result List&#039;&#039;. Clicking on this command, the user can print the Division and Class Ranking, both in the &#039;&#039;Class &amp;amp; Division Result List - Individual&#039;&#039; and in the &#039;&#039;Class &amp;amp; Division Result List - Team&#039;&#039; lists. Similarly, the user can click on the corresponding command on the right and on the left, but, then, only Individual (left) or Team Rankings (right) will be printed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:25--&amp;gt; Below these options, the software offers another row of icons that enable the user to print the rankings, where Medals Winners are highlighted.  These commands enable the user to choose the rankings to be printed, by Division and Class, or extracting a specific number of places and scores (starting from a cutoff) and so on. It will also allow the user to print results based on subclasses, or various groupings if desired. It is recommended that a user checks the printouts they need in advance, and tests to ensure what they need is actually generated sensibly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Events (Ind/Team) Result Lists ==&amp;lt;!--T:26--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:QRanking.PNG|thumb|Events (Ind/Team) Result Lists]]&lt;br /&gt;
This page displays another set of printout layouts. From this page, the user can manage the printing of the tournament Qualification Round, the options are defined by the &#039;Events&#039; that are created for the Tournament defined in the areas below. &lt;br /&gt;
* Individual - [[Competition/Individual Events Setup]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Team - [[ Competition/Team Events Setup ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:27--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These printouts are very important if in the tournament there is a scheduled elimination and final round, on the other hand, they are not necessary for any competition that is not including this kind of matches. The order of the printouts can be defined in the two event setup areas if required. As for the previous printout pages, there is a .pdf file in the central part of the screen, with the complete &#039;&#039;Qualification Round - Complete&#039;&#039; report, on the side columns. The user can find the &#039;&#039;Individual&#039;&#039; and the &#039;&#039;Team&#039;&#039; ones separately too. In the other printout pages, there is a parameter section, with which the user can customize the layouts. Plus, the last default .pdf created by the software is &#039;&#039;Shoot Off/Coin Toss Status Printout&#039;&#039;, that immediately displays if there is any Shot-Off or Coin Toss to be broken, before proceeding to the Elimination and Final Round.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Speaker ==&amp;lt;!--T:28--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This page displays the video printouts for the on-venue speaker. These printouts are mainly used in national and international events.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:29--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Qualification]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:30--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Content}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>DellaRossa</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Qualification&amp;diff=3791</id>
		<title>Qualification</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Qualification&amp;diff=3791"/>
		<updated>2026-06-17T20:47:24Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;DellaRossa: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Page in progress}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;languages/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:1--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The qualification round is a key phase in each tournament, from local ones to the most important competitions in Archery. Qualification can be before match-play as normal, or as the only part of a tournament to give final results (e.g. a WA1440). Everything that is related to scoring, scorecards, and printouts is available in the Qualification item of the main menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Input Score ==&amp;lt;!--T:2--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The main feature in the scores management. Selecting this option, the software will open dropdown submenu with some other items, which are related to the different procedures through which users can input scores in i@nseo. Users can enter scores in the system in some separate ways:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Standard Table=== &amp;lt;!--T:4--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Qualification ScoringTable Simple.png|thumb|Input score, Standard Table]]&lt;br /&gt;
after selecting the desired Session, Targets and Distance, clicking on &#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;, a screen with a spreadsheet layout will be displayed: here the user can input scores in a simple and fast way. Ticking the box &#039;&#039;G/X&#039;&#039;, the user can manage Xs and 10s (or 9s in indoor tournaments) that each athlete will shoot. Generally, this is a required activity during competitions; it can be skipped when the user needs to manage only some parts of scorecards and Tie-Break data is not relevant (e.g. for scoring at half distance).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:5--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In this page and in all the others, when you enter a value and press &#039;Tab&#039; the cursor will move to the next cell, which is essential for entering data quickly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:6--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|type=reminder|text=Once scores of all archers have been input, or if a score is changed, the user has to click on &#039;&#039;&#039;Re-Build Teams&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;Re-Calculate Distance Rank&#039;&#039;&#039; and, then &#039;&#039;&#039;Re-Calculate Final Rank&#039;&#039;&#039;. The software will open 3 different pop-ups: always click &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;OK&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The software will, then, generate the Final Rank for the tournament.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:7--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The user could also click on &#039;&#039;&#039;Save results for snapshot feature&#039;&#039;&#039;, to generate data for the real time displaying of ranks, but it is not necessary, unless there are visual electronic devices (TV or similar systems) in use, for they need to manage in real time the athletes ranks or positions in the entire competition. When not using the HHT or Electronic devices the results will be ranked and displayed only considering sessions and distances in the tournament.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:8--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SetIRMStatus.png|thumb|IRM Status Setting]]&lt;br /&gt;
If an athlete decides to retire from the competition, or they have not shown up, the user can set the archers state using the &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Set&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; button on the left side.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Did not start&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;: The athlete will still be counted in the tournament statistics (payments, targets list, and so on), but the software won’t let the user input any scores. &lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Did not finish&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;: The athletes line will turn green, scores cannot be updated but the athlete will continue to the Head to Head event (if any) or receive a final rank from the qualification round&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Did not finish (No Rank)&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;: The athlete will not receive a rank from the qualification round and will not continue into the Head to Head event&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Extended Table===&amp;lt;!--T:9--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EnterScores ExtendedInput.png|thumb|Input score, Extended Table]]&lt;br /&gt;
It works just as the Standard Table. You can select all the distances to edit, or just one, but in addition to scores to be input the other distances totals are also shown. It is useful to check the scores that have been&lt;br /&gt;
previously input, have been entered without mistakes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Arrow by Arrow (Advanced users)===&amp;lt;!--T:10--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ArrowbyArrowInsert.png|thumb|Input score, Arrow by arrow-Advanced users]]&lt;br /&gt;
This function enables the user to manage the score of each arrow in an end for each athlete. This scoring method should not be used when scoring with electronic devices, if the arrow values need editing in this case then use the scorecards view during the verification process (Link to Scorecards verification).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Arrow by Arrow (Scorecards View)===&amp;lt;!--T:11--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ArrowbyArrowSC.png|thumb|Input score, Arrow by arrow-Scorecards View]]&lt;br /&gt;
This function works just as the previous method, but on a different view, that displays a chart, which is similar to a standard printed scorecard.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Check Data Update===&amp;lt;!--T:12--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CheckDataUpdate.PNG|thumb|Check data updates]]&lt;br /&gt;
This command enables the user to check Data Updates of scores, when the&lt;br /&gt;
competition is managed with different networked computers. The table shows the target numbers and they change colour based on when they last updated their data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:13--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===Snapshot Configuration===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:15--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===Get Score Barcodes===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ScorecardValidator.PNG|thumb|Check Scorecard using the Barcode]]&lt;br /&gt;
This is the area where, when using arrow-by-arrow scoring (e.g. Ianseo Scorekeeper NG / NG Pro), you can validate the scorecards. &lt;br /&gt;
* Open the link&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter the separator character in the box (usually a - ) and click &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Go&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Select the Distance and Session in the drop down boxes, and scan the first scorecard. &lt;br /&gt;
* Once you have scanned the first scorecard, and the values are all correctly matching the paper, scan the same scorecard again to confirm it, the target will vanish from the list of missing cards on the right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:16--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The other options after scanning are:&lt;br /&gt;
* Edit arrows: This will take you to the scorecard screen and allow you to edit the arrow values, or search for the mathematical error&lt;br /&gt;
* Edit totals: This will allow you to change the totals electronically recorded (although the WA rules allow you to alter the electronic arrows to match the paper and then use the electronic total) &lt;br /&gt;
* Remove 10: remove all the first tie break arrow totals (again if under WA rules the box is blank) &lt;br /&gt;
* Remove X/nine: remove all the second tie break arrow totals, as above&lt;br /&gt;
* Remove both: If needed and both boxes are blank.&lt;br /&gt;
* Reset both: Used if you have mistakenly removed the totals of the tie break arrows.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:17--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===Print barcode Directives===&lt;br /&gt;
This allows you to print a sheet to perform the barcode verification actions without needing to use a mouse during the process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Export text file == &amp;lt;!--T:18--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This function enables the user to save a text file (.txt) with all&lt;br /&gt;
the scores input in the tournament.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scorecard Printout ==  &amp;lt;!--T:19--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ScorecardPrintout.PNG|thumb|Scorecard Printout]]&lt;br /&gt;
This function has been recently optimized for being as adaptable as possible. The first part is split into two columns, where the user can manage all the variables needed for customizing the Scorecard Printout. Generally, to help users print what they need, the first part of the screen includes the REQUIRED options by default for a standard printed scorecard.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:20--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Should the user need to print any other kind of scorecards (e.g. &#039;&#039;Only Data&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;Only Target Number&#039;&#039;, or &#039;&#039;Only Drawings&#039;&#039;), the screen offers a selection list (on the left), where the user can choose the options needed. The user can also modify a scorecard, to omit any text string, or picture included in the tournament using the boxes on the right. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:21--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Once the scorecard type is selected and the final appearance is selected, the user can proceed to the actual printing page. In the lower row, the software shows some editable boxes, that enables the user to choose the Session and Number of Targets to be printed (and if empty targets are included or not). Once the Session is selected the target numbers autocomplete any empty part with all the available targets. Once Session and Targets are selected, the user has to choose the distance to be printed below the distance area. When electronic devices are in use for the automatic score management, the user can print scorecards created by the software with scores input directly by the archers, using the &#039;Print Scorecards filled in with all the value from single arrow&#039; option.&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to print a manual collection slip using the &#039;Intermediate Results collecting paper&#039; option at the very bottom.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:22--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== Athlete Numbers == &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AthleteBadge.PNG|thumb|Athlete Numbers]]&lt;br /&gt;
This option enables the user to print the Athlete Numbers for the event. &lt;br /&gt;
* Open the page and select the badge type to &#039;Qualification Athlete number&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter a name for the design (such as &#039;Athlete Number&#039; and click on &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Create new badge&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To edit the parameters of the badge and move/add and remove elements click on &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Edit Badge&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The printing procedure is similar to the Scorecards one, for the user needs to select the desired Session and Targets.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:23--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== Personal Rank ==  &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PersonalRank.PNG|thumb|Personal Rank]]&lt;br /&gt;
This option enables the user to view a selected athlete in the referring Division and Class Ranking. As search values, the user can opt for the &#039;&#039;BIB number&#039;&#039;, the &#039;&#039;Family Name&#039;&#039; or the &#039;&#039;Name of the archer&#039;&#039;. After clicking on &#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;, the software will open a page displaying the athlete position in the ranking (the corresponding row will be highlighted in yellow), together with the archers in the two places before and after the selected one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Class and Division Result Lists ==  &amp;lt;!--T:24--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CDResults.PNG|thumb|Class and Division Result Lists]]&lt;br /&gt;
Clicking on this item, the software will open all the printout layouts for the Qualification Rounds. On this page, the main function is represented by the central icon &#039;&#039;Class &amp;amp; Division Result List&#039;&#039;. Clicking on this command, the user can print the Division and Class Ranking, both in the &#039;&#039;Class &amp;amp; Division Result List - Individual&#039;&#039; and in the &#039;&#039;Class &amp;amp; Division Result List - Team&#039;&#039; lists. Similarly, the user can click on the corresponding command on the right and on the left, but, then, only Individual (left) or Team Rankings (right) will be printed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:25--&amp;gt; Below these options, the software offers another row of icons that enable the user to print the rankings, where Medals Winners are highlighted.  These commands enable the user to choose the rankings to be printed, by Division and Class, or extracting a specific number of places and scores (starting from a cutoff) and so on. It will also allow the user to print results based on subclasses, or various groupings if desired. It is recommended that a user checks the printouts they need in advance, and tests to ensure what they need is actually generated sensibly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Events (Ind/Team) Result Lists ==  &amp;lt;!--T:26--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:QRanking.PNG|thumb|Events (Ind/Team) Result Lists]]&lt;br /&gt;
This page displays another set of printout layouts. From this page, the user can manage the printing of the tournament Qualification Round, the options are defined by the &#039;Events&#039; that are created for the Tournament defined in the areas below. &lt;br /&gt;
* Individual - [[Competition/Individual Events Setup]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Team - [[ Competition/Team Events Setup ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:27--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These printouts are very important if in the tournament there is a scheduled elimination and final round, on the other hand, they are not necessary for any competition that is not including this kind of matches. The order of the printouts can be defined in the two event setup areas if required. As for the previous printout pages, there is a .pdf file in the central part of the screen, with the complete &#039;&#039;Qualification Round - Complete&#039;&#039; report, on the side columns. The user can find the &#039;&#039;Individual&#039;&#039; and the &#039;&#039;Team&#039;&#039; ones separately too. In the other printout pages, there is a parameter section, with which the user can customize the layouts. Plus, the last default .pdf created by the software is &#039;&#039;Shoot Off/Coin Toss Status Printout&#039;&#039;, that immediately displays if there is any Shot-Off or Coin Toss to be broken, before proceeding to the Elimination and Final Round.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Speaker ==  &amp;lt;!--T:28--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This page displays the video printouts for the on-venue speaker. These printouts are mainly used in national and international events.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:29--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Qualification]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:30--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Content}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>DellaRossa</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Qualification&amp;diff=3790</id>
		<title>Qualification</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Qualification&amp;diff=3790"/>
		<updated>2026-06-17T20:45:33Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;DellaRossa: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Page in progress}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;languages/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:1--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The qualification round is a key phase in each tournament, from local ones to the most important competitions in Archery. Qualification can be before match-play as normal, or as the only part of a tournament to give final results (e.g. a WA1440). Everything that is related to scoring, scorecards, and printouts is available in the Qualification item of the main menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:2--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== Input Score ==&lt;br /&gt;
The main feature in the scores management. Selecting this option, the software will open dropdown submenu with some other items, which are related to the different procedures through which users can input scores in i@nseo. Users can enter scores in the system in some separate ways:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:4--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===Standard Table=== &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Qualification ScoringTable Simple.png|thumb|Input score, Standard Table]]&lt;br /&gt;
after selecting the desired Session, Targets and Distance, clicking on &#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;, a screen with a spreadsheet layout will be displayed: here the user can input scores in a simple and fast way. Ticking the box &#039;&#039;G/X&#039;&#039;, the user can manage Xs and 10s (or 9s in indoor tournaments) that each athlete will shoot. Generally, this is a required activity during competitions; it can be skipped when the user needs to manage only some parts of scorecards and Tie-Break data is not relevant (e.g. for scoring at half distance).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:5--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In this page and in all the others, when you enter a value and press &#039;Tab&#039; the cursor will move to the next cell, which is essential for entering data quickly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:6--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|type=reminder|text=Once scores of all archers have been input, or if a score is changed, the user has to click on &#039;&#039;&#039;Re-Build Teams&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;Re-Calculate Distance Rank&#039;&#039;&#039; and, then &#039;&#039;&#039;Re-Calculate Final Rank&#039;&#039;&#039;. The software will open 3 different pop-ups: always click &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;OK&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The software will, then, generate the Final Rank for the tournament.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:7--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The user could also click on &#039;&#039;&#039;Save results for snapshot feature&#039;&#039;&#039;, to generate data for the real time displaying of ranks, but it is not necessary, unless there are visual electronic devices (TV or similar systems) in use, for they need to manage in real time the athletes ranks or positions in the entire competition. When not using the HHT or Electronic devices the results will be ranked and displayed only considering sessions and distances in the tournament.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:8--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SetIRMStatus.png|thumb|IRM Status Setting]]&lt;br /&gt;
If an athlete decides to retire from the competition, or they have not shown up, the user can set the archers state using the &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Set&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; button on the left side.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Did not start&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;: The athlete will still be counted in the tournament statistics (payments, targets list, and so on), but the software won’t let the user input any scores. &lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Did not finish&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;: The athletes line will turn green, scores cannot be updated but the athlete will continue to the Head to Head event (if any) or receive a final rank from the qualification round&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Did not finish (No Rank)&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;: The athlete will not receive a rank from the qualification round and will not continue into the Head to Head event&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:9--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===Extended Table===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EnterScores ExtendedInput.png|thumb|Input score, Extended Table]]&lt;br /&gt;
It works just as the Standard Table. You can select all the distances to edit, or just one, but in addition to scores to be input the other distances totals are also shown. It is useful to check the scores that have been&lt;br /&gt;
previously input, have been entered without mistakes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:10--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===Arrow by Arrow (Advanced users)===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ArrowbyArrowInsert.png|thumb|Input score, Arrow by arrow-Advanced users]]&lt;br /&gt;
This function enables the user to manage the score of each arrow in an end for each athlete. This scoring method should not be used when scoring with electronic devices, if the arrow values need editing in this case then use the scorecards view during the verification process (Link to Scorecards verification).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:11--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===Arrow by Arrow (Scorecards View)===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ArrowbyArrowSC.png|thumb|Input score, Arrow by arrow-Scorecards View]]&lt;br /&gt;
This function works just as the previous method, but on a different view, that displays a chart, which is similar to a standard printed scorecard.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:12--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===Check Data Update===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CheckDataUpdate.PNG|thumb|Check data updates]]&lt;br /&gt;
This command enables the user to check Data Updates of scores, when the&lt;br /&gt;
competition is managed with different networked computers. The table shows the target numbers and they change colour based on when they last updated their data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:13--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===Snapshot Configuration===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:15--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===Get Score Barcodes===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ScorecardValidator.PNG|thumb|Check Scorecard using the Barcode]]&lt;br /&gt;
This is the area where, when using arrow-by-arrow scoring (e.g. Ianseo Scorekeeper NG / NG Pro), you can validate the scorecards. &lt;br /&gt;
* Open the link&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter the separator character in the box (usually a - ) and click &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Go&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Select the Distance and Session in the drop down boxes, and scan the first scorecard. &lt;br /&gt;
* Once you have scanned the first scorecard, and the values are all correctly matching the paper, scan the same scorecard again to confirm it, the target will vanish from the list of missing cards on the right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:16--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The other options after scanning are:&lt;br /&gt;
* Edit arrows: This will take you to the scorecard screen and allow you to edit the arrow values, or search for the mathematical error&lt;br /&gt;
* Edit totals: This will allow you to change the totals electronically recorded (although the WA rules allow you to alter the electronic arrows to match the paper and then use the electronic total) &lt;br /&gt;
* Remove 10: remove all the first tie break arrow totals (again if under WA rules the box is blank) &lt;br /&gt;
* Remove X/nine: remove all the second tie break arrow totals, as above&lt;br /&gt;
* Remove both: If needed and both boxes are blank.&lt;br /&gt;
* Reset both: Used if you have mistakenly removed the totals of the tie break arrows.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:17--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===Print barcode Directives===&lt;br /&gt;
This allows you to print a sheet to perform the barcode verification actions without needing to use a mouse during the process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Export text file == &amp;lt;!--T:18--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This function enables the user to save a text file (.txt) with all&lt;br /&gt;
the scores input in the tournament.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scorecard Printout ==  &amp;lt;!--T:19--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ScorecardPrintout.PNG|thumb|Scorecard Printout]]&lt;br /&gt;
This function has been recently optimized for being as adaptable as possible. The first part is split into two columns, where the user can manage all the variables needed for customizing the Scorecard Printout. Generally, to help users print what they need, the first part of the screen includes the REQUIRED options by default for a standard printed scorecard.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:20--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Should the user need to print any other kind of scorecards (e.g. &#039;&#039;Only Data&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;Only Target Number&#039;&#039;, or &#039;&#039;Only Drawings&#039;&#039;), the screen offers a selection list (on the left), where the user can choose the options needed. The user can also modify a scorecard, to omit any text string, or picture included in the tournament using the boxes on the right. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:21--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Once the scorecard type is selected and the final appearance is selected, the user can proceed to the actual printing page. In the lower row, the software shows some editable boxes, that enables the user to choose the Session and Number of Targets to be printed (and if empty targets are included or not). Once the Session is selected the target numbers autocomplete any empty part with all the available targets. Once Session and Targets are selected, the user has to choose the distance to be printed below the distance area. When electronic devices are in use for the automatic score management, the user can print scorecards created by the software with scores input directly by the archers, using the &#039;Print Scorecards filled in with all the value from single arrow&#039; option.&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to print a manual collection slip using the &#039;Intermediate Results collecting paper&#039; option at the very bottom.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:22--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== Athlete Numbers == &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AthleteBadge.PNG|thumb|Athlete Numbers]]&lt;br /&gt;
This option enables the user to print the Athlete Numbers for the event. &lt;br /&gt;
* Open the page and select the badge type to &#039;Qualification Athlete number&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter a name for the design (such as &#039;Athlete Number&#039; and click on &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Create new badge&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To edit the parameters of the badge and move/add and remove elements click on &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Edit Badge&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The printing procedure is similar to the Scorecards one, for the user needs to select the desired Session and Targets.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:23--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== Personal Rank ==  &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PersonalRank.PNG|thumb|Personal Rank]]&lt;br /&gt;
This option enables the user to view a selected athlete in the referring Division and Class Ranking. As search values, the user can opt for the &#039;&#039;BIB number&#039;&#039;, the &#039;&#039;Family Name&#039;&#039; or the &#039;&#039;Name of the archer&#039;&#039;. After clicking on &#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;, the software will open a page displaying the athlete position in the ranking (the corresponding row will be highlighted in yellow), together with the archers in the two places before and after the selected one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Class and Division Result Lists ==  &amp;lt;!--T:24--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CDResults.PNG|thumb|Class and Division Result Lists]]&lt;br /&gt;
Clicking on this item, the software will open all the printout layouts for the Qualification Rounds. On this page, the main function is represented by the central icon &#039;&#039;Class &amp;amp; Division Result List&#039;&#039;. Clicking on this command, the user can print the Division and Class Ranking, both in the &#039;&#039;Class &amp;amp; Division Result List - Individual&#039;&#039; and in the &#039;&#039;Class &amp;amp; Division Result List - Team&#039;&#039; lists. Similarly, the user can click on the corresponding command on the right and on the left, but, then, only Individual (left) or Team Rankings (right) will be printed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:25--&amp;gt; Below these options, the software offers another row of icons that enable the user to print the rankings, where Medals Winners are highlighted.  These commands enable the user to choose the rankings to be printed, by Division and Class, or extracting a specific number of places and scores (starting from a cutoff) and so on. It will also allow the user to print results based on subclasses, or various groupings if desired. It is recommended that a user checks the printouts they need in advance, and tests to ensure what they need is actually generated sensibly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Events (Ind/Team) Result Lists ==  &amp;lt;!--T:26--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:QRanking.PNG|thumb|Events (Ind/Team) Result Lists]]&lt;br /&gt;
This page displays another set of printout layouts. From this page, the user can manage the printing of the tournament Qualification Round, the options are defined by the &#039;Events&#039; that are created for the Tournament defined in the areas below. &lt;br /&gt;
* Individual - [[Competition/Individual Events Setup]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Team - [[ Competition/Team Events Setup ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:27--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These printouts are very important if in the tournament there is a scheduled elimination and final round, on the other hand, they are not necessary for any competition that is not including this kind of matches. The order of the printouts can be defined in the two event setup areas if required. As for the previous printout pages, there is a .pdf file in the central part of the screen, with the complete &#039;&#039;Qualification Round - Complete&#039;&#039; report, on the side columns. The user can find the &#039;&#039;Individual&#039;&#039; and the &#039;&#039;Team&#039;&#039; ones separately too. In the other printout pages, there is a parameter section, with which the user can customize the layouts. Plus, the last default .pdf created by the software is &#039;&#039;Shoot Off/Coin Toss Status Printout&#039;&#039;, that immediately displays if there is any Shot-Off or Coin Toss to be broken, before proceeding to the Elimination and Final Round.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Speaker ==  &amp;lt;!--T:28--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This page displays the video printouts for the on-venue speaker. These printouts are mainly used in national and international events.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:29--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Qualification]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:30--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Content}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>DellaRossa</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Qualification&amp;diff=3789</id>
		<title>Qualification</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Qualification&amp;diff=3789"/>
		<updated>2026-06-17T20:39:40Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;DellaRossa: /* Input Score */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Page in progress}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;languages/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:1--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The qualification round is a key phase in each tournament, from local ones to the most important competitions in Archery. Qualification can be before match-play as normal, or as the only part of a tournament to give final results (e.g. a WA1440). Everything that is related to scoring, scorecards, and printouts is available in the Qualification item of the main menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:2--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== Input Score ==&lt;br /&gt;
The main feature in the scores management. Selecting this option, the software will open dropdown submenu with some other items, which are related to the different procedures through which users can input scores in i@nseo. Users can enter scores in the system in some separate ways:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:4--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===Standard Table=== &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Qualification ScoringTable Simple.png|thumb|Input score, Standard Table]]&lt;br /&gt;
after selecting the desired Session, Targets and Distance, clicking on &#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;, a screen with a spreadsheet layout will be displayed: here the user can input scores in a simple and fast way. Ticking the box &#039;&#039;G/X&#039;&#039;, the user can manage Xs and 10s (or 9s in indoor tournaments) that each athlete will shoot. Generally, this is a required activity during competitions; it can be skipped when the user needs to manage only some parts of scorecards and Tie-Break data is not relevant (e.g. for scoring at half distance).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:5--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In this page and in all the others, when you enter a value and press &#039;Tab&#039; the cursor will move to the next cell, which is essential for entering data quickly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:6--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|type=reminder|text=Once scores of all archers have been input, or if a score is changed, the user has to click on &#039;&#039;&#039;Re-Build Teams&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;Re-Calculate Distance Rank&#039;&#039;&#039; and, then &#039;&#039;&#039;Re-Calculate Final Rank&#039;&#039;&#039;. The software will open 3 different pop-ups: always click &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;OK&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The software will, then, generate the Final Rank for the tournament.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:7--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The user could also click on &#039;&#039;&#039;Save results for snapshot feature&#039;&#039;&#039;, to generate data for the real time displaying of ranks, but it is not necessary, unless there are visual electronic devices (TV or similar systems) in use, for they need to manage in real time the athletes ranks or positions in the entire competition. When not using the HHT or Electronic devices the results will be ranked and displayed only considering sessions and distances in the tournament.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:8--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SetIRMStatus.png|thumb|IRM Status Setting]]&lt;br /&gt;
If an athlete decides to retire from the competition, or they have not shown up, the user can set the archers state using the &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Set&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; button on the left side.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Did not start&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;: The athlete will still be counted in the tournament statistics (payments, targets list, and so on), but the software won’t let the user input any scores. &lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Did not finish&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;: The athletes line will turn green, scores cannot be updated but the athlete will continue to the Head to Head event (if any) or receive a final rank from the qualification round&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Did not finish (No Rank)&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;: The athlete will not receive a rank from the qualification round and will not continue into the Head to Head event&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:9--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===Extended Table===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EnterScores ExtendedInput.png|thumb|Input score, Extended Table]]&lt;br /&gt;
It works just as the Standard Table. You can select all the distances to edit, or just one, but in addition to scores to be input the other distances totals are also shown. It is useful to check the scores that have been&lt;br /&gt;
previously input, have been entered without mistakes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:10--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===Arrow by Arrow (Advanced users)===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ArrowbyArrowInsert.png|thumb|Input score, Arrow by arrow-Advanced users]]&lt;br /&gt;
This function enables the user to manage the score of each arrow in an end for each athlete. This scoring method should not be used when scoring with electronic devices, if the arrow values need editing in this case then use the scorecards view during the verification process (Link to Scorecards verification).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:11--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===Arrow by Arrow (Scorecards View)===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ArrowbyArrowSC.png|thumb|Input score, Arrow by arrow-Scorecards View]]&lt;br /&gt;
This function works just as the previous method, but on a different view, that displays a chart, which is similar to a standard printed scorecard.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:12--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===Check Data Update===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CheckDataUpdate.PNG|thumb|Check data updates]]&lt;br /&gt;
This command enables the user to check Data Updates of scores, when the&lt;br /&gt;
competition is managed with different networked computers. The table shows the target numbers and they change colour based on when they last updated their data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:13--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===Snapshot Configuration===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:15--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===Get Score Barcodes===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ScorecardValidator.PNG|thumb|Check Scorecard using the Barcode]]&lt;br /&gt;
This is the area where, when using arrow-by-arrow scoring (e.g. Ianseo Scorekeeper NG / NG Pro), you can validate the scorecards. &lt;br /&gt;
* Open the link&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter the separator character in the box (usually a - ) and click &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Go&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Select the Distance and Session in the drop down boxes, and scan the first scorecard. &lt;br /&gt;
* Once you have scanned the first scorecard, and the values are all correctly matching the paper, scan the same scorecard again to confirm it, the target will vanish from the list of missing cards on the right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:16--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The other options after scanning are:&lt;br /&gt;
* Edit arrows: This will take you to the scorecard screen and allow you to edit the arrow values, or search for the mathematical error&lt;br /&gt;
* Edit totals: This will allow you to change the totals electronically recorded (although the WA rules allow you to alter the electronic arrows to match the paper and then use the electronic total) &lt;br /&gt;
* Remove 10: remove all the first tie break arrow totals (again if under WA rules the box is blank) &lt;br /&gt;
* Remove X/nine: remove all the second tie break arrow totals, as above&lt;br /&gt;
* Remove both: If needed and both boxes are blank.&lt;br /&gt;
* Reset both: Used if you have mistakenly removed the totals of the tie break arrows.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:17--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===Print barcode Directives===&lt;br /&gt;
This allows you to print a sheet to perform the barcode verification actions without needing to use a mouse during the process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Export text file == &amp;lt;!--T:18--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This function enables the user to save a text file (.txt) with all&lt;br /&gt;
the scores input in the tournament.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scorecard Printout ==  &amp;lt;!--T:19--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ScorecardPrintout.PNG|thumb|Scorecard Printout]&lt;br /&gt;
This function has been recently optimized for being as adaptable as possible. The first part is split into two columns, where the user can manage all the variables needed for customizing the Scorecard Printout. Generally, to help users print what they need, the first part of the screen includes the REQUIRED options by default for a standard printed scorecard.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:20--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Should the user need to print any other kind of scorecards (e.g. &#039;&#039;Only Data&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;Only Target Number&#039;&#039;, or &#039;&#039;Only Drawings&#039;&#039;), the screen offers a selection list (on the left), where the user can choose the options needed. The user can also modify a scorecard, to omit any text string, or picture included in the tournament using the boxes on the right. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:21--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Once the scorecard type is selected and the final appearance is selected, the user can proceed to the actual printing page. In the lower row, the software shows some editable boxes, that enables the user to choose the Session and Number of Targets to be printed (and if empty targets are included or not). Once the Session is selected the target numbers autocomplete any empty part with all the available targets. Once Session and Targets are selected, the user has to choose the distance to be printed below the distance area. When electronic devices are in use for the automatic score management, the user can print scorecards created by the software with scores input directly by the archers, using the &#039;Print Scorecards filled in with all the value from single arrow&#039; option.&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to print a manual collection slip using the &#039;Intermediate Results collecting paper&#039; option at the very bottom.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:22--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AthleteBadge.PNG|thumb|Athlete Numbers]]&lt;br /&gt;
== Athlete Numbers == &lt;br /&gt;
This option enables the user to print the Athlete Numbers for the event. &lt;br /&gt;
* Open the page and select the badge type to &#039;Qualification Athlete number&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter a name for the design (such as &#039;Athlete Number&#039; and click on &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Create new badge&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To edit the parameters of the badge and move/add and remove elements click on &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Edit Badge&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The printing procedure is similar to the Scorecards one, for the user needs to select the desired Session and Targets.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Personal Rank ==  &amp;lt;!--T:23--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PersonalRank.PNG|thumb|Personal Rank]]&lt;br /&gt;
This option enables the user to view a selected athlete in the referring Division and Class Ranking. As search values, the user can opt for the &#039;&#039;BIB number&#039;&#039;, the &#039;&#039;Family Name&#039;&#039; or the &#039;&#039;Name of the archer&#039;&#039;. After clicking on &#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;, the software will open a page displaying the athlete position in the ranking (the corresponding row will be highlighted in yellow), together with the archers in the two places before and after the selected one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Class and Division Result Lists ==  &amp;lt;!--T:24--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CDResults.PNG|thumb|Class and Division Result Lists]]&lt;br /&gt;
Clicking on this item, the software will open all the printout layouts for the Qualification Rounds. On this page, the main function is represented by the central icon &#039;&#039;Class &amp;amp; Division Result List&#039;&#039;. Clicking on this command, the user can print the Division and Class Ranking, both in the &#039;&#039;Class &amp;amp; Division Result List - Individual&#039;&#039; and in the &#039;&#039;Class &amp;amp; Division Result List - Team&#039;&#039; lists. Similarly, the user can click on the corresponding command on the right and on the left, but, then, only Individual (left) or Team Rankings (right) will be printed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:25--&amp;gt; Below these options, the software offers another row of icons that enable the user to print the rankings, where Medals Winners are highlighted.  These commands enable the user to choose the rankings to be printed, by Division and Class, or extracting a specific number of places and scores (starting from a cutoff) and so on. It will also allow the user to print results based on subclasses, or various groupings if desired. It is recommended that a user checks the printouts they need in advance, and tests to ensure what they need is actually generated sensibly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Events (Ind/Team) Result Lists ==  &amp;lt;!--T:26--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:QRanking.PNG|thumb|Events (Ind/Team) Result Lists]]&lt;br /&gt;
This page displays another set of printout layouts. From this page, the user can manage the printing of the tournament Qualification Round, the options are defined by the &#039;Events&#039; that are created for the Tournament defined in the areas below. &lt;br /&gt;
* Individual - [[Competition/Individual Events Setup]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Team - [[ Competition/Team Events Setup ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:27--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These printouts are very important if in the tournament there is a scheduled elimination and final round, on the other hand, they are not necessary for any competition that is not including this kind of matches. The order of the printouts can be defined in the two event setup areas if required. As for the previous printout pages, there is a .pdf file in the central part of the screen, with the complete &#039;&#039;Qualification Round - Complete&#039;&#039; report, on the side columns. The user can find the &#039;&#039;Individual&#039;&#039; and the &#039;&#039;Team&#039;&#039; ones separately too. In the other printout pages, there is a parameter section, with which the user can customize the layouts. Plus, the last default .pdf created by the software is &#039;&#039;Shoot Off/Coin Toss Status Printout&#039;&#039;, that immediately displays if there is any Shot-Off or Coin Toss to be broken, before proceeding to the Elimination and Final Round.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Speaker ==  &amp;lt;!--T:28--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This page displays the video printouts for the on-venue speaker. These printouts are mainly used in national and international events.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:29--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Qualification]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:30--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Content}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>DellaRossa</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Qualification&amp;diff=3788</id>
		<title>Qualification</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Qualification&amp;diff=3788"/>
		<updated>2026-06-17T20:21:45Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;DellaRossa: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Page in progress}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;languages/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:1--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The qualification round is a key phase in each tournament, from local ones to the most important competitions in Archery. Qualification can be before match-play as normal, or as the only part of a tournament to give final results (e.g. a WA1440). Everything that is related to scoring, scorecards, and printouts is available in the Qualification item of the main menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:2--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== Input Score ==&lt;br /&gt;
The main feature in the scores management. Selecting this option, the software will open dropdown submenu with some other items, which are related to the different procedures through which users can input scores in i@nseo. Users can enter scores in the system in four separate ways:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:4--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Qualification ScoringTable Simple.png|thumb|Input score, Standard Table]]&lt;br /&gt;
1. &#039;&#039;&#039;Standard Table:&#039;&#039;&#039; after selecting the desired Session, Targets and Distance, clicking on &#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;, a screen with a spreadsheet layout will be displayed: here the user can input scores in a simple and fast way. Ticking the box &#039;&#039;G/X&#039;&#039;, the user can manage Xs and 10s (or 9s in indoor tournaments) that each athlete will shoot. Generally, this is a required activity during competitions; it can be skipped when the user needs to manage only some parts of scorecards and Tie-Break data is not relevant (e.g. for scoring at half distance).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:6--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In this page and in all the others, when you enter a value and press &#039;Tab&#039; the cursor will move to the next cell, which is essential for entering data quickly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:7--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|type=reminder|text=Once scores of all archers have been input, or if a score is changed, the user has to click on &#039;&#039;&#039;Re-Build Teams&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;Re-Calculate Distance Rank&#039;&#039;&#039; and, then &#039;&#039;&#039;Re-Calculate Final Rank&#039;&#039;&#039;. The software will open 3 different pop-ups: always click &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;OK&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The software will, then, generate the Final Rank for the tournament.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:8--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The user could also click on &#039;&#039;&#039;Save results for snapshot feature&#039;&#039;&#039;, to generate data for the real time displaying of ranks, but it is not necessary, unless there are visual electronic devices (TV or similar systems) in use, for they need to manage in real time the athletes ranks or positions in the entire competition. When not using the HHT or Electronic devices the results will be ranked and displayed only considering sessions and distances in the tournament.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:9--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SetIRMStatus.png|thumb|IRM Status Setting]]&lt;br /&gt;
If an athlete decides to retire from the competition, or they have not shown up, the user can set the archers state using the &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Set&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; button on the left side.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Did not start&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;: The athlete will still be counted in the tournament statistics (payments, targets list, and so on), but the software won’t let the user input any scores. &lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Did not finish&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;: The athletes line will turn green, scores cannot be updated but the athlete will continue to the Head to Head event (if any) or receive a final rank from the qualification round&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Did not finish (No Rank)&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;: The athlete will not receive a rank from the qualification round and will not continue into the Head to Head event&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:9--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EnterScores ExtendedInput.png|thumb|Input score, Extended Table]]&lt;br /&gt;
2. &#039;&#039;&#039;Extended Table:&#039;&#039;&#039; it works just as the Standard Table. You can select all the distances to edit, or just one, but in addition to scores to be input the other distances totals are also shown. It is useful to check the scores that have been&lt;br /&gt;
previously input, have been entered without mistakes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:10--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ArrowbyArrowInsert.png|thumb|Input score, Arrow by arrow-Advanced users]]&lt;br /&gt;
3. &#039;&#039;&#039;Arrow by Arrow (Advanced users):&#039;&#039;&#039; this function enables the user to manage the score of each arrow in an end for each athlete. This scoring method should not be used when scoring with electronic devices, if the arrow values need editing in this case then use the scorecards view during the verification process (Link to Scorecards verification)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:11--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ArrowbyArrowSC.png|thumb|Input score, Arrow by arrow-Scorecards View]]&lt;br /&gt;
4. &#039;&#039;&#039;Arrow by Arrow (Scorecards View):&#039;&#039;&#039; this function works just as the previous method, but on a different view, that displays a chart, which is similar to a standard printed scorecard.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:12--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CheckDataUpdate.PNG|thumb|Check data updates]]&lt;br /&gt;
5. &#039;&#039;&#039;Check Data Update:&#039;&#039;&#039; This command enables the user to check Data Updates of scores, when the&lt;br /&gt;
competition is managed with different networked computers. The table shows the target numbers and they change colour based on when they last updated their data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Snapshot Configuration====&amp;lt;!--T:13--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:14--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ScorecardValidator.PNG|thumb|Check Scorecard using the Barcode]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:15--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
6. &#039;&#039;&#039;Get Score Barcodes:&#039;&#039;&#039;  This is the area where, when using arrow-by-arrow scoring (e.g. Ianseo Scorekeeper NG / NG Pro), you can validate the scorecards. &lt;br /&gt;
* Open the link&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter the separator character in the box (usually a - ) and click &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Go&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Select the Distance and Session in the drop down boxes, and scan the first scorecard. &lt;br /&gt;
* Once you have scanned the first scorecard, and the values are all correctly matching the paper, scan the same scorecard again to confirm it, the target will vanish from the list of missing cards on the right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:16--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The other options after scanning are:&lt;br /&gt;
* Edit arrows: This will take you to the scorecard screen and allow you to edit the arrow values, or search for the mathematical error&lt;br /&gt;
* Edit totals: This will allow you to change the totals electronically recorded (although the WA rules allow you to alter the electronic arrows to match the paper and then use the electronic total) &lt;br /&gt;
* Remove 10: remove all the first tie break arrow totals (again if under WA rules the box is blank) &lt;br /&gt;
* Remove X/nine: remove all the second tie break arrow totals, as above&lt;br /&gt;
* Remove both: If needed and both boxes are blank.&lt;br /&gt;
* Reset both: Used if you have mistakenly removed the totals of the tie break arrows.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:17--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
7. &#039;&#039;&#039;Print barcode Directives:&#039;&#039;&#039; This allows you to print a sheet to perform the barcode verification actions without needing to use a mouse during the process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Export text file ==== &amp;lt;!--T:18--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This function enables the user to save a text file (.txt) with all&lt;br /&gt;
the scores input in the tournament.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scorecard Printout ==  &amp;lt;!--T:19--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ScorecardPrintout.PNG|thumb|Scorecard Printout]&lt;br /&gt;
This function has been recently optimized for being as adaptable as possible. The first part is split into two columns, where the user can manage all the variables needed for customizing the Scorecard Printout. Generally, to help users print what they need, the first part of the screen includes the REQUIRED options by default for a standard printed scorecard.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:20--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Should the user need to print any other kind of scorecards (e.g. &#039;&#039;Only Data&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;Only Target Number&#039;&#039;, or &#039;&#039;Only Drawings&#039;&#039;), the screen offers a selection list (on the left), where the user can choose the options needed. The user can also modify a scorecard, to omit any text string, or picture included in the tournament using the boxes on the right. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:21--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Once the scorecard type is selected and the final appearance is selected, the user can proceed to the actual printing page. In the lower row, the software shows some editable boxes, that enables the user to choose the Session and Number of Targets to be printed (and if empty targets are included or not). Once the Session is selected the target numbers autocomplete any empty part with all the available targets. Once Session and Targets are selected, the user has to choose the distance to be printed below the distance area. When electronic devices are in use for the automatic score management, the user can print scorecards created by the software with scores input directly by the archers, using the &#039;Print Scorecards filled in with all the value from single arrow&#039; option.&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to print a manual collection slip using the &#039;Intermediate Results collecting paper&#039; option at the very bottom.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:22--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AthleteBadge.PNG|thumb|Athlete Numbers]]&lt;br /&gt;
== Athlete Numbers == &lt;br /&gt;
This option enables the user to print the Athlete Numbers for the event. &lt;br /&gt;
* Open the page and select the badge type to &#039;Qualification Athlete number&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter a name for the design (such as &#039;Athlete Number&#039; and click on &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Create new badge&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To edit the parameters of the badge and move/add and remove elements click on &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Edit Badge&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The printing procedure is similar to the Scorecards one, for the user needs to select the desired Session and Targets.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Personal Rank ==  &amp;lt;!--T:23--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PersonalRank.PNG|thumb|Personal Rank]]&lt;br /&gt;
This option enables the user to view a selected athlete in the referring Division and Class Ranking. As search values, the user can opt for the &#039;&#039;BIB number&#039;&#039;, the &#039;&#039;Family Name&#039;&#039; or the &#039;&#039;Name of the archer&#039;&#039;. After clicking on &#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;, the software will open a page displaying the athlete position in the ranking (the corresponding row will be highlighted in yellow), together with the archers in the two places before and after the selected one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Class and Division Result Lists ==  &amp;lt;!--T:24--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CDResults.PNG|thumb|Class and Division Result Lists]]&lt;br /&gt;
Clicking on this item, the software will open all the printout layouts for the Qualification Rounds. On this page, the main function is represented by the central icon &#039;&#039;Class &amp;amp; Division Result List&#039;&#039;. Clicking on this command, the user can print the Division and Class Ranking, both in the &#039;&#039;Class &amp;amp; Division Result List - Individual&#039;&#039; and in the &#039;&#039;Class &amp;amp; Division Result List - Team&#039;&#039; lists. Similarly, the user can click on the corresponding command on the right and on the left, but, then, only Individual (left) or Team Rankings (right) will be printed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:25--&amp;gt; Below these options, the software offers another row of icons that enable the user to print the rankings, where Medals Winners are highlighted.  These commands enable the user to choose the rankings to be printed, by Division and Class, or extracting a specific number of places and scores (starting from a cutoff) and so on. It will also allow the user to print results based on subclasses, or various groupings if desired. It is recommended that a user checks the printouts they need in advance, and tests to ensure what they need is actually generated sensibly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Events (Ind/Team) Result Lists ==  &amp;lt;!--T:26--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:QRanking.PNG|thumb|Events (Ind/Team) Result Lists]]&lt;br /&gt;
This page displays another set of printout layouts. From this page, the user can manage the printing of the tournament Qualification Round, the options are defined by the &#039;Events&#039; that are created for the Tournament defined in the areas below. &lt;br /&gt;
* Individual - [[Competition/Individual Events Setup]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Team - [[ Competition/Team Events Setup ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:27--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These printouts are very important if in the tournament there is a scheduled elimination and final round, on the other hand, they are not necessary for any competition that is not including this kind of matches. The order of the printouts can be defined in the two event setup areas if required. As for the previous printout pages, there is a .pdf file in the central part of the screen, with the complete &#039;&#039;Qualification Round - Complete&#039;&#039; report, on the side columns. The user can find the &#039;&#039;Individual&#039;&#039; and the &#039;&#039;Team&#039;&#039; ones separately too. In the other printout pages, there is a parameter section, with which the user can customize the layouts. Plus, the last default .pdf created by the software is &#039;&#039;Shoot Off/Coin Toss Status Printout&#039;&#039;, that immediately displays if there is any Shot-Off or Coin Toss to be broken, before proceeding to the Elimination and Final Round.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Speaker ==  &amp;lt;!--T:28--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This page displays the video printouts for the on-venue speaker. These printouts are mainly used in national and international events.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:29--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Qualification]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:30--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Content}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>DellaRossa</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Qualification&amp;diff=3787</id>
		<title>Qualification</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Qualification&amp;diff=3787"/>
		<updated>2026-06-17T20:14:27Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;DellaRossa: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Page in progress}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;languages/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:1--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The qualification round is a key phase in each tournament, from local ones to the most important competitions in Archery. Qualification can be before match-play as normal, or as the only part of a tournament to give final results (e.g. a WA1440). Everything that is related to scoring, scorecards, and printouts is available in the Qualification item of the main menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:2--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== Input Score ==&lt;br /&gt;
The main feature in the scores management. Selecting this option, the software will open dropdown submenu with some other items, which are related to the different procedures through which users can input scores in i@nseo. Users can enter scores in the system in four separate ways:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:4--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Qualification ScoringTable Simple.png|thumb|Input score, Standard Table]]&lt;br /&gt;
1. &#039;&#039;&#039;Standard Table:&#039;&#039;&#039; after selecting the desired Session, Targets and Distance, clicking on &#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;, a screen with a spreadsheet layout will be displayed: here the user can input scores in a simple and fast way. Ticking the box &#039;&#039;G/X&#039;&#039;, the user can manage Xs and 10s (or 9s in indoor tournaments) that each athlete will shoot. Generally, this is a required activity during competitions; it can be skipped when the user needs to manage only some parts of scorecards and Tie-Break data is not relevant (e.g. for scoring at half distance).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:6--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In this page and in all the others, when you enter a value and press &#039;Tab&#039; the cursor will move to the next cell, which is essential for entering data quickly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:7--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|type=reminder|text=Once scores of all archers have been input, or if a score is changed, the user has to click on &#039;&#039;&#039;Re-Build Teams&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;Re-Calculate Distance Rank&#039;&#039;&#039; and, then &#039;&#039;&#039;Re-Calculate Final Rank&#039;&#039;&#039;. The software will open 3 different pop-ups: always click &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;OK&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The software will, then, generate the Final Rank for the tournament.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:8--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The user could also click on &#039;&#039;&#039;Save results for snapshot feature&#039;&#039;&#039;, to generate data for the real time displaying of ranks, but it is not necessary, unless there are visual electronic devices (TV or similar systems) in use, for they need to manage in real time the athletes ranks or positions in the entire competition. When not using the HHT or Electronic devices the results will be ranked and displayed only considering sessions and distances in the tournament.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:9--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SetIRMStatus.png|thumb|IRM Status Setting]]&lt;br /&gt;
If an athlete decides to retire from the competition, or they have not shown up, the user can set the archers state using the &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Set&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; button on the left side.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Did not start&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;: The athlete will still be counted in the tournament statistics (payments, targets list, and so on), but the software won’t let the user input any scores. &lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Did not finish&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;: The athletes line will turn green, scores cannot be updated but the athlete will continue to the Head to Head event (if any) or receive a final rank from the qualification round&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Did not finish (No Rank)&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;: The athlete will not receive a rank from the qualification round and will not continue into the Head to Head event&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:9--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EnterScores ExtendedInput.png|thumb|Input score, Extended Table]]&lt;br /&gt;
2. &#039;&#039;&#039;Extended Table:&#039;&#039;&#039; it works just as the Standard Table. You can select all the distances to edit, or just one, but in addition to scores to be input the other distances totals are also shown. It is useful to check the scores that have been&lt;br /&gt;
previously input, have been entered without mistakes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:10--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ArrowbyArrowInsert.png|thumb|Input score, Arrow by arrow-Advanced users]]&lt;br /&gt;
3. &#039;&#039;&#039;Arrow by Arrow (Advanced users):&#039;&#039;&#039; this function enables the user to manage the score of each arrow in an end for each athlete. This scoring method should not be used when scoring with electronic devices, if the arrow values need editing in this case then use the scorecards view during the verification process (Link to Scorecards verification)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:11--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ArrowbyArrowSC.png|thumb|Input score, Arrow by arrow-Scorecards View]]&lt;br /&gt;
4. &#039;&#039;&#039;Arrow by Arrow (Scorecards View):&#039;&#039;&#039; this function works just as the previous method, but on a different view, that displays a chart, which is similar to a standard printed scorecard.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:12--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CheckDataUpdate.PNG|thumb|Check data updates]]&lt;br /&gt;
5. &#039;&#039;&#039;Check Data Update:&#039;&#039;&#039; This command enables the user to check Data Updates of scores, when the&lt;br /&gt;
competition is managed with different networked computers. The table shows the target numbers and they change colour based on when they last updated their data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Snapshot Configuration====&amp;lt;!--T:13--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:14--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ScorecardValidator.PNG|thumb|Check Scorecard using the Barcode]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:15--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
6. &#039;&#039;&#039;Get Score Barcodes:&#039;&#039;&#039;  This is the area where, when using arrow-by-arrow scoring (e.g. Ianseo Scorekeeper NG / NG Pro), you can validate the scorecards. &lt;br /&gt;
* Open the link&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter the separator character in the box (usually a - ) and click &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Go&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Select the Distance and Session in the drop down boxes, and scan the first scorecard. &lt;br /&gt;
* Once you have scanned the first scorecard, and the values are all correctly matching the paper, scan the same scorecard again to confirm it, the target will vanish from the list of missing cards on the right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:16--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The other options after scanning are:&lt;br /&gt;
* Edit arrows: This will take you to the scorecard screen and allow you to edit the arrow values, or search for the mathematical error&lt;br /&gt;
* Edit totals: This will allow you to change the totals electronically recorded (although the WA rules allow you to alter the electronic arrows to match the paper and then use the electronic total) &lt;br /&gt;
* Remove 10: remove all the first tie break arrow totals (again if under WA rules the box is blank) &lt;br /&gt;
* Remove X/nine: remove all the second tie break arrow totals, as above&lt;br /&gt;
* Remove both: If needed and both boxes are blank.&lt;br /&gt;
* Reset both: Used if you have mistakenly removed the totals of the tie break arrows.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:17--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
7. &#039;&#039;&#039;Print barcode Directives:&#039;&#039;&#039; This allows you to print a sheet to perform the barcode verification actions without needing to use a mouse during the process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Export text file ==== &amp;lt;!--T:18--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This function enables the user to save a text file (.txt) with all&lt;br /&gt;
the scores input in the tournament.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Scorecard Printout====  &amp;lt;!--T:19--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ScorecardPrintout.PNG|thumb|Scorecard Printout]&lt;br /&gt;
This function has been recently optimized for being as adaptable as possible. The first part is split into two columns, where the user can manage all the variables needed for customizing the Scorecard Printout. Generally, to help users print what they need, the first part of the screen includes the REQUIRED options by default for a standard printed scorecard.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:20--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Should the user need to print any other kind of scorecards (e.g. &#039;&#039;Only Data&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;Only Target Number&#039;&#039;, or &#039;&#039;Only Drawings&#039;&#039;), the screen offers a selection list (on the left), where the user can choose the options needed. The user can also modify a scorecard, to omit any text string, or picture included in the tournament using the boxes on the right. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:21--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Once the scorecard type is selected and the final appearance is selected, the user can proceed to the actual printing page. In the lower row, the software shows some editable boxes, that enables the user to choose the Session and Number of Targets to be printed (and if empty targets are included or not). Once the Session is selected the target numbers autocomplete any empty part with all the available targets. Once Session and Targets are selected, the user has to choose the distance to be printed below the distance area. When electronic devices are in use for the automatic score management, the user can print scorecards created by the software with scores input directly by the archers, using the &#039;Print Scorecards filled in with all the value from single arrow&#039; option.&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to print a manual collection slip using the &#039;Intermediate Results collecting paper&#039; option at the very bottom.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:22--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AthleteBadge.PNG|thumb|Athlete Numbers]]&lt;br /&gt;
====Athlete Numbers==== &lt;br /&gt;
This option enables the user to print the Athlete Numbers for the event. &lt;br /&gt;
* Open the page and select the badge type to &#039;Qualification Athlete number&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter a name for the design (such as &#039;Athlete Number&#039; and click on &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Create new badge&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To edit the parameters of the badge and move/add and remove elements click on &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Edit Badge&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The printing procedure is similar to the Scorecards one, for the user needs to select the desired Session and Targets.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Personal Rank====  &amp;lt;!--T:23--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PersonalRank.PNG|thumb|Personal Rank]]&lt;br /&gt;
This option enables the user to view a selected athlete in the referring Division and Class Ranking. As search values, the user can opt for the &#039;&#039;BIB number&#039;&#039;, the &#039;&#039;Family Name&#039;&#039; or the &#039;&#039;Name of the archer&#039;&#039;. After clicking on &#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;, the software will open a page displaying the athlete position in the ranking (the corresponding row will be highlighted in yellow), together with the archers in the two places before and after the selected one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Class and Division Result Lists ====  &amp;lt;!--T:24--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CDResults.PNG|thumb|Class and Division Result Lists]]&lt;br /&gt;
Clicking on this item, the software will open all the printout layouts for the Qualification Rounds. On this page, the main function is represented by the central icon &#039;&#039;Class &amp;amp; Division Result List&#039;&#039;. Clicking on this command, the user can print the Division and Class Ranking, both in the &#039;&#039;Class &amp;amp; Division Result List - Individual&#039;&#039; and in the &#039;&#039;Class &amp;amp; Division Result List - Team&#039;&#039; lists. Similarly, the user can click on the corresponding command on the right and on the left, but, then, only Individual (left) or Team Rankings (right) will be printed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:25--&amp;gt; Below these options, the software offers another row of icons that enable the user to print the rankings, where Medals Winners are highlighted.  These commands enable the user to choose the rankings to be printed, by Division and Class, or extracting a specific number of places and scores (starting from a cutoff) and so on. It will also allow the user to print results based on subclasses, or various groupings if desired. It is recommended that a user checks the printouts they need in advance, and tests to ensure what they need is actually generated sensibly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Events (Ind/Team) Result Lists ====  &amp;lt;!--T:26--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:QRanking.PNG|thumb|Events (Ind/Team) Result Lists]]&lt;br /&gt;
This page displays another set of printout layouts. From this page, the user can manage the printing of the tournament Qualification Round, the options are defined by the &#039;Events&#039; that are created for the Tournament defined in the areas below. &lt;br /&gt;
* Individual - [[Competition/Individual Events Setup]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Team - [[ Competition/Team Events Setup ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:27--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These printouts are very important if in the tournament there is a scheduled elimination and final round, on the other hand, they are not necessary for any competition that is not including this kind of matches. The order of the printouts can be defined in the two event setup areas if required. As for the previous printout pages, there is a .pdf file in the central part of the screen, with the complete &#039;&#039;Qualification Round - Complete&#039;&#039; report, on the side columns. The user can find the &#039;&#039;Individual&#039;&#039; and the &#039;&#039;Team&#039;&#039; ones separately too. In the other printout pages, there is a parameter section, with which the user can customize the layouts. Plus, the last default .pdf created by the software is &#039;&#039;Shoot Off/Coin Toss Status Printout&#039;&#039;, that immediately displays if there is any Shot-Off or Coin Toss to be broken, before proceeding to the Elimination and Final Round.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Speaker====  &amp;lt;!--T:28--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This page displays the video printouts for the on-venue speaker. These printouts are mainly&lt;br /&gt;
used in national and international events.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:29--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Qualification]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:30--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Content}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>DellaRossa</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Qualification&amp;diff=3786</id>
		<title>Qualification</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Qualification&amp;diff=3786"/>
		<updated>2026-06-17T20:05:32Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;DellaRossa: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Page in progress}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;languages/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Qualification Rounds == &amp;lt;!--T:1--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The qualification round is a key phase in each tournament, from local ones to the most important competitions&lt;br /&gt;
in Archery. Qualification can be before match-play as normal, or as the only part of a tournament to give final results (e.g. a WA1440). Everything that is related to scoring, scorecards, and printouts is available in the Qualification item of the main menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Scoring and Printouts === &amp;lt;!--T:2--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Qualification&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; item in the main menu of the software includes the following functions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Input Score ==== &amp;lt;!--T:3--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The main feature in the scores management. Selecting this option, the software will open dropdown submenu with some other items, which are related to the different procedures through which users can input scores in i@nseo. Users can enter scores in the system in four separate ways:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:4--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Qualification ScoringTable Simple.png|thumb|Input score, Standard Table]]&lt;br /&gt;
1. &#039;&#039;&#039;Standard Table:&#039;&#039;&#039; after selecting the desired Session, Targets and Distance, clicking on &#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;, a screen with a spreadsheet layout will be displayed: here the user can input scores in a simple and fast way. Ticking the box &#039;&#039;G/X&#039;&#039;, the user can manage Xs and 10s (or 9s in indoor tournaments) that each athlete will shoot. Generally, this is a required activity during competitions; it can be skipped when the user needs to manage only some parts of scorecards and Tie-Break data is not relevant (e.g. for scoring at half distance).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:6--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In this page and in all the others, when you enter a value and press &#039;Tab&#039; the cursor will move to the next cell, which is essential for entering data quickly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:7--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|type=reminder|text=Once scores of all archers have been input, or if a score is changed, the user has to click on &#039;&#039;&#039;Re-Build Teams&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;Re-Calculate Distance Rank&#039;&#039;&#039; and, then &#039;&#039;&#039;Re-Calculate Final Rank&#039;&#039;&#039;. The software will open 3 different pop-ups: always click &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;OK&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The software will, then, generate the Final Rank for the tournament.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:8--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The user could also click on &#039;&#039;&#039;Save results for snapshot feature&#039;&#039;&#039;, to generate data for the real time displaying of ranks, but it is not necessary, unless there are visual electronic devices (TV or similar systems) in use, for they need to manage in real time the athletes ranks or positions in the entire competition. When not using the HHT or Electronic devices the results will be ranked and displayed only considering sessions and distances in the tournament.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:9--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SetIRMStatus.png|thumb|IRM Status Setting]]&lt;br /&gt;
If an athlete decides to retire from the competition, or they have not shown up, the user can set the archers state using the &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Set&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; button on the left side.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Did not start&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;: The athlete will still be counted in the tournament statistics (payments, targets list, and so on), but the software won’t let the user input any scores. &lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Did not finish&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;: The athletes line will turn green, scores cannot be updated but the athlete will continue to the Head to Head event (if any) or receive a final rank from the qualification round&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Did not finish (No Rank)&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;: The athlete will not receive a rank from the qualification round and will not continue into the Head to Head event&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:9--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EnterScores ExtendedInput.png|thumb|Input score, Extended Table]]&lt;br /&gt;
2. &#039;&#039;&#039;Extended Table:&#039;&#039;&#039; it works just as the Standard Table. You can select all the distances to edit, or just one, but in addition to scores to be input the other distances totals are also shown. It is useful to check the scores that have been&lt;br /&gt;
previously input, have been entered without mistakes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:10--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ArrowbyArrowInsert.png|thumb|Input score, Arrow by arrow-Advanced users]]&lt;br /&gt;
3. &#039;&#039;&#039;Arrow by Arrow (Advanced users):&#039;&#039;&#039; this function enables the user to manage the score of each arrow in an end for each athlete. This scoring method should not be used when scoring with electronic devices, if the arrow values need editing in this case then use the scorecards view during the verification process (Link to Scorecards verification)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:11--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ArrowbyArrowSC.png|thumb|Input score, Arrow by arrow-Scorecards View]]&lt;br /&gt;
4. &#039;&#039;&#039;Arrow by Arrow (Scorecards View):&#039;&#039;&#039; this function works just as the previous method, but on a different view, that displays a chart, which is similar to a standard printed scorecard.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:12--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CheckDataUpdate.PNG|thumb|Check data updates]]&lt;br /&gt;
5. &#039;&#039;&#039;Check Data Update:&#039;&#039;&#039; This command enables the user to check Data Updates of scores, when the&lt;br /&gt;
competition is managed with different networked computers. The table shows the target numbers and they change colour based on when they last updated their data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Snapshot Configuration====&amp;lt;!--T:13--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:14--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ScorecardValidator.PNG|thumb|Check Scorecard using the Barcode]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:15--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
6. &#039;&#039;&#039;Get Score Barcodes:&#039;&#039;&#039;  This is the area where, when using arrow-by-arrow scoring (e.g. Ianseo Scorekeeper NG / NG Pro), you can validate the scorecards. &lt;br /&gt;
* Open the link&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter the separator character in the box (usually a - ) and click &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Go&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Select the Distance and Session in the drop down boxes, and scan the first scorecard. &lt;br /&gt;
* Once you have scanned the first scorecard, and the values are all correctly matching the paper, scan the same scorecard again to confirm it, the target will vanish from the list of missing cards on the right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:16--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The other options after scanning are:&lt;br /&gt;
* Edit arrows: This will take you to the scorecard screen and allow you to edit the arrow values, or search for the mathematical error&lt;br /&gt;
* Edit totals: This will allow you to change the totals electronically recorded (although the WA rules allow you to alter the electronic arrows to match the paper and then use the electronic total) &lt;br /&gt;
* Remove 10: remove all the first tie break arrow totals (again if under WA rules the box is blank) &lt;br /&gt;
* Remove X/nine: remove all the second tie break arrow totals, as above&lt;br /&gt;
* Remove both: If needed and both boxes are blank.&lt;br /&gt;
* Reset both: Used if you have mistakenly removed the totals of the tie break arrows.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:17--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
7. &#039;&#039;&#039;Print barcode Directives:&#039;&#039;&#039; This allows you to print a sheet to perform the barcode verification actions without needing to use a mouse during the process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Export text file ==== &amp;lt;!--T:18--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This function enables the user to save a text file (.txt) with all&lt;br /&gt;
the scores input in the tournament.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Scorecard Printout====  &amp;lt;!--T:19--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ScorecardPrintout.PNG|thumb|Scorecard Printout]&lt;br /&gt;
This function has been recently optimized for being as adaptable as possible. The first part is split into two columns, where the user can manage all the variables needed for customizing the Scorecard Printout. Generally, to help users print what they need, the first part of the screen includes the REQUIRED options by default for a standard printed scorecard.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:20--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Should the user need to print any other kind of scorecards (e.g. &#039;&#039;Only Data&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;Only Target Number&#039;&#039;, or &#039;&#039;Only Drawings&#039;&#039;), the screen offers a selection list (on the left), where the user can choose the options needed. The user can also modify a scorecard, to omit any text string, or picture included in the tournament using the boxes on the right. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:21--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Once the scorecard type is selected and the final appearance is selected, the user can proceed to the actual printing page. In the lower row, the software shows some editable boxes, that enables the user to choose the Session and Number of Targets to be printed (and if empty targets are included or not). Once the Session is selected the target numbers autocomplete any empty part with all the available targets. Once Session and Targets are selected, the user has to choose the distance to be printed below the distance area. When electronic devices are in use for the automatic score management, the user can print scorecards created by the software with scores input directly by the archers, using the &#039;Print Scorecards filled in with all the value from single arrow&#039; option.&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to print a manual collection slip using the &#039;Intermediate Results collecting paper&#039; option at the very bottom.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:22--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AthleteBadge.PNG|thumb|Athlete Numbers]]&lt;br /&gt;
====Athlete Numbers==== &lt;br /&gt;
This option enables the user to print the Athlete Numbers for the event. &lt;br /&gt;
* Open the page and select the badge type to &#039;Qualification Athlete number&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter a name for the design (such as &#039;Athlete Number&#039; and click on &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Create new badge&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To edit the parameters of the badge and move/add and remove elements click on &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Edit Badge&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The printing procedure is similar to the Scorecards one, for the user needs to select the desired Session and Targets.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Personal Rank====  &amp;lt;!--T:23--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PersonalRank.PNG|thumb|Personal Rank]]&lt;br /&gt;
This option enables the user to view a selected athlete in the referring Division and Class Ranking. As search values, the user can opt for the &#039;&#039;BIB number&#039;&#039;, the &#039;&#039;Family Name&#039;&#039; or the &#039;&#039;Name of the archer&#039;&#039;. After clicking on &#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;, the software will open a page displaying the athlete position in the ranking (the corresponding row will be highlighted in yellow), together with the archers in the two places before and after the selected one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Class and Division Result Lists ====  &amp;lt;!--T:24--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CDResults.PNG|thumb|Class and Division Result Lists]]&lt;br /&gt;
Clicking on this item, the software will open all the printout layouts for the Qualification Rounds. On this page, the main function is represented by the central icon &#039;&#039;Class &amp;amp; Division Result List&#039;&#039;. Clicking on this command, the user can print the Division and Class Ranking, both in the &#039;&#039;Class &amp;amp; Division Result List - Individual&#039;&#039; and in the &#039;&#039;Class &amp;amp; Division Result List - Team&#039;&#039; lists. Similarly, the user can click on the corresponding command on the right and on the left, but, then, only Individual (left) or Team Rankings (right) will be printed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:25--&amp;gt; Below these options, the software offers another row of icons that enable the user to print the rankings, where Medals Winners are highlighted.  These commands enable the user to choose the rankings to be printed, by Division and Class, or extracting a specific number of places and scores (starting from a cutoff) and so on. It will also allow the user to print results based on subclasses, or various groupings if desired. It is recommended that a user checks the printouts they need in advance, and tests to ensure what they need is actually generated sensibly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Events (Ind/Team) Result Lists ====  &amp;lt;!--T:26--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:QRanking.PNG|thumb|Events (Ind/Team) Result Lists]]&lt;br /&gt;
This page displays another set of printout layouts. From this page, the user can manage the printing of the tournament Qualification Round, the options are defined by the &#039;Events&#039; that are created for the Tournament defined in the areas below. &lt;br /&gt;
* Individual - [[Competition/Individual Events Setup]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Team - [[ Competition/Team Events Setup ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:27--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These printouts are very important if in the tournament there is a scheduled elimination and final round, on the other hand, they are not necessary for any competition that is not including this kind of matches. The order of the printouts can be defined in the two event setup areas if required. As for the previous printout pages, there is a .pdf file in the central part of the screen, with the complete &#039;&#039;Qualification Round - Complete&#039;&#039; report, on the side columns. The user can find the &#039;&#039;Individual&#039;&#039; and the &#039;&#039;Team&#039;&#039; ones separately too. In the other printout pages, there is a parameter section, with which the user can customize the layouts. Plus, the last default .pdf created by the software is &#039;&#039;Shoot Off/Coin Toss Status Printout&#039;&#039;, that immediately displays if there is any Shot-Off or Coin Toss to be broken, before proceeding to the Elimination and Final Round.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Speaker====  &amp;lt;!--T:28--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This page displays the video printouts for the on-venue speaker. These printouts are mainly&lt;br /&gt;
used in national and international events.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:29--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Qualification]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:30--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Content}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>DellaRossa</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Qualification&amp;diff=3785</id>
		<title>Qualification</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Qualification&amp;diff=3785"/>
		<updated>2026-06-17T14:07:37Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;DellaRossa: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Page in progress}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;languages/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Qualification Rounds == &amp;lt;!--T:1--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The qualification round is a key phase in each tournament, from local ones to the most important competitions&lt;br /&gt;
in Archery. Qualification can be before match-play as normal, or as the only part of a tournament to give final results (e.g. a WA1440). Everything that is related to scoring, scorecards, and printouts is available in the Qualification item of the main menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Scoring and Printouts === &amp;lt;!--T:2--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Qualification&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; item in the main menu of the software includes the following functions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Input Score ==== &amp;lt;!--T:3--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The main feature in the scores management. Selecting this option, the software will open dropdown submenu with some other items, which are related to the different procedures through which users can input scores in i@nseo. Users can enter scores in the system in four separate ways:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:4--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Qualification ScoringTable Simple.png|thumb|Input score, Standard Table]]&lt;br /&gt;
1. &#039;&#039;&#039;Standard Table:&#039;&#039;&#039; after selecting the desired Session, Targets and Distance, clicking on &#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;, a screen with a spreadsheet layout will be displayed: here the user can input scores in a simple and fast way. Ticking the box &#039;&#039;G/X&#039;&#039;, the user can manage Xs and 10s (or 9s in indoor tournaments) that each athlete will shoot. Generally, this is a required activity during competitions; it can be skipped when the user needs to manage only some parts of scorecards and Tie-Break data is not relevant (e.g. for scoring at half distance).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:6--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In this page and in all the others, when you enter a value and press &#039;Tab&#039; the cursor will move to the next cell, which is essential for entering data quickly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:7--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|type=reminder|text=Once scores of all archers have been input, or if a score is changed, the user has to click on &#039;&#039;&#039;Re-Build Teams&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;Re-Calculate Distance Rank&#039;&#039;&#039; and, then &#039;&#039;&#039;Re-Calculate Final Rank&#039;&#039;&#039;. The software will open 3 different pop-ups: always click &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;OK&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The software will, then, generate the Final Rank for the tournament.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:8--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The user could also click on &#039;&#039;&#039;Save results for snapshot feature&#039;&#039;&#039;, to generate data for the real time displaying of ranks, but it is not necessary, unless there are visual electronic devices (TV or similar systems) in use, for they need to manage in real time the athletes ranks or positions in the entire competition. When not using the HHT or Electronic devices the results will be ranked and displayed only considering sessions and distances in the tournament.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:9--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SetIRMStatus.png|thumb|IRM Status Setting]]&lt;br /&gt;
If an athlete decides to retire from the competition, or they have not shown up, the user can set the archers state using the &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Set&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; button on the left side.&lt;br /&gt;
* Did not start: The athlete will still be counted in the tournament statistics (payments, targets list, and so on), but the software won’t let the user input any scores. &lt;br /&gt;
* Did not finish: The athletes line will turn green, scores cannot be updated but the athlete will continue to the Head to Head event (if any) or receive a final rank from the qualification round&lt;br /&gt;
* Did not finish (No Rank): The athlete will not receive a rank from the qualification round and will not continue into the Head to Head event&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:9--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EnterScores ExtendedInput.png|thumb|Input score, Extended Table]]&lt;br /&gt;
2. &#039;&#039;&#039;Extended Table:&#039;&#039;&#039; it works just as the Standard Table. You can select all the distances to edit, or just one, but in addition to scores to be input the other distances totals are also shown. It is useful to check the scores that have been&lt;br /&gt;
previously input, have been entered without mistakes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:10--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ArrowbyArrowInsert.png|thumb|Input score, Arrow by arrow-Advanced users]]&lt;br /&gt;
3. &#039;&#039;&#039;Arrow by Arrow (Advanced users):&#039;&#039;&#039; this function enables the user to manage the score of each arrow in an end for each athlete. This scoring method should not be used when scoring with electronic devices, if the arrow values need editing in this case then use the scorecards view during the verification process (Link to Scorecards verification)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:11--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ArrowbyArrowSC.png|thumb|Input score, Arrow by arrow-Scorecards View]]&lt;br /&gt;
4. &#039;&#039;&#039;Arrow by Arrow (Scorecards View):&#039;&#039;&#039; this function works just as the previous method, but on a different view, that displays a chart, which is similar to a standard printed scorecard.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:12--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CheckDataUpdate.PNG|thumb|Check data updates]]&lt;br /&gt;
5. &#039;&#039;&#039;Check Data Update:&#039;&#039;&#039; This command enables the user to check Data Updates of scores, when the&lt;br /&gt;
competition is managed with different networked computers. The table shows the target numbers and they change colour based on when they last updated their data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Snapshot Configuration====&amp;lt;!--T:13--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:14--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ScorecardValidator.PNG|thumb|Check Scorecard using the Barcode]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:15--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
6. &#039;&#039;&#039;Get Score Barcodes:&#039;&#039;&#039;  This is the area where, when using arrow-by-arrow scoring (e.g. Ianseo Scorekeeper NG / NG Pro), you can validate the scorecards. &lt;br /&gt;
* Open the link&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter the separator character in the box (usually a - ) and click &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Go&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Select the Distance and Session in the drop down boxes, and scan the first scorecard. &lt;br /&gt;
* Once you have scanned the first scorecard, and the values are all correctly matching the paper, scan the same scorecard again to confirm it, the target will vanish from the list of missing cards on the right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:16--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The other options after scanning are:&lt;br /&gt;
* Edit arrows: This will take you to the scorecard screen and allow you to edit the arrow values, or search for the mathematical error&lt;br /&gt;
* Edit totals: This will allow you to change the totals electronically recorded (although the WA rules allow you to alter the electronic arrows to match the paper and then use the electronic total) &lt;br /&gt;
* Remove 10: remove all the first tie break arrow totals (again if under WA rules the box is blank) &lt;br /&gt;
* Remove X/nine: remove all the second tie break arrow totals, as above&lt;br /&gt;
* Remove both: If needed and both boxes are blank.&lt;br /&gt;
* Reset both: Used if you have mistakenly removed the totals of the tie break arrows.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:17--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
7. &#039;&#039;&#039;Print barcode Directives:&#039;&#039;&#039; This allows you to print a sheet to perform the barcode verification actions without needing to use a mouse during the process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Export text file ==== &amp;lt;!--T:18--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This function enables the user to save a text file (.txt) with all&lt;br /&gt;
the scores input in the tournament.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Scorecard Printout====  &amp;lt;!--T:19--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ScorecardPrintout.PNG|thumb|Scorecard Printout]&lt;br /&gt;
This function has been recently optimized for being as adaptable as possible. The first part is split into two columns, where the user can manage all the variables needed for customizing the Scorecard Printout. Generally, to help users print what they need, the first part of the screen includes the REQUIRED options by default for a standard printed scorecard.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:20--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Should the user need to print any other kind of scorecards (e.g. &#039;&#039;Only Data&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;Only Target Number&#039;&#039;, or &#039;&#039;Only Drawings&#039;&#039;), the screen offers a selection list (on the left), where the user can choose the options needed. The user can also modify a scorecard, to omit any text string, or picture included in the tournament using the boxes on the right. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:21--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Once the scorecard type is selected and the final appearance is selected, the user can proceed to the actual printing page. In the lower row, the software shows some editable boxes, that enables the user to choose the Session and Number of Targets to be printed (and if empty targets are included or not). Once the Session is selected the target numbers autocomplete any empty part with all the available targets. Once Session and Targets are selected, the user has to choose the distance to be printed below the distance area. When electronic devices are in use for the automatic score management, the user can print scorecards created by the software with scores input directly by the archers, using the &#039;Print Scorecards filled in with all the value from single arrow&#039; option.&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to print a manual collection slip using the &#039;Intermediate Results collecting paper&#039; option at the very bottom.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:22--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AthleteBadge.PNG|thumb|Athlete Numbers]]&lt;br /&gt;
====Athlete Numbers==== &lt;br /&gt;
This option enables the user to print the Athlete Numbers for the event. &lt;br /&gt;
* Open the page and select the badge type to &#039;Qualification Athlete number&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter a name for the design (such as &#039;Athlete Number&#039; and click on &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Create new badge&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To edit the parameters of the badge and move/add and remove elements click on &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Edit Badge&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The printing procedure is similar to the Scorecards one, for the user needs to select the desired Session and Targets.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Personal Rank====  &amp;lt;!--T:23--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PersonalRank.PNG|thumb|Personal Rank]]&lt;br /&gt;
This option enables the user to view a selected athlete in the referring Division and Class Ranking. As search values, the user can opt for the &#039;&#039;BIB number&#039;&#039;, the &#039;&#039;Family Name&#039;&#039; or the &#039;&#039;Name of the archer&#039;&#039;. After clicking on &#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;, the software will open a page displaying the athlete position in the ranking (the corresponding row will be highlighted in yellow), together with the archers in the two places before and after the selected one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Class and Division Result Lists ====  &amp;lt;!--T:24--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CDResults.PNG|thumb|Class and Division Result Lists]]&lt;br /&gt;
Clicking on this item, the software will open all the printout layouts for the Qualification Rounds. On this page, the main function is represented by the central icon &#039;&#039;Class &amp;amp; Division Result List&#039;&#039;. Clicking on this command, the user can print the Division and Class Ranking, both in the &#039;&#039;Class &amp;amp; Division Result List - Individual&#039;&#039; and in the &#039;&#039;Class &amp;amp; Division Result List - Team&#039;&#039; lists. Similarly, the user can click on the corresponding command on the right and on the left, but, then, only Individual (left) or Team Rankings (right) will be printed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:25--&amp;gt; Below these options, the software offers another row of icons that enable the user to print the rankings, where Medals Winners are highlighted.  These commands enable the user to choose the rankings to be printed, by Division and Class, or extracting a specific number of places and scores (starting from a cutoff) and so on. It will also allow the user to print results based on subclasses, or various groupings if desired. It is recommended that a user checks the printouts they need in advance, and tests to ensure what they need is actually generated sensibly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Events (Ind/Team) Result Lists ====  &amp;lt;!--T:26--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:QRanking.PNG|thumb|Events (Ind/Team) Result Lists]]&lt;br /&gt;
This page displays another set of printout layouts. From this page, the user can manage the printing of the tournament Qualification Round, the options are defined by the &#039;Events&#039; that are created for the Tournament defined in the areas below. &lt;br /&gt;
* Individual - [[Competition/Individual Events Setup]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Team - [[ Competition/Team Events Setup ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:27--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These printouts are very important if in the tournament there is a scheduled elimination and final round, on the other hand, they are not necessary for any competition that is not including this kind of matches. The order of the printouts can be defined in the two event setup areas if required. As for the previous printout pages, there is a .pdf file in the central part of the screen, with the complete &#039;&#039;Qualification Round - Complete&#039;&#039; report, on the side columns. The user can find the &#039;&#039;Individual&#039;&#039; and the &#039;&#039;Team&#039;&#039; ones separately too. In the other printout pages, there is a parameter section, with which the user can customize the layouts. Plus, the last default .pdf created by the software is &#039;&#039;Shoot Off/Coin Toss Status Printout&#039;&#039;, that immediately displays if there is any Shot-Off or Coin Toss to be broken, before proceeding to the Elimination and Final Round.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Speaker====  &amp;lt;!--T:28--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This page displays the video printouts for the on-venue speaker. These printouts are mainly&lt;br /&gt;
used in national and international events.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:29--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Qualification]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:30--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Content}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>DellaRossa</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Qualification&amp;diff=3784</id>
		<title>Qualification</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Qualification&amp;diff=3784"/>
		<updated>2026-06-17T14:06:42Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;DellaRossa: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Page in progress}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;languages/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Qualification Rounds == &amp;lt;!--T:1--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The qualification round is a key phase in each tournament, from local ones to the most important competitions&lt;br /&gt;
in Archery. Qualification can be before match-play as normal, or as the only part of a tournament to give final results (e.g. a WA1440). Everything that is related to scoring, scorecards, and printouts is available in the Qualification item of the main menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Scoring and Printouts === &amp;lt;!--T:2--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Qualification&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; item in the main menu of the software includes the following functions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Input Score ==== &amp;lt;!--T:3--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The main feature in the scores management. Selecting this option, the software will open dropdown submenu with some other items, which are related to the different procedures through which users can input scores in i@nseo. Users can enter scores in the system in four separate ways:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:4--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Qualification ScoringTable Simple.png|thumb|Input score, Standard Table]]&lt;br /&gt;
1. &#039;&#039;&#039;Standard Table:&#039;&#039;&#039; after selecting the desired Session, Targets and Distance, clicking on &#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;, a screen with a spreadsheet layout will be displayed: here the user can input scores in a simple and fast way. Ticking the box &#039;&#039;G/X&#039;&#039;, the user can manage Xs and 10s (or 9s in indoor tournaments) that each athlete will shoot. Generally, this is a required activity during competitions; it can be skipped when the user needs to manage only some parts of scorecards and Tie-Break data is not relevant (e.g. for scoring at half distance).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:6--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In this page and in all the others, when you enter a value and press &#039;Tab&#039; the cursor will move to the next cell, which is essential for entering data quickly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:7--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|type=reminder|text=Once scores of all archers have been input, or if a score is changed, the user has to click on &#039;&#039;&#039;Re-Build Teams&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;Re-Calculate Distance Rank&#039;&#039;&#039; and, then &#039;&#039;&#039;Re-Calculate Final Rank&#039;&#039;&#039;. The software will open 3 different pop-ups: always click &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;OK&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The software will, then, generate the Final Rank for the tournament.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:8--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The user could also click on &#039;&#039;&#039;Save results for snapshot feature&#039;&#039;&#039;, to generate data for the real time displaying of ranks, but it is not necessary, unless there are visual electronic devices (TV or similar systems) in use, for they need to manage in real time the athletes ranks or positions in the entire competition. When not using the HHT or Electronic devices the results will be ranked and displayed only considering sessions and distances in the tournament.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:9--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SetIRMStatus.png|thumb|IRM Status Setting]]&lt;br /&gt;
If an athlete decides to retire from the competition, or they have not shown up, the user can set the archers state using the &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Set&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; button on the left side.&lt;br /&gt;
* Did not start: The athlete will still be counted in the tournament statistics (payments, targets list, and so on), but the software won’t let the user input any scores. &lt;br /&gt;
* Did not finish: The athletes line will turn green, scores cannot be updated but the athlete will continue to the Head to Head event (if any) or receive a final rank from the qualification round&lt;br /&gt;
* Did not finish (No Rank): The athlete will not receive a rank from the qualification round and will not continue into the Head to Head event&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:9--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EnterScores ExtendedInput.png|thumb|Input score, Extended Table]]&lt;br /&gt;
2. &#039;&#039;&#039;Extended Table:&#039;&#039;&#039; it works just as the Standard Table. You can select all the distances to edit, or just one, but in addition to scores to be input the other distances totals are also shown. It is useful to check the scores that have been&lt;br /&gt;
previously input, have been entered without mistakes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:10--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ArrowbyArrowInsert.png|thumb|Input score, Arrow by arrow-Advanced users]]&lt;br /&gt;
3. &#039;&#039;&#039;Arrow by Arrow (Advanced users):&#039;&#039;&#039; this function enables the user to manage the score of each arrow in an end for each athlete. This scoring method should not be used when scoring with electronic devices, if the arrow values need editing in this case then use the scorecards view during the verification process (Link to Scorecards verification)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:11--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ArrowbyArrowSC.png|thumb|Input score, Arrow by arrow-Scorecards View]]]&lt;br /&gt;
4. &#039;&#039;&#039;Arrow by Arrow (Scorecards View):&#039;&#039;&#039; this function works just as the previous method, but on a different view, that displays a chart, which is similar to a standard printed scorecard.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:12--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CheckDataUpdate.PNG|thumb|Check data updates]]&lt;br /&gt;
5. &#039;&#039;&#039;Check Data Update:&#039;&#039;&#039; This command enables the user to check Data Updates of scores, when the&lt;br /&gt;
competition is managed with different networked computers. The table shows the target numbers and they change colour based on when they last updated their data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Snapshot Configuration====&amp;lt;!--T:13--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:14--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ScorecardValidator.PNG|thumb|Check Scorecard using the Barcode]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:15--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
6. &#039;&#039;&#039;Get Score Barcodes:&#039;&#039;&#039;  This is the area where, when using arrow-by-arrow scoring (e.g. Ianseo Scorekeeper NG / NG Pro), you can validate the scorecards. &lt;br /&gt;
* Open the link&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter the separator character in the box (usually a - ) and click &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Go&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Select the Distance and Session in the drop down boxes, and scan the first scorecard. &lt;br /&gt;
* Once you have scanned the first scorecard, and the values are all correctly matching the paper, scan the same scorecard again to confirm it, the target will vanish from the list of missing cards on the right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:16--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The other options after scanning are:&lt;br /&gt;
* Edit arrows: This will take you to the scorecard screen and allow you to edit the arrow values, or search for the mathematical error&lt;br /&gt;
* Edit totals: This will allow you to change the totals electronically recorded (although the WA rules allow you to alter the electronic arrows to match the paper and then use the electronic total) &lt;br /&gt;
* Remove 10: remove all the first tie break arrow totals (again if under WA rules the box is blank) &lt;br /&gt;
* Remove X/nine: remove all the second tie break arrow totals, as above&lt;br /&gt;
* Remove both: If needed and both boxes are blank.&lt;br /&gt;
* Reset both: Used if you have mistakenly removed the totals of the tie break arrows.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:17--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
7. &#039;&#039;&#039;Print barcode Directives:&#039;&#039;&#039; This allows you to print a sheet to perform the barcode verification actions without needing to use a mouse during the process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Export text file ==== &amp;lt;!--T:18--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This function enables the user to save a text file (.txt) with all&lt;br /&gt;
the scores input in the tournament.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Scorecard Printout====  &amp;lt;!--T:19--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ScorecardPrintout.PNG|thumb|Scorecard Printout]&lt;br /&gt;
This function has been recently optimized for being as adaptable as possible. The first part is split into two columns, where the user can manage all the variables needed for customizing the Scorecard Printout. Generally, to help users print what they need, the first part of the screen includes the REQUIRED options by default for a standard printed scorecard.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:20--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Should the user need to print any other kind of scorecards (e.g. &#039;&#039;Only Data&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;Only Target Number&#039;&#039;, or &#039;&#039;Only Drawings&#039;&#039;), the screen offers a selection list (on the left), where the user can choose the options needed. The user can also modify a scorecard, to omit any text string, or picture included in the tournament using the boxes on the right. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:21--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Once the scorecard type is selected and the final appearance is selected, the user can proceed to the actual printing page. In the lower row, the software shows some editable boxes, that enables the user to choose the Session and Number of Targets to be printed (and if empty targets are included or not). Once the Session is selected the target numbers autocomplete any empty part with all the available targets. Once Session and Targets are selected, the user has to choose the distance to be printed below the distance area. When electronic devices are in use for the automatic score management, the user can print scorecards created by the software with scores input directly by the archers, using the &#039;Print Scorecards filled in with all the value from single arrow&#039; option.&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to print a manual collection slip using the &#039;Intermediate Results collecting paper&#039; option at the very bottom.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:22--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AthleteBadge.PNG|thumb|Athlete Numbers]]&lt;br /&gt;
====Athlete Numbers==== &lt;br /&gt;
This option enables the user to print the Athlete Numbers for the event. &lt;br /&gt;
* Open the page and select the badge type to &#039;Qualification Athlete number&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter a name for the design (such as &#039;Athlete Number&#039; and click on &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Create new badge&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To edit the parameters of the badge and move/add and remove elements click on &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Edit Badge&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The printing procedure is similar to the Scorecards one, for the user needs to select the desired Session and Targets.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Personal Rank====  &amp;lt;!--T:23--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PersonalRank.PNG|thumb|Personal Rank]]&lt;br /&gt;
This option enables the user to view a selected athlete in the referring Division and Class Ranking. As search values, the user can opt for the &#039;&#039;BIB number&#039;&#039;, the &#039;&#039;Family Name&#039;&#039; or the &#039;&#039;Name of the archer&#039;&#039;. After clicking on &#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;, the software will open a page displaying the athlete position in the ranking (the corresponding row will be highlighted in yellow), together with the archers in the two places before and after the selected one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Class and Division Result Lists ====  &amp;lt;!--T:24--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CDResults.PNG|thumb|Class and Division Result Lists]]&lt;br /&gt;
Clicking on this item, the software will open all the printout layouts for the Qualification Rounds. On this page, the main function is represented by the central icon &#039;&#039;Class &amp;amp; Division Result List&#039;&#039;. Clicking on this command, the user can print the Division and Class Ranking, both in the &#039;&#039;Class &amp;amp; Division Result List - Individual&#039;&#039; and in the &#039;&#039;Class &amp;amp; Division Result List - Team&#039;&#039; lists. Similarly, the user can click on the corresponding command on the right and on the left, but, then, only Individual (left) or Team Rankings (right) will be printed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:25--&amp;gt; Below these options, the software offers another row of icons that enable the user to print the rankings, where Medals Winners are highlighted.  These commands enable the user to choose the rankings to be printed, by Division and Class, or extracting a specific number of places and scores (starting from a cutoff) and so on. It will also allow the user to print results based on subclasses, or various groupings if desired. It is recommended that a user checks the printouts they need in advance, and tests to ensure what they need is actually generated sensibly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Events (Ind/Team) Result Lists ====  &amp;lt;!--T:26--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:QRanking.PNG|thumb|Events (Ind/Team) Result Lists]]&lt;br /&gt;
This page displays another set of printout layouts. From this page, the user can manage the printing of the tournament Qualification Round, the options are defined by the &#039;Events&#039; that are created for the Tournament defined in the areas below. &lt;br /&gt;
* Individual - [[Competition/Individual Events Setup]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Team - [[ Competition/Team Events Setup ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:27--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These printouts are very important if in the tournament there is a scheduled elimination and final round, on the other hand, they are not necessary for any competition that is not including this kind of matches. The order of the printouts can be defined in the two event setup areas if required. As for the previous printout pages, there is a .pdf file in the central part of the screen, with the complete &#039;&#039;Qualification Round - Complete&#039;&#039; report, on the side columns. The user can find the &#039;&#039;Individual&#039;&#039; and the &#039;&#039;Team&#039;&#039; ones separately too. In the other printout pages, there is a parameter section, with which the user can customize the layouts. Plus, the last default .pdf created by the software is &#039;&#039;Shoot Off/Coin Toss Status Printout&#039;&#039;, that immediately displays if there is any Shot-Off or Coin Toss to be broken, before proceeding to the Elimination and Final Round.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Speaker====  &amp;lt;!--T:28--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This page displays the video printouts for the on-venue speaker. These printouts are mainly&lt;br /&gt;
used in national and international events.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:29--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Qualification]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:30--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Content}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>DellaRossa</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Qualification&amp;diff=3783</id>
		<title>Qualification</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Qualification&amp;diff=3783"/>
		<updated>2026-06-17T14:05:35Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;DellaRossa: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Page in progress}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;languages/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Qualification Rounds == &amp;lt;!--T:1--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The qualification round is a key phase in each tournament, from local ones to the most important competitions&lt;br /&gt;
in Archery. Qualification can be before match-play as normal, or as the only part of a tournament to give final results (e.g. a WA1440). Everything that is related to scoring, scorecards, and printouts is available in the Qualification item of the main menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Scoring and Printouts === &amp;lt;!--T:2--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Qualification&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; item in the main menu of the software includes the following functions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Input Score ==== &amp;lt;!--T:3--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The main feature in the scores management. Selecting this option, the software will open dropdown submenu with some other items, which are related to the different procedures through which users can input scores in i@nseo. Users can enter scores in the system in four separate ways:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:4--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Qualification ScoringTable Simple.png|thumb|Input score, Standard Table]]&lt;br /&gt;
1. &#039;&#039;&#039;Standard Table:&#039;&#039;&#039; after selecting the desired Session, Targets and Distance, clicking on &#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;, a screen with a spreadsheet layout will be displayed: here the user can input scores in a simple and fast way. Ticking the box &#039;&#039;G/X&#039;&#039;, the user can manage Xs and 10s (or 9s in indoor tournaments) that each athlete will shoot. Generally, this is a required activity during competitions; it can be skipped when the user needs to manage only some parts of scorecards and Tie-Break data is not relevant (e.g. for scoring at half distance).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:6--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In this page and in all the others, when you enter a value and press &#039;Tab&#039; the cursor will move to the next cell, which is essential for entering data quickly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:7--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|type=reminder|text=Once scores of all archers have been input, or if a score is changed, the user has to click on &#039;&#039;&#039;Re-Build Teams&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;Re-Calculate Distance Rank&#039;&#039;&#039; and, then &#039;&#039;&#039;Re-Calculate Final Rank&#039;&#039;&#039;. The software will open 3 different pop-ups: always click &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;OK&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The software will, then, generate the Final Rank for the tournament.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:8--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The user could also click on &#039;&#039;&#039;Save results for snapshot feature&#039;&#039;&#039;, to generate data for the real time displaying of ranks, but it is not necessary, unless there are visual electronic devices (TV or similar systems) in use, for they need to manage in real time the athletes ranks or positions in the entire competition. When not using the HHT or Electronic devices the results will be ranked and displayed only considering sessions and distances in the tournament.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:9--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SetIRMStatus.png|thumb|IRM Status Setting]]&lt;br /&gt;
If an athlete decides to retire from the competition, or they have not shown up, the user can set the archers state using the &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Set&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; button on the left side.&lt;br /&gt;
* Did not start: The athlete will still be counted in the tournament statistics (payments, targets list, and so on), but the software won’t let the user input any scores. &lt;br /&gt;
* Did not finish: The athletes line will turn green, scores cannot be updated but the athlete will continue to the Head to Head event (if any) or receive a final rank from the qualification round&lt;br /&gt;
* Did not finish (No Rank): The athlete will not receive a rank from the qualification round and will not continue into the Head to Head event&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:9--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EnterScores ExtendedInput.png|thumb|Input score, Extended Table]]&lt;br /&gt;
2. &#039;&#039;&#039;Extended Table:&#039;&#039;&#039; it works just as the Standard Table. You can select all the distances to edit, or just one, but in addition to scores to be input the other distances totals are also shown. It is useful to check the scores that have been&lt;br /&gt;
previously input, have been entered without mistakes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:10--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ArrowbyArrowInsert.png|thumb|Input score, Arrow by arrow-Advanced users]]&lt;br /&gt;
3. &#039;&#039;&#039;Arrow by Arrow (Advanced users):&#039;&#039;&#039; this function enables the user to manage the score of each arrow in an end for each athlete. This scoring method should not be used when scoring with electronic devices, if the arrow values need editing in this case then use the scorecards view during the verification process (Link to Scorecards verification)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:11--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ArrowbyArrowSC.png|thumb|Input score, Arrow by arrow-Scorecards View]]]&lt;br /&gt;
4. &#039;&#039;&#039;Arrow by Arrow (Scorecards View):&#039;&#039;&#039; this function works just as the previous method, but on a different view, that displays a chart, which is similar to a standard printed scorecard.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:12--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CheckDataUpdate.PNG|thumb|Check data updates]]&lt;br /&gt;
5. &#039;&#039;&#039;Check Data Update:&#039;&#039;&#039; This command enables the user to check Data Updates of scores, when the&lt;br /&gt;
competition is managed with different networked computers. The table shows the target numbers and they change colour based on when they last updated their data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Snapshot Configuration====&amp;lt;!--T:13--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:14--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ScorecardValidator.PNG|thumb|Check Scorecard using the Barcode]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:15--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
6. &#039;&#039;&#039;Get Score Barcodes:&#039;&#039;&#039;  This is the area where, when using arrow-by-arrow scoring (e.g. Ianseo Scorekeeper NG / NG Pro), you can validate the scorecards. &lt;br /&gt;
* Open the link&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter the separator character in the box (usually a - ) and click &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Go&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Select the Distance and Session in the drop down boxes, and scan the first scorecard. &lt;br /&gt;
* Once you have scanned the first scorecard, and the values are all correctly matching the paper, scan the same scorecard again to confirm it, the target will vanish from the list of missing cards on the right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:16--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The other options after scanning are:&lt;br /&gt;
* Edit arrows: This will take you to the scorecard screen and allow you to edit the arrow values, or search for the mathematical error&lt;br /&gt;
* Edit totals: This will allow you to change the totals electronically recorded (although the WA rules allow you to alter the electronic arrows to match the paper and then use the electronic total) &lt;br /&gt;
* Remove 10: remove all the first tie break arrow totals (again if under WA rules the box is blank) &lt;br /&gt;
* Remove X/nine: remove all the second tie break arrow totals, as above&lt;br /&gt;
* Remove both: If needed and both boxes are blank.&lt;br /&gt;
* Reset both: Used if you have mistakenly removed the totals of the tie break arrows.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:17--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
7. &#039;&#039;&#039;Print barcode Directives:&#039;&#039;&#039; This allows you to print a sheet to perform the barcode verification actions without needing to use a mouse during the process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Export text file ==== &amp;lt;!--T:18--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This function enables the user to save a text file (.txt) with all&lt;br /&gt;
the scores input in the tournament.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Scorecard Printout====  &amp;lt;!--T:19--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ScorecardPrintout.PNG|thumb|Scorecard Printout]&lt;br /&gt;
This function has been recently optimized for being as adaptable as possible. The first part is split into two columns, where the user can manage all the variables needed for customizing the Scorecard Printout. Generally, to help users print what they need, the first part of the screen includes the REQUIRED options by default for a standard printed scorecard.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:20--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Should the user need to print any other kind of scorecards (e.g. &#039;&#039;Only Data&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;Only Target Number&#039;&#039;, or &#039;&#039;Only Drawings&#039;&#039;), the screen offers a selection list (on the left), where the user can choose the options needed. The user can also modify a scorecard, to omit any text string, or picture included in the tournament using the boxes on the right. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:21--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Once the scorecard type is selected and the final appearance is selected, the user can proceed to the actual printing page. In the lower row, the software shows some editable boxes, that enables the user to choose the Session and Number of Targets to be printed (and if empty targets are included or not). Once the Session is selected the target numbers autocomplete any empty part with all the available targets. Once Session and Targets are selected, the user has to choose the distance to be printed below the distance area. When electronic devices are in use for the automatic score management, the user can print scorecards created by the software with scores input directly by the archers, using the &#039;Print Scorecards filled in with all the value from single arrow&#039; option.&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to print a manual collection slip using the &#039;Intermediate Results collecting paper&#039; option at the very bottom.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:22--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AthleteBadge.PNG|thumb|Athlete Numbers]]&lt;br /&gt;
====Athlete Numbers==== &lt;br /&gt;
This option enables the user to print the Athlete Numbers for the event. &lt;br /&gt;
* Open the page and select the badge type to &#039;Qualification Athlete number&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter a name for the design (such as &#039;Athlete Number&#039; and click on &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Create new badge&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To edit the parameters of the badge and move/add and remove elements click on &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Edit Badge&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The printing procedure is similar to the Scorecards one, for the user needs to select the desired Session and Targets.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Personal Rank====  &amp;lt;!--T:23--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PersonalRank.PNG|thumb|Personal Rank]]&lt;br /&gt;
This option enables the user to view a selected athlete in the referring Division and Class Ranking. As search values, the user can opt for the &#039;&#039;BIB number&#039;&#039;, the &#039;&#039;Family Name&#039;&#039; or the &#039;&#039;Name of the archer&#039;&#039;. After clicking on &#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;, the software will open a page displaying the athlete position in the ranking (the corresponding row will be highlighted in yellow), together with the archers in the two places before and after the selected one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Class and Division Result Lists ====  &amp;lt;!--T:24--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CDResults.PNG|thumb|Class and Division Result Lists]]&lt;br /&gt;
Clicking on this item, the software will open all the printout layouts for the Qualification Rounds. On this page, the main function is represented by the central icon &#039;&#039;Class &amp;amp; Division Result List&#039;&#039;. Clicking on this command, the user can print the Division and Class Ranking, both in the &#039;&#039;Class &amp;amp; Division Result List - Individual&#039;&#039; and in the &#039;&#039;Class &amp;amp; Division Result List - Team&#039;&#039; lists. Similarly, the user can click on the corresponding command on the right and on the left, but, then, only Individual (left) or Team Rankings (right) will be printed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:25--&amp;gt; Below these options, the software offers another row of icons that enable the user to print the rankings, where Medals Winners are highlighted.  These commands enable the user to choose the rankings to be printed, by Division and Class, or extracting a specific number of places and scores (starting from a cutoff) and so on. It will also allow the user to print results based on subclasses, or various groupings if desired. It is recommended that a user checks the printouts they need in advance, and tests to ensure what they need is actually generated sensibly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Events (Ind/Team) Result Lists ====  &amp;lt;!--T:26--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:QRanking.PNG|thumb|Events (Ind/Team) Result Lists]]&lt;br /&gt;
This page displays another set of printout layouts. From this page, the user can manage the printing of the tournament Qualification Round, the options are defined by the &#039;Events&#039; that are created for the Tournament defined in the areas below. &lt;br /&gt;
* Individual - [[Competition/Individual Events Setup]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Team - [[ Competition/Team Events Setup ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:27--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These printouts are very important if in the tournament there is a scheduled elimination and final round, on the other hand, they are not necessary for any competition that is not including this kind of matches. The order of the printouts can be defined in the two event setup areas if required. As for the previous printout pages, there is a .pdf file in the central part of the screen, with the complete &#039;&#039;Qualification Round - Complete&#039;&#039; report, on the side columns. The user can find the &#039;&#039;Individual&#039;&#039; and the &#039;&#039;Team&#039;&#039; ones separately too. In the other printout pages, there is a parameter section, with which the user can customize the layouts. Plus, the last default .pdf created by the software is &#039;&#039;Shoot Off/Coin Toss Status Printout&#039;&#039;, that immediately displays if there is any Shot-Off or Coin Toss to be broken, before proceeding to the Elimination and Final Round.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Speaker====  &amp;lt;!--T:28--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This page displays the video printouts for the on-venue speaker. These printouts are mainly&lt;br /&gt;
used in national and international events.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:29--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Qualification]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:30--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Content}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>DellaRossa</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Qualification&amp;diff=3782</id>
		<title>Qualification</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Qualification&amp;diff=3782"/>
		<updated>2026-06-17T13:52:32Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;DellaRossa: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Page in progress}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;languages/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Qualification Rounds == &amp;lt;!--T:1--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The qualification round is a key phase in each tournament, from local ones to the most important competitions&lt;br /&gt;
in Archery. Qualification can be before match-play as normal, or as the only part of a tournament to give final results (e.g. a WA1440). Everything that is related to scoring, scorecards, and printouts is available in the Qualification item of the main menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Scoring and Printouts === &amp;lt;!--T:2--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Qualification&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; item in the main menu of the software includes the following functions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Input Score ==== &amp;lt;!--T:3--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The main feature in the scores management. Selecting this option, the software will open dropdown submenu with some other items, which are related to the different procedures through which users can input scores in i@nseo. Users can enter scores in the system in four separate ways:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:4--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Qualification ScoringTable Simple.png|thumb|Input score, Standard Table]]&lt;br /&gt;
1. &#039;&#039;&#039;Standard Table:&#039;&#039;&#039; after selecting the desired Session, Targets and Distance, clicking on &#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;, a screen with a spreadsheet layout will be displayed: here the user can input scores in a simple and fast way. Ticking the box &#039;&#039;G/X&#039;&#039;, the user can manage Xs and 10s (or 9s in indoor tournaments) that each athlete will shoot. Generally, this is a required activity during competitions; it can be skipped when the user needs to manage only some parts of scorecards and Tie-Break data is not relevant (e.g. for scoring at half distance).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:6--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In this page and in all the others, when you enter a value and press &#039;Tab&#039; the cursor will move to the next cell, which is essential for entering data quickly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:7--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|type=reminder|text=Once scores of all archers have been input, or if a score is changed, the user has to click on &#039;&#039;&#039;Re-Build Teams&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;Re-Calculate Distance Rank&#039;&#039;&#039; and, then &#039;&#039;&#039;Re-Calculate Final Rank&#039;&#039;&#039;. The software will open 3 different pop-ups: always click &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;OK&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The software will, then, generate the Final Rank for the tournament.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:8--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The user could also click on &#039;&#039;&#039;Save results for snapshot feature&#039;&#039;&#039;, to generate data for the real time displaying of ranks, but it is not necessary, unless there are visual electronic devices (TV or similar systems) in use, for they need to manage in real time the athletes ranks or positions in the entire competition. When not using the HHT or Electronic devices the results will be ranked and displayed only considering sessions and distances in the tournament.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:9--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SetIRMStatus.png|thumb|IRM Status Setting]]&lt;br /&gt;
If an athlete decides to retire from the competition, or they have not shown up, the user can set the archers state using the &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Set&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; button on the left side.&lt;br /&gt;
* Did not start: The athlete will still be counted in the tournament statistics (payments, targets list, and so on), but the software won’t let the user input any scores. &lt;br /&gt;
* Did not finish: The athletes line will turn green, scores cannot be updated but the athlete will continue to the Head to Head event (if any) or receive a final rank from the qualification round&lt;br /&gt;
* Did not finish (No Rank): The athlete will not receive a rank from the qualification round and will not continue into the Head to Head event&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:9--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EnterScores ExtendedInput.png|thumb|Input score, Extended Table]]&lt;br /&gt;
2. &#039;&#039;&#039;Extended Table:&#039;&#039;&#039; it works just as the Standard Table. You can select all the distances to edit, or just one, but in addition to scores to be input the other distances totals are also shown. It is useful to check the scores that have been&lt;br /&gt;
previously input, have been entered without mistakes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:10--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ArrowbyArrowInsert.png|thumb|Input score, Arrow by arrow-Advanced users]]&lt;br /&gt;
3. &#039;&#039;&#039;Arrow by Arrow (Advanced users):&#039;&#039;&#039; this function enables the user to manage the score of each arrow in an end for each athlete. This scoring method should not be used when scoring with electronic devices, if the arrow values need editing in this case then use the scorecards view during the verification process (Link to Scorecards verification)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:11--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ArrowbyArrowSC.png|thumb|Input score, Arrow by arrow-Scorecards View]]]&lt;br /&gt;
4. &#039;&#039;&#039;Arrow by Arrow (Scorecards View):&#039;&#039;&#039; this function works just as the previous method, but on a different view, that displays a chart, which is similar to a standard printed scorecard.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:12--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CheckDataUpdate.PNG|thumb|Check data updates]]&lt;br /&gt;
5. &#039;&#039;&#039;Check Data Update:&#039;&#039;&#039; This command enables the user to check Data Updates of scores, when the&lt;br /&gt;
competition is managed with different networked computers. The table shows the target numbers and they change colour based on when they last updated their data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Snapshot Configuration====&amp;lt;!--T:13--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:14--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ScorecardValidator.PNG|thumb|Fig 3.7]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:15--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
6. &#039;&#039;&#039;Get Score Barcodes:&#039;&#039;&#039;  This is the area where, when using arrow-by-arrow scoring (e.g. Ianseo Scorekeeper NG / NG Pro), you can validate the scorecards. &lt;br /&gt;
* Open the link&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter the separator character in the box (usually a - ) and click &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Go&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Select the Distance and Session in the drop down boxes, and scan the first scorecard. &lt;br /&gt;
* Once you have scanned the first scorecard, and the values are all correctly matching the paper, scan the same scorecard again to confirm it, the target will vanish from the list of missing cards on the right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:16--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The other options after scanning are:&lt;br /&gt;
* Edit arrows: This will take you to the scorecard screen and allow you to edit the arrow values, or search for the mathematical error&lt;br /&gt;
* Edit totals: This will allow you to change the totals electronically recorded (although the WA rules allow you to alter the electronic arrows to match the paper and then use the electronic total) &lt;br /&gt;
* Remove 10: remove all the first tie break arrow totals (again if under WA rules the box is blank) &lt;br /&gt;
* Remove X/nine: remove all the second tie break arrow totals, as above&lt;br /&gt;
* Remove both: If needed and both boxes are blank.&lt;br /&gt;
* Reset both: Used if you have mistakenly removed the totals of the tie break arrows.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:17--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
7. &#039;&#039;&#039;Print barcode Directives:&#039;&#039;&#039; This allows you to print a sheet to perform the barcode verification actions without needing to use a mouse during the process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Export text file ==== &amp;lt;!--T:18--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This function enables the user to save a text file (.txt) with all&lt;br /&gt;
the scores input in the tournament.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Scorecard Printout====  &amp;lt;!--T:19--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ScorecardPrintout.PNG|thumb|Fig 3.8]]&lt;br /&gt;
This function has been recently optimized for being as adaptable as possible. The&lt;br /&gt;
first part is split into two columns, where the user can manage all the variables needed for customizing&lt;br /&gt;
the Scorecard Printout. Generally, to help users print what they need, the first part of the screen&lt;br /&gt;
includes the REQUIRED options by default for a standard printed scorecard (see Figure 3.8)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:20--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Should the user need to print any other kind of scorecards (e.g. &#039;&#039;Only Data&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;Only Target Number&#039;&#039;, or &#039;&#039;Only Drawings&#039;&#039;), the screen offers a selection list (on the left), where the user can choose the options needed. The user can also modify a scorecard, to omit any text string, or picture included in the tournament using the boxes on the right. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:21--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Once the scorecard type is selected and the final appearance is selected, the user can proceed to the actual printing page. In the lower row, the software shows some editable boxes, that enables the user to choose the Session and Number of Targets to be printed (and if empty targets are included or not). Once the Session is selected the target numbers autocomplete any empty part with all the available targets. Once Session and Targets are selected, the user has to choose the distance to be printed below the distance area (see Figure 3.8). When electronic devices are in use for the automatic score management, the user can print scorecards created by the software with scores input directly by the archers, using the &#039;Print Scorecards filled in with all the value from single arrow&#039; option.&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to print a manual collection slip using the &#039;Intermediate Results collecting paper&#039; option at the very bottom.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:22--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AthleteBadge.PNG|thumb|Fig 3.9]]&lt;br /&gt;
====Athlete Numbers==== &lt;br /&gt;
This option enables the user to print the Athlete Numbers for the event. &lt;br /&gt;
* Open the page and select the badge type to &#039;Qualification Athlete number&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter a name for the design (such as &#039;Athlete Number&#039; and click on &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Create new badge&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To edit the parameters of the badge and move/add and remove elements click on &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Edit Badge&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The printing procedure is similar to the Scorecards one, for the user needs to select the desired Session and Targets.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Personal Rank====  &amp;lt;!--T:23--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PersonalRank.PNG|thumb|Fig 3.11]]&lt;br /&gt;
This option enables the user to view a selected athlete in the referring Division and Class Ranking. As search values, the user can opt for the &#039;&#039;BIB number&#039;&#039;, the &#039;&#039;Family Name&#039;&#039; or the &#039;&#039;Name of the archer&#039;&#039;. After clicking on &#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;, the software will open a page displaying the athlete position in the ranking (the corresponding row will be highlighted in yellow), together with the archers in the two places before and after the selected one (see Figure 3.11).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Class and Division Result Lists ====  &amp;lt;!--T:24--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CDResults.PNG|thumb|Fig 3.12]]&lt;br /&gt;
Clicking on this item, the software will open all the printout layouts for the Qualification Rounds. On this page, the main function is represented by the central icon &#039;&#039;Class &amp;amp; Division Result List&#039;&#039;. Clicking on this command, the user can print the Division and Class Ranking, both in the &#039;&#039;Class &amp;amp; Division Result List - Individual&#039;&#039; and in the &#039;&#039;Class &amp;amp; Division Result List - Team&#039;&#039; lists. Similarly, the user can click on the corresponding command on the right and on the left, but, then, only Individual (left) or Team Rankings (right) will be printed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:25--&amp;gt; Below these options, the software offers another row of icons that enable the user to print the rankings, where Medals Winners are highlighted.  These commands enable the user to choose the rankings to be printed, by Division and Class, or extracting a specific number of places and scores (starting from a cutoff) and so on (see Figure 3.12). It will also allow the user to print results based on subclasses, or various groupings if desired. It is recommended that a user checks the printouts they need in advance, and tests to ensure what they need is actually generated sensibly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Events (Ind/Team) Result Lists Printout ====  &amp;lt;!--T:26--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:QRanking.PNG|thumb|Fig 3.13]]&lt;br /&gt;
This page displays another set of printout layouts. From this page, the user can manage the printing of the tournament Qualification Round, the options are defined by the &#039;Events&#039; that are created for the Tournament defined in the areas below. &lt;br /&gt;
* Individual - [[Competition/Individual Events Setup]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Team - [[ Competition/Team Events Setup ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:27--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These printouts are very important if in the tournament there is a scheduled elimination and final round, on the other hand, they are not necessary for any competition that is not including this kind of matches. The order of the printouts can be defined in the two event setup areas if required. As for the previous printout pages, there is a .pdf file in the central part of the screen, with the complete &#039;&#039;Qualification Round - Complete&#039;&#039; report, on the side columns. The user can find the &#039;&#039;Individual&#039;&#039; and the &#039;&#039;Team&#039;&#039; ones separately too. In the other printout pages, there is a parameter section, with which the user can customize the layouts. Plus, the last default .pdf created by the software is &#039;&#039;Shoot Off/Coin Toss Status Printout&#039;&#039;, that immediately displays if there is any Shot-Off or Coin Toss to be broken, before proceeding to the Elimination and Final Round (see Figure 3.13).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Speaker====  &amp;lt;!--T:28--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This page displays the video printouts for the on-venue speaker. These printouts are mainly&lt;br /&gt;
used in national and international events (see Par. 5.10).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:29--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Qualification]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:30--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Content}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>DellaRossa</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Qualification&amp;diff=3781</id>
		<title>Qualification</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Qualification&amp;diff=3781"/>
		<updated>2026-06-17T13:45:59Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;DellaRossa: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Page in progress}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;languages/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Qualification Rounds == &amp;lt;!--T:1--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The qualification round is a key phase in each tournament, from local ones to the most important competitions&lt;br /&gt;
in Archery. Qualification can be before match-play as normal, or as the only part of a tournament to give final results (e.g. a WA1440). Everything that is related to scoring, scorecards, and printouts is available in the Qualification item of the main menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Scoring and Printouts === &amp;lt;!--T:2--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Qualification&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; item in the main menu of the software includes the following functions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Input Score ==== &amp;lt;!--T:3--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The main feature in the scores management. Selecting this option, the software will open dropdown submenu with some other items, which are related to the different procedures through which users can input scores in i@nseo. Users can enter scores in the system in four separate ways:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:4--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Qualification ScoringTable Simple.png|thumb|Input score, Standard Table]]&lt;br /&gt;
1. &#039;&#039;&#039;Standard Table:&#039;&#039;&#039; after selecting the desired Session, Targets and Distance, clicking on &#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;, a screen with a spreadsheet layout will be displayed: here the user can input scores in a simple and fast way. Ticking the box &#039;&#039;G/X&#039;&#039;, the user can manage Xs and 10s (or 9s in indoor tournaments) that each athlete will shoot. Generally, this is a required activity during competitions; it can be skipped when the user needs to manage only some parts of scorecards and Tie-Break data is not relevant (e.g. for scoring at half distance).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:6--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In this page and in all the others, when you enter a value and press &#039;Tab&#039; the cursor will move to the next cell, which is essential for entering data quickly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:7--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|type=reminder|text=Once scores of all archers have been input, or if a score is changed, the user has to click on &#039;&#039;&#039;Re-Build Teams&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;Re-Calculate Distance Rank&#039;&#039;&#039; and, then &#039;&#039;&#039;Re-Calculate Final Rank&#039;&#039;&#039;. The software will open 3 different pop-ups: always click &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;OK&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The software will, then, generate the Final Rank for the tournament.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:8--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The user could also click on &#039;&#039;&#039;Save results for snapshot feature&#039;&#039;&#039;, to generate data for the real time displaying of ranks, but it is not necessary, unless there are visual electronic devices (TV or similar systems) in use, for they need to manage in real time the athletes ranks or positions in the entire competition. When not using the HHT or Electronic devices the results will be ranked and displayed only considering sessions and distances in the tournament.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:9--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SetIRMStatus.png|thumb|IRM Status Setting]]&lt;br /&gt;
If an athlete decides to retire from the competition, or they have not shown up, the user can set the archers state using the &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Set&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; button on the left side.&lt;br /&gt;
* Did not start: The athlete will still be counted in the tournament statistics (payments, targets list, and so on), but the software won’t let the user input any scores. &lt;br /&gt;
* Did not finish: The athletes line will turn green, scores cannot be updated but the athlete will continue to the Head to Head event (if any) or receive a final rank from the qualification round&lt;br /&gt;
* Did not finish (No Rank): The athlete will not receive a rank from the qualification round and will not continue into the Head to Head event&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:9--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EnterScores ExtendedInput.png|thumb|Input score, Extended Table]]&lt;br /&gt;
2. &#039;&#039;&#039;Extended Table:&#039;&#039;&#039; it works just as the Standard Table. You can select all the distances to edit, or just one, but in addition to scores to be input the other distances totals are also shown. It is useful to check the scores that have been&lt;br /&gt;
previously input, have been entered without mistakes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:10--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ArrowbyArrowInsert.png|thumb|Fig 3.4]]&lt;br /&gt;
3. &#039;&#039;&#039;Arrow by Arrow (Advanced users):&#039;&#039;&#039; this function enables the user to manage the score of each arrow in an end for each athlete (see Figure 3.4). This scoring method should not be used when scoring with electronic devices, if the arrow values need editing in this case then use the scorecards view during the verification process (Link to Scorecards verification)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:11--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ArrowbyArrowSC.png|thumb|Fig 3.5]]&lt;br /&gt;
4. &#039;&#039;&#039;Arrow by Arrow (Scorecards View):&#039;&#039;&#039; this function works just as the previous method, but on a different view, that displays a chart, which is similar to a standard printed scorecard (see Figure 3.5).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:12--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CheckDataUpdate.PNG|thumb|Fig 3.6]]&lt;br /&gt;
5. &#039;&#039;&#039;Check Data Update:&#039;&#039;&#039; This command enables the user to check Data Updates of scores, when the&lt;br /&gt;
competition is managed with different networked computers. The table shows the target numbers and they change colour based on when they last updated their data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Snapshot Configuration====&amp;lt;!--T:13--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:14--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ScorecardValidator.PNG|thumb|Fig 3.7]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:15--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
6. &#039;&#039;&#039;Get Score Barcodes:&#039;&#039;&#039;  This is the area where, when using arrow-by-arrow scoring (e.g. Ianseo Scorekeeper NG / NG Pro), you can validate the scorecards. &lt;br /&gt;
* Open the link&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter the separator character in the box (usually a - ) and click &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Go&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Select the Distance and Session in the drop down boxes, and scan the first scorecard. &lt;br /&gt;
* Once you have scanned the first scorecard, and the values are all correctly matching the paper, scan the same scorecard again to confirm it, the target will vanish from the list of missing cards on the right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:16--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The other options after scanning are:&lt;br /&gt;
* Edit arrows: This will take you to the scorecard screen and allow you to edit the arrow values, or search for the mathematical error&lt;br /&gt;
* Edit totals: This will allow you to change the totals electronically recorded (although the WA rules allow you to alter the electronic arrows to match the paper and then use the electronic total) &lt;br /&gt;
* Remove 10: remove all the first tie break arrow totals (again if under WA rules the box is blank) &lt;br /&gt;
* Remove X/nine: remove all the second tie break arrow totals, as above&lt;br /&gt;
* Remove both: If needed and both boxes are blank.&lt;br /&gt;
* Reset both: Used if you have mistakenly removed the totals of the tie break arrows.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:17--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
7. &#039;&#039;&#039;Print barcode Directives:&#039;&#039;&#039; This allows you to print a sheet to perform the barcode verification actions without needing to use a mouse during the process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Export text file ==== &amp;lt;!--T:18--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This function enables the user to save a text file (.txt) with all&lt;br /&gt;
the scores input in the tournament.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Scorecard Printout====  &amp;lt;!--T:19--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ScorecardPrintout.PNG|thumb|Fig 3.8]]&lt;br /&gt;
This function has been recently optimized for being as adaptable as possible. The&lt;br /&gt;
first part is split into two columns, where the user can manage all the variables needed for customizing&lt;br /&gt;
the Scorecard Printout. Generally, to help users print what they need, the first part of the screen&lt;br /&gt;
includes the REQUIRED options by default for a standard printed scorecard (see Figure 3.8)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:20--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Should the user need to print any other kind of scorecards (e.g. &#039;&#039;Only Data&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;Only Target Number&#039;&#039;, or &#039;&#039;Only Drawings&#039;&#039;), the screen offers a selection list (on the left), where the user can choose the options needed. The user can also modify a scorecard, to omit any text string, or picture included in the tournament using the boxes on the right. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:21--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Once the scorecard type is selected and the final appearance is selected, the user can proceed to the actual printing page. In the lower row, the software shows some editable boxes, that enables the user to choose the Session and Number of Targets to be printed (and if empty targets are included or not). Once the Session is selected the target numbers autocomplete any empty part with all the available targets. Once Session and Targets are selected, the user has to choose the distance to be printed below the distance area (see Figure 3.8). When electronic devices are in use for the automatic score management, the user can print scorecards created by the software with scores input directly by the archers, using the &#039;Print Scorecards filled in with all the value from single arrow&#039; option.&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to print a manual collection slip using the &#039;Intermediate Results collecting paper&#039; option at the very bottom.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:22--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AthleteBadge.PNG|thumb|Fig 3.9]]&lt;br /&gt;
====Athlete Numbers==== &lt;br /&gt;
This option enables the user to print the Athlete Numbers for the event. &lt;br /&gt;
* Open the page and select the badge type to &#039;Qualification Athlete number&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter a name for the design (such as &#039;Athlete Number&#039; and click on &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Create new badge&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To edit the parameters of the badge and move/add and remove elements click on &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Edit Badge&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The printing procedure is similar to the Scorecards one, for the user needs to select the desired Session and Targets.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Personal Rank====  &amp;lt;!--T:23--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PersonalRank.PNG|thumb|Fig 3.11]]&lt;br /&gt;
This option enables the user to view a selected athlete in the referring Division and Class Ranking. As search values, the user can opt for the &#039;&#039;BIB number&#039;&#039;, the &#039;&#039;Family Name&#039;&#039; or the &#039;&#039;Name of the archer&#039;&#039;. After clicking on &#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;, the software will open a page displaying the athlete position in the ranking (the corresponding row will be highlighted in yellow), together with the archers in the two places before and after the selected one (see Figure 3.11).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Class and Division Result Lists ====  &amp;lt;!--T:24--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CDResults.PNG|thumb|Fig 3.12]]&lt;br /&gt;
Clicking on this item, the software will open all the printout layouts for the Qualification Rounds. On this page, the main function is represented by the central icon &#039;&#039;Class &amp;amp; Division Result List&#039;&#039;. Clicking on this command, the user can print the Division and Class Ranking, both in the &#039;&#039;Class &amp;amp; Division Result List - Individual&#039;&#039; and in the &#039;&#039;Class &amp;amp; Division Result List - Team&#039;&#039; lists. Similarly, the user can click on the corresponding command on the right and on the left, but, then, only Individual (left) or Team Rankings (right) will be printed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:25--&amp;gt; Below these options, the software offers another row of icons that enable the user to print the rankings, where Medals Winners are highlighted.  These commands enable the user to choose the rankings to be printed, by Division and Class, or extracting a specific number of places and scores (starting from a cutoff) and so on (see Figure 3.12). It will also allow the user to print results based on subclasses, or various groupings if desired. It is recommended that a user checks the printouts they need in advance, and tests to ensure what they need is actually generated sensibly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Events (Ind/Team) Result Lists Printout ====  &amp;lt;!--T:26--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:QRanking.PNG|thumb|Fig 3.13]]&lt;br /&gt;
This page displays another set of printout layouts. From this page, the user can manage the printing of the tournament Qualification Round, the options are defined by the &#039;Events&#039; that are created for the Tournament defined in the areas below. &lt;br /&gt;
* Individual - [[Competition/Individual Events Setup]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Team - [[ Competition/Team Events Setup ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:27--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These printouts are very important if in the tournament there is a scheduled elimination and final round, on the other hand, they are not necessary for any competition that is not including this kind of matches. The order of the printouts can be defined in the two event setup areas if required. As for the previous printout pages, there is a .pdf file in the central part of the screen, with the complete &#039;&#039;Qualification Round - Complete&#039;&#039; report, on the side columns. The user can find the &#039;&#039;Individual&#039;&#039; and the &#039;&#039;Team&#039;&#039; ones separately too. In the other printout pages, there is a parameter section, with which the user can customize the layouts. Plus, the last default .pdf created by the software is &#039;&#039;Shoot Off/Coin Toss Status Printout&#039;&#039;, that immediately displays if there is any Shot-Off or Coin Toss to be broken, before proceeding to the Elimination and Final Round (see Figure 3.13).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Speaker====  &amp;lt;!--T:28--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This page displays the video printouts for the on-venue speaker. These printouts are mainly&lt;br /&gt;
used in national and international events (see Par. 5.10).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:29--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Qualification]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:30--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Content}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>DellaRossa</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Qualification&amp;diff=3780</id>
		<title>Qualification</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Qualification&amp;diff=3780"/>
		<updated>2026-06-17T13:44:52Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;DellaRossa: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Proofreading}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;languages/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Qualification Rounds == &amp;lt;!--T:1--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The qualification round is a key phase in each tournament, from local ones to the most important competitions&lt;br /&gt;
in Archery. Qualification can be before match-play as normal, or as the only part of a tournament to give final results (e.g. a WA1440). Everything that is related to scoring, scorecards, and printouts is available in the Qualification item of the main menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Scoring and Printouts === &amp;lt;!--T:2--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Qualification&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; item in the main menu of the software includes the following functions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Input Score ==== &amp;lt;!--T:3--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The main feature in the scores management. Selecting this option, the software will open dropdown submenu with some other items, which are related to the different procedures through which users can input scores in i@nseo. Users can enter scores in the system in four separate ways:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:4--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Qualification ScoringTable Simple.png|thumb|Input score, Standard Table]]&lt;br /&gt;
1. &#039;&#039;&#039;Standard Table:&#039;&#039;&#039; after selecting the desired Session, Targets and Distance, clicking on &#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;, a screen with a spreadsheet layout will be displayed: here the user can input scores in a simple and fast way. Ticking the box &#039;&#039;G/X&#039;&#039;, the user can manage Xs and 10s (or 9s in indoor tournaments) that each athlete will shoot. Generally, this is a required activity during competitions; it can be skipped when the user needs to manage only some parts of scorecards and Tie-Break data is not relevant (e.g. for scoring at half distance).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:6--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In this page and in all the others, when you enter a value and press &#039;Tab&#039; the cursor will move to the next cell, which is essential for entering data quickly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:7--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|type=reminder|text=Once scores of all archers have been input, or if a score is changed, the user has to click on &#039;&#039;&#039;Re-Build Teams&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;Re-Calculate Distance Rank&#039;&#039;&#039; and, then &#039;&#039;&#039;Re-Calculate Final Rank&#039;&#039;&#039;. The software will open 3 different pop-ups: always click &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;OK&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The software will, then, generate the Final Rank for the tournament.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:8--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The user could also click on &#039;&#039;&#039;Save results for snapshot feature&#039;&#039;&#039;, to generate data for the real time displaying of ranks, but it is not necessary, unless there are visual electronic devices (TV or similar systems) in use, for they need to manage in real time the athletes ranks or positions in the entire competition. When not using the HHT or Electronic devices the results will be ranked and displayed only considering sessions and distances in the tournament.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:9--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SetIRMStatus.png|thumb|IRM Status Setting]]&lt;br /&gt;
If an athlete decides to retire from the competition, or they have not shown up, the user can set the archers state using the &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Set&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; button on the left side.&lt;br /&gt;
* Did not start: The athlete will still be counted in the tournament statistics (payments, targets list, and so on), but the software won’t let the user input any scores. &lt;br /&gt;
* Did not finish: The athletes line will turn green, scores cannot be updated but the athlete will continue to the Head to Head event (if any) or receive a final rank from the qualification round&lt;br /&gt;
* Did not finish (No Rank): The athlete will not receive a rank from the qualification round and will not continue into the Head to Head event&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:9--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EnterScores ExtendedInput.png|thumb|Input score, Extended Table]]&lt;br /&gt;
2. &#039;&#039;&#039;Extended Table:&#039;&#039;&#039; it works just as the Standard Table. You can select all the distances to edit, or just one, but in addition to scores to be input the other distances totals are also shown. It is useful to check the scores that have been&lt;br /&gt;
previously input, have been entered without mistakes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:10--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ArrowbyArrowInsert.png|thumb|Fig 3.4]]&lt;br /&gt;
3. &#039;&#039;&#039;Arrow by Arrow (Advanced users):&#039;&#039;&#039; this function enables the user to manage the score of each arrow in an end for each athlete (see Figure 3.4). This scoring method should not be used when scoring with electronic devices, if the arrow values need editing in this case then use the scorecards view during the verification process (Link to Scorecards verification)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:11--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ArrowbyArrowSC.png|thumb|Fig 3.5]]&lt;br /&gt;
4. &#039;&#039;&#039;Arrow by Arrow (Scorecards View):&#039;&#039;&#039; this function works just as the previous method, but on a different view, that displays a chart, which is similar to a standard printed scorecard (see Figure 3.5).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:12--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CheckDataUpdate.PNG|thumb|Fig 3.6]]&lt;br /&gt;
5. &#039;&#039;&#039;Check Data Update:&#039;&#039;&#039; This command enables the user to check Data Updates of scores, when the&lt;br /&gt;
competition is managed with different networked computers. The table shows the target numbers and they change colour based on when they last updated their data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Snapshot Configuration====&amp;lt;!--T:13--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:14--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ScorecardValidator.PNG|thumb|Fig 3.7]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:15--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
6. &#039;&#039;&#039;Get Score Barcodes:&#039;&#039;&#039;  This is the area where, when using arrow-by-arrow scoring (e.g. Ianseo Scorekeeper NG / NG Pro), you can validate the scorecards. &lt;br /&gt;
* Open the link&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter the separator character in the box (usually a - ) and click &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Go&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Select the Distance and Session in the drop down boxes, and scan the first scorecard. &lt;br /&gt;
* Once you have scanned the first scorecard, and the values are all correctly matching the paper, scan the same scorecard again to confirm it, the target will vanish from the list of missing cards on the right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:16--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The other options after scanning are:&lt;br /&gt;
* Edit arrows: This will take you to the scorecard screen and allow you to edit the arrow values, or search for the mathematical error&lt;br /&gt;
* Edit totals: This will allow you to change the totals electronically recorded (although the WA rules allow you to alter the electronic arrows to match the paper and then use the electronic total) &lt;br /&gt;
* Remove 10: remove all the first tie break arrow totals (again if under WA rules the box is blank) &lt;br /&gt;
* Remove X/nine: remove all the second tie break arrow totals, as above&lt;br /&gt;
* Remove both: If needed and both boxes are blank.&lt;br /&gt;
* Reset both: Used if you have mistakenly removed the totals of the tie break arrows.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:17--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
7. &#039;&#039;&#039;Print barcode Directives:&#039;&#039;&#039; This allows you to print a sheet to perform the barcode verification actions without needing to use a mouse during the process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Export text file ==== &amp;lt;!--T:18--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This function enables the user to save a text file (.txt) with all&lt;br /&gt;
the scores input in the tournament.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Scorecard Printout====  &amp;lt;!--T:19--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ScorecardPrintout.PNG|thumb|Fig 3.8]]&lt;br /&gt;
This function has been recently optimized for being as adaptable as possible. The&lt;br /&gt;
first part is split into two columns, where the user can manage all the variables needed for customizing&lt;br /&gt;
the Scorecard Printout. Generally, to help users print what they need, the first part of the screen&lt;br /&gt;
includes the REQUIRED options by default for a standard printed scorecard (see Figure 3.8)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:20--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Should the user need to print any other kind of scorecards (e.g. &#039;&#039;Only Data&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;Only Target Number&#039;&#039;, or &#039;&#039;Only Drawings&#039;&#039;), the screen offers a selection list (on the left), where the user can choose the options needed. The user can also modify a scorecard, to omit any text string, or picture included in the tournament using the boxes on the right. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:21--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Once the scorecard type is selected and the final appearance is selected, the user can proceed to the actual printing page. In the lower row, the software shows some editable boxes, that enables the user to choose the Session and Number of Targets to be printed (and if empty targets are included or not). Once the Session is selected the target numbers autocomplete any empty part with all the available targets. Once Session and Targets are selected, the user has to choose the distance to be printed below the distance area (see Figure 3.8). When electronic devices are in use for the automatic score management, the user can print scorecards created by the software with scores input directly by the archers, using the &#039;Print Scorecards filled in with all the value from single arrow&#039; option.&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to print a manual collection slip using the &#039;Intermediate Results collecting paper&#039; option at the very bottom.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:22--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AthleteBadge.PNG|thumb|Fig 3.9]]&lt;br /&gt;
====Athlete Numbers==== &lt;br /&gt;
This option enables the user to print the Athlete Numbers for the event. &lt;br /&gt;
* Open the page and select the badge type to &#039;Qualification Athlete number&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter a name for the design (such as &#039;Athlete Number&#039; and click on &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Create new badge&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To edit the parameters of the badge and move/add and remove elements click on &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Edit Badge&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The printing procedure is similar to the Scorecards one, for the user needs to select the desired Session and Targets.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Personal Rank====  &amp;lt;!--T:23--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PersonalRank.PNG|thumb|Fig 3.11]]&lt;br /&gt;
This option enables the user to view a selected athlete in the referring Division and Class Ranking. As search values, the user can opt for the &#039;&#039;BIB number&#039;&#039;, the &#039;&#039;Family Name&#039;&#039; or the &#039;&#039;Name of the archer&#039;&#039;. After clicking on &#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;, the software will open a page displaying the athlete position in the ranking (the corresponding row will be highlighted in yellow), together with the archers in the two places before and after the selected one (see Figure 3.11).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Class and Division Result Lists ====  &amp;lt;!--T:24--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CDResults.PNG|thumb|Fig 3.12]]&lt;br /&gt;
Clicking on this item, the software will open all the printout layouts for the Qualification Rounds. On this page, the main function is represented by the central icon &#039;&#039;Class &amp;amp; Division Result List&#039;&#039;. Clicking on this command, the user can print the Division and Class Ranking, both in the &#039;&#039;Class &amp;amp; Division Result List - Individual&#039;&#039; and in the &#039;&#039;Class &amp;amp; Division Result List - Team&#039;&#039; lists. Similarly, the user can click on the corresponding command on the right and on the left, but, then, only Individual (left) or Team Rankings (right) will be printed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:25--&amp;gt; Below these options, the software offers another row of icons that enable the user to print the rankings, where Medals Winners are highlighted.  These commands enable the user to choose the rankings to be printed, by Division and Class, or extracting a specific number of places and scores (starting from a cutoff) and so on (see Figure 3.12). It will also allow the user to print results based on subclasses, or various groupings if desired. It is recommended that a user checks the printouts they need in advance, and tests to ensure what they need is actually generated sensibly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Events (Ind/Team) Result Lists Printout ====  &amp;lt;!--T:26--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:QRanking.PNG|thumb|Fig 3.13]]&lt;br /&gt;
This page displays another set of printout layouts. From this page, the user can manage the printing of the tournament Qualification Round, the options are defined by the &#039;Events&#039; that are created for the Tournament defined in the areas below. &lt;br /&gt;
* Individual - [[Competition/Individual Events Setup]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Team - [[ Competition/Team Events Setup ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:27--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These printouts are very important if in the tournament there is a scheduled elimination and final round, on the other hand, they are not necessary for any competition that is not including this kind of matches. The order of the printouts can be defined in the two event setup areas if required. As for the previous printout pages, there is a .pdf file in the central part of the screen, with the complete &#039;&#039;Qualification Round - Complete&#039;&#039; report, on the side columns. The user can find the &#039;&#039;Individual&#039;&#039; and the &#039;&#039;Team&#039;&#039; ones separately too. In the other printout pages, there is a parameter section, with which the user can customize the layouts. Plus, the last default .pdf created by the software is &#039;&#039;Shoot Off/Coin Toss Status Printout&#039;&#039;, that immediately displays if there is any Shot-Off or Coin Toss to be broken, before proceeding to the Elimination and Final Round (see Figure 3.13).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Speaker====  &amp;lt;!--T:28--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This page displays the video printouts for the on-venue speaker. These printouts are mainly&lt;br /&gt;
used in national and international events (see Par. 5.10).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:29--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Qualification]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:30--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Content}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>DellaRossa</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Qualification&amp;diff=3779</id>
		<title>Qualification</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Qualification&amp;diff=3779"/>
		<updated>2026-06-17T13:18:41Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;DellaRossa: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Proofreading}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;languages/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== Qualification Rounds == &amp;lt;!--T:1--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The qualification round is a key phase in each tournament, from local ones to the most important competitions&lt;br /&gt;
in Archery. Qualification can be before match-play as normal, or as the only part of a tournament to give final results (e.g. a WA1440). Everything that is related to scoring, scorecards, and printouts is available in the Qualification item of the main menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Scoring and Printouts === &amp;lt;!--T:2--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Qualification&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; item in the main menu of the software includes the following functions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Input Score ==== &amp;lt;!--T:3--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The main feature in the scores management. Selecting this option, the software will open dropdown submenu with some other items, which are related to the different procedures through which users can input scores in i@nseo. Users can enter scores in the system in four separate ways:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:4--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Qualification ScoringTable Simple.png|thumb|Input score, Standard Table]]&lt;br /&gt;
1. &#039;&#039;&#039;Standard Table:&#039;&#039;&#039; after selecting the desired Session, Targets and Distance, clicking on &#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;, a screen with a spreadsheet layout will be displayed: here the user can input scores in a simple and fast way. Ticking the box &#039;&#039;G/X&#039;&#039;, the user can manage Xs and 10s (or 9s in indoor tournaments) that each athlete will shoot. Generally, this is a required activity during competitions; it can be skipped when the user needs to manage only some parts of scorecards and Tie-Break data is not relevant (e.g. for scoring at half distance).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:6--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In this page and in all the others, when you enter a value and press &#039;Tab&#039; the cursor will move to the next cell, which is essential for entering data quickly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:7--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|type=reminder|text=Once scores of all archers have been input, or if a score is changed, the user has to click on &#039;&#039;&#039;Re-Build Teams&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;Re-Calculate Distance Rank&#039;&#039;&#039; and, then &#039;&#039;&#039;Re-Calculate Final Rank&#039;&#039;&#039;. The software will open 3 different pop-ups: always click &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;OK&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The software will, then, generate the Final Rank for the tournament.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:8--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The user could also click on &#039;&#039;&#039;Save results for snapshot feature&#039;&#039;&#039;, to generate data for the real time displaying of ranks, but it is not necessary, unless there are visual electronic devices (TV or similar systems) in use, for they need to manage in real time the athletes ranks or positions in the entire competition. When not using the HHT or Electronic devices the results will be ranked and displayed only considering sessions and distances in the tournament.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:9--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SetIRMStatus.png|thumb|Fig 3.2]]&lt;br /&gt;
If an athlete decides to retire from the competition, or they have not shown up, the user can set the archers state using the &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Set&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; button on the left side. (see Figure 3.2).&lt;br /&gt;
* Did not start: The athlete will still be counted in the tournament statistics (payments, targets list, and so on), but the software won’t let the user input any scores. &lt;br /&gt;
* Did not finish: The athletes line will turn green, scores cannot be updated but the athlete will continue to the Head to Head event (if any) or receive a final rank from the qualification round&lt;br /&gt;
* Did not finish (No Rank): The athlete will not receive a rank from the qualification round and will not continue into the Head to Head event&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:9--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EnterScores ExtendedInput.png|thumb|Fig 3.3]]&lt;br /&gt;
2. &#039;&#039;&#039;Extended Table:&#039;&#039;&#039; it works just as the Standard Table. You can select all the distances to edit, or just one, but in addition to scores to be input the other distances totals are also shown (see Figure 3.3). It is useful to check the scores that have been&lt;br /&gt;
previously input, have been entered without mistakes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:10--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ArrowbyArrowInsert.png|thumb|Fig 3.4]]&lt;br /&gt;
3. &#039;&#039;&#039;Arrow by Arrow (Advanced users):&#039;&#039;&#039; this function enables the user to manage the score of each arrow in an end for each athlete (see Figure 3.4). This scoring method should not be used when scoring with electronic devices, if the arrow values need editing in this case then use the scorecards view during the verification process (Link to Scorecards verification)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:11--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ArrowbyArrowSC.png|thumb|Fig 3.5]]&lt;br /&gt;
4. &#039;&#039;&#039;Arrow by Arrow (Scorecards View):&#039;&#039;&#039; this function works just as the previous method, but on a different view, that displays a chart, which is similar to a standard printed scorecard (see Figure 3.5).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:12--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CheckDataUpdate.PNG|thumb|Fig 3.6]]&lt;br /&gt;
5. &#039;&#039;&#039;Check Data Update:&#039;&#039;&#039; This command enables the user to check Data Updates of scores, when the&lt;br /&gt;
competition is managed with different networked computers. The table shows the target numbers and they change colour based on when they last updated their data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Snapshot Configuration====&amp;lt;!--T:13--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:14--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ScorecardValidator.PNG|thumb|Fig 3.7]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:15--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
6. &#039;&#039;&#039;Get Score Barcodes:&#039;&#039;&#039;  This is the area where, when using arrow-by-arrow scoring (e.g. Ianseo Scorekeeper NG / NG Pro), you can validate the scorecards. &lt;br /&gt;
* Open the link&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter the separator character in the box (usually a - ) and click &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Go&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Select the Distance and Session in the drop down boxes, and scan the first scorecard. &lt;br /&gt;
* Once you have scanned the first scorecard, and the values are all correctly matching the paper, scan the same scorecard again to confirm it, the target will vanish from the list of missing cards on the right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:16--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The other options after scanning are:&lt;br /&gt;
* Edit arrows: This will take you to the scorecard screen and allow you to edit the arrow values, or search for the mathematical error&lt;br /&gt;
* Edit totals: This will allow you to change the totals electronically recorded (although the WA rules allow you to alter the electronic arrows to match the paper and then use the electronic total) &lt;br /&gt;
* Remove 10: remove all the first tie break arrow totals (again if under WA rules the box is blank) &lt;br /&gt;
* Remove X/nine: remove all the second tie break arrow totals, as above&lt;br /&gt;
* Remove both: If needed and both boxes are blank.&lt;br /&gt;
* Reset both: Used if you have mistakenly removed the totals of the tie break arrows.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:17--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
7. &#039;&#039;&#039;Print barcode Directives:&#039;&#039;&#039; This allows you to print a sheet to perform the barcode verification actions without needing to use a mouse during the process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Export text file ==== &amp;lt;!--T:18--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This function enables the user to save a text file (.txt) with all&lt;br /&gt;
the scores input in the tournament.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Scorecard Printout====  &amp;lt;!--T:19--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ScorecardPrintout.PNG|thumb|Fig 3.8]]&lt;br /&gt;
This function has been recently optimized for being as adaptable as possible. The&lt;br /&gt;
first part is split into two columns, where the user can manage all the variables needed for customizing&lt;br /&gt;
the Scorecard Printout. Generally, to help users print what they need, the first part of the screen&lt;br /&gt;
includes the REQUIRED options by default for a standard printed scorecard (see Figure 3.8)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:20--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Should the user need to print any other kind of scorecards (e.g. &#039;&#039;Only Data&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;Only Target Number&#039;&#039;, or &#039;&#039;Only Drawings&#039;&#039;), the screen offers a selection list (on the left), where the user can choose the options needed. The user can also modify a scorecard, to omit any text string, or picture included in the tournament using the boxes on the right. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:21--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Once the scorecard type is selected and the final appearance is selected, the user can proceed to the actual printing page. In the lower row, the software shows some editable boxes, that enables the user to choose the Session and Number of Targets to be printed (and if empty targets are included or not). Once the Session is selected the target numbers autocomplete any empty part with all the available targets. Once Session and Targets are selected, the user has to choose the distance to be printed below the distance area (see Figure 3.8). When electronic devices are in use for the automatic score management, the user can print scorecards created by the software with scores input directly by the archers, using the &#039;Print Scorecards filled in with all the value from single arrow&#039; option.&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to print a manual collection slip using the &#039;Intermediate Results collecting paper&#039; option at the very bottom.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:22--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AthleteBadge.PNG|thumb|Fig 3.9]]&lt;br /&gt;
====Athlete Numbers==== &lt;br /&gt;
This option enables the user to print the Athlete Numbers for the event. &lt;br /&gt;
* Open the page and select the badge type to &#039;Qualification Athlete number&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter a name for the design (such as &#039;Athlete Number&#039; and click on &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Create new badge&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To edit the parameters of the badge and move/add and remove elements click on &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Edit Badge&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The printing procedure is similar to the Scorecards one, for the user needs to select the desired Session and Targets.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Personal Rank====  &amp;lt;!--T:23--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PersonalRank.PNG|thumb|Fig 3.11]]&lt;br /&gt;
This option enables the user to view a selected athlete in the referring Division and Class Ranking. As search values, the user can opt for the &#039;&#039;BIB number&#039;&#039;, the &#039;&#039;Family Name&#039;&#039; or the &#039;&#039;Name of the archer&#039;&#039;. After clicking on &#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;, the software will open a page displaying the athlete position in the ranking (the corresponding row will be highlighted in yellow), together with the archers in the two places before and after the selected one (see Figure 3.11).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Class and Division Result Lists ====  &amp;lt;!--T:24--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CDResults.PNG|thumb|Fig 3.12]]&lt;br /&gt;
Clicking on this item, the software will open all the printout layouts for the Qualification Rounds. On this page, the main function is represented by the central icon &#039;&#039;Class &amp;amp; Division Result List&#039;&#039;. Clicking on this command, the user can print the Division and Class Ranking, both in the &#039;&#039;Class &amp;amp; Division Result List - Individual&#039;&#039; and in the &#039;&#039;Class &amp;amp; Division Result List - Team&#039;&#039; lists. Similarly, the user can click on the corresponding command on the right and on the left, but, then, only Individual (left) or Team Rankings (right) will be printed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:25--&amp;gt; Below these options, the software offers another row of icons that enable the user to print the rankings, where Medals Winners are highlighted.  These commands enable the user to choose the rankings to be printed, by Division and Class, or extracting a specific number of places and scores (starting from a cutoff) and so on (see Figure 3.12). It will also allow the user to print results based on subclasses, or various groupings if desired. It is recommended that a user checks the printouts they need in advance, and tests to ensure what they need is actually generated sensibly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Events (Ind/Team) Result Lists Printout ====  &amp;lt;!--T:26--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:QRanking.PNG|thumb|Fig 3.13]]&lt;br /&gt;
This page displays another set of printout layouts. From this page, the user can manage the printing of the tournament Qualification Round, the options are defined by the &#039;Events&#039; that are created for the Tournament defined in the areas below. &lt;br /&gt;
* Individual - [[Competition/Individual Events Setup]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Team - [[ Competition/Team Events Setup ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:27--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These printouts are very important if in the tournament there is a scheduled elimination and final round, on the other hand, they are not necessary for any competition that is not including this kind of matches. The order of the printouts can be defined in the two event setup areas if required. As for the previous printout pages, there is a .pdf file in the central part of the screen, with the complete &#039;&#039;Qualification Round - Complete&#039;&#039; report, on the side columns. The user can find the &#039;&#039;Individual&#039;&#039; and the &#039;&#039;Team&#039;&#039; ones separately too. In the other printout pages, there is a parameter section, with which the user can customize the layouts. Plus, the last default .pdf created by the software is &#039;&#039;Shoot Off/Coin Toss Status Printout&#039;&#039;, that immediately displays if there is any Shot-Off or Coin Toss to be broken, before proceeding to the Elimination and Final Round (see Figure 3.13).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Speaker====  &amp;lt;!--T:28--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This page displays the video printouts for the on-venue speaker. These printouts are mainly&lt;br /&gt;
used in national and international events (see Par. 5.10).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:29--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Qualification]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:30--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Content}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>DellaRossa</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Qualification&amp;diff=3778</id>
		<title>Qualification</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Qualification&amp;diff=3778"/>
		<updated>2026-06-17T13:06:40Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;DellaRossa: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Proofreading}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;languages/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== Qualification Rounds == &amp;lt;!--T:1--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The qualification round is a key phase in each tournament, from local ones to the most important competitions&lt;br /&gt;
in Archery. Qualification can be before match-play as normal, or as the only part of a tournament to give final results (e.g. a WA1440). Everything that is related to scoring, scorecards, and printouts is available in the Qualification item of the main menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Scoring and Printouts === &amp;lt;!--T:2--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Qualification&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; item in the main menu of the software includes the following functions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Input Score ==== &amp;lt;!--T:3--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The main feature in the scores management. Selecting this option, the software will open dropdown submenu with some other items, which are related to the different procedures through which users can input scores in i@nseo. Users can enter scores in the system in four separate ways:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:4--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Qualification ScoringTable Simple.png|thumb|Fig 3.1]]&lt;br /&gt;
1. &#039;&#039;&#039;Standard Table:&#039;&#039;&#039; after selecting the desired Session, Targets and Distance, clicking on &#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;, a screen with a spreadsheet layout will be displayed: here the user can input scores in a simple and fast way (see Figure 3.1). Ticking the box &#039;&#039;G/X&#039;&#039;, the user can manage Xs and 10s (or 9s in indoor tournaments) that each athlete will shoot. Generally, this is a required activity during competitions; it can be skipped when the user needs to manage only some parts of scorecards and Tie-Break data is not relevant (e.g. for scoring at half distance).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:6--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In this page and in all the others, when you enter a value and press &#039;Tab&#039; the cursor will move to the next cell, which is essential for entering data quickly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:7--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|type=reminder|text=Once scores of all archers have been input, or if a score is changed, the user has to click on [Re-Build Teams], [Re-Calculate Distance Rank] and, then [Re-Calculate Final Rank]. The software will open 3 different pop-ups: always click [OK]. The software will, then, generate the Final Rank for the tournament.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:8--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The user could also click on [Save results for snapshot feature], to generate data for the real time displaying of ranks, but it is not necessary, unless there are visual electronic devices (TV or similar systems) in use, for they need to manage in real time the athletes ranks or positions in the entire competition. When not using the HHT or Electronic devices the results will be ranked and displayed only considering sessions and distances in the tournament.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:9--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SetIRMStatus.png|thumb|Fig 3.2]]&lt;br /&gt;
If an athlete decides to retire from the competition, or they have not shown up, the user can set the archers state using the &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Set&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; button on the left side. (see Figure 3.2).&lt;br /&gt;
* Did not start: The athlete will still be counted in the tournament statistics (payments, targets list, and so on), but the software won’t let the user input any scores. &lt;br /&gt;
* Did not finish: The athletes line will turn green, scores cannot be updated but the athlete will continue to the Head to Head event (if any) or receive a final rank from the qualification round&lt;br /&gt;
* Did not finish (No Rank): The athlete will not receive a rank from the qualification round and will not continue into the Head to Head event&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:9--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EnterScores ExtendedInput.png|thumb|Fig 3.3]]&lt;br /&gt;
2. &#039;&#039;&#039;Extended Table:&#039;&#039;&#039; it works just as the Standard Table. You can select all the distances to edit, or just one, but in addition to scores to be input the other distances totals are also shown (see Figure 3.3). It is useful to check the scores that have been&lt;br /&gt;
previously input, have been entered without mistakes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:10--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ArrowbyArrowInsert.png|thumb|Fig 3.4]]&lt;br /&gt;
3. &#039;&#039;&#039;Arrow by Arrow (Advanced users):&#039;&#039;&#039; this function enables the user to manage the score of each arrow in an end for each athlete (see Figure 3.4). This scoring method should not be used when scoring with electronic devices, if the arrow values need editing in this case then use the scorecards view during the verification process (Link to Scorecards verification)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:11--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ArrowbyArrowSC.png|thumb|Fig 3.5]]&lt;br /&gt;
4. &#039;&#039;&#039;Arrow by Arrow (Scorecards View):&#039;&#039;&#039; this function works just as the previous method, but on a different view, that displays a chart, which is similar to a standard printed scorecard (see Figure 3.5).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:12--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CheckDataUpdate.PNG|thumb|Fig 3.6]]&lt;br /&gt;
5. &#039;&#039;&#039;Check Data Update:&#039;&#039;&#039; This command enables the user to check Data Updates of scores, when the&lt;br /&gt;
competition is managed with different networked computers. The table shows the target numbers and they change colour based on when they last updated their data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Snapshot Configuration====&amp;lt;!--T:13--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:14--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ScorecardValidator.PNG|thumb|Fig 3.7]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:15--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
6. &#039;&#039;&#039;Get Score Barcodes:&#039;&#039;&#039;  This is the area where, when using arrow-by-arrow scoring (e.g. Ianseo Scorekeeper NG / NG Pro), you can validate the scorecards. &lt;br /&gt;
* Open the link&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter the separator character in the box (usually a - ) and click &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Go&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Select the Distance and Session in the drop down boxes, and scan the first scorecard. &lt;br /&gt;
* Once you have scanned the first scorecard, and the values are all correctly matching the paper, scan the same scorecard again to confirm it, the target will vanish from the list of missing cards on the right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:16--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The other options after scanning are:&lt;br /&gt;
* Edit arrows: This will take you to the scorecard screen and allow you to edit the arrow values, or search for the mathematical error&lt;br /&gt;
* Edit totals: This will allow you to change the totals electronically recorded (although the WA rules allow you to alter the electronic arrows to match the paper and then use the electronic total) &lt;br /&gt;
* Remove 10: remove all the first tie break arrow totals (again if under WA rules the box is blank) &lt;br /&gt;
* Remove X/nine: remove all the second tie break arrow totals, as above&lt;br /&gt;
* Remove both: If needed and both boxes are blank.&lt;br /&gt;
* Reset both: Used if you have mistakenly removed the totals of the tie break arrows.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:17--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
7. &#039;&#039;&#039;Print barcode Directives:&#039;&#039;&#039; This allows you to print a sheet to perform the barcode verification actions without needing to use a mouse during the process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Export text file ==== &amp;lt;!--T:18--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This function enables the user to save a text file (.txt) with all&lt;br /&gt;
the scores input in the tournament.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Scorecard Printout====  &amp;lt;!--T:19--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ScorecardPrintout.PNG|thumb|Fig 3.8]]&lt;br /&gt;
This function has been recently optimized for being as adaptable as possible. The&lt;br /&gt;
first part is split into two columns, where the user can manage all the variables needed for customizing&lt;br /&gt;
the Scorecard Printout. Generally, to help users print what they need, the first part of the screen&lt;br /&gt;
includes the REQUIRED options by default for a standard printed scorecard (see Figure 3.8)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:20--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Should the user need to print any other kind of scorecards (e.g. &#039;&#039;Only Data&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;Only Target Number&#039;&#039;, or &#039;&#039;Only Drawings&#039;&#039;), the screen offers a selection list (on the left), where the user can choose the options needed. The user can also modify a scorecard, to omit any text string, or picture included in the tournament using the boxes on the right. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:21--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Once the scorecard type is selected and the final appearance is selected, the user can proceed to the actual printing page. In the lower row, the software shows some editable boxes, that enables the user to choose the Session and Number of Targets to be printed (and if empty targets are included or not). Once the Session is selected the target numbers autocomplete any empty part with all the available targets. Once Session and Targets are selected, the user has to choose the distance to be printed below the distance area (see Figure 3.8). When electronic devices are in use for the automatic score management, the user can print scorecards created by the software with scores input directly by the archers, using the &#039;Print Scorecards filled in with all the value from single arrow&#039; option.&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to print a manual collection slip using the &#039;Intermediate Results collecting paper&#039; option at the very bottom.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:22--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AthleteBadge.PNG|thumb|Fig 3.9]]&lt;br /&gt;
====Athlete Numbers==== &lt;br /&gt;
This option enables the user to print the Athlete Numbers for the event. &lt;br /&gt;
* Open the page and select the badge type to &#039;Qualification Athlete number&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter a name for the design (such as &#039;Athlete Number&#039; and click on &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Create new badge&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To edit the parameters of the badge and move/add and remove elements click on &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Edit Badge&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The printing procedure is similar to the Scorecards one, for the user needs to select the desired Session and Targets.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Personal Rank====  &amp;lt;!--T:23--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PersonalRank.PNG|thumb|Fig 3.11]]&lt;br /&gt;
This option enables the user to view a selected athlete in the referring Division and Class Ranking. As search values, the user can opt for the &#039;&#039;BIB number&#039;&#039;, the &#039;&#039;Family Name&#039;&#039; or the &#039;&#039;Name of the archer&#039;&#039;. After clicking on &#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;, the software will open a page displaying the athlete position in the ranking (the corresponding row will be highlighted in yellow), together with the archers in the two places before and after the selected one (see Figure 3.11).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Class and Division Result Lists ====  &amp;lt;!--T:24--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CDResults.PNG|thumb|Fig 3.12]]&lt;br /&gt;
Clicking on this item, the software will open all the printout layouts for the Qualification Rounds. On this page, the main function is represented by the central icon &#039;&#039;Class &amp;amp; Division Result List&#039;&#039;. Clicking on this command, the user can print the Division and Class Ranking, both in the &#039;&#039;Class &amp;amp; Division Result List - Individual&#039;&#039; and in the &#039;&#039;Class &amp;amp; Division Result List - Team&#039;&#039; lists. Similarly, the user can click on the corresponding command on the right and on the left, but, then, only Individual (left) or Team Rankings (right) will be printed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:25--&amp;gt; Below these options, the software offers another row of icons that enable the user to print the rankings, where Medals Winners are highlighted.  These commands enable the user to choose the rankings to be printed, by Division and Class, or extracting a specific number of places and scores (starting from a cutoff) and so on (see Figure 3.12). It will also allow the user to print results based on subclasses, or various groupings if desired. It is recommended that a user checks the printouts they need in advance, and tests to ensure what they need is actually generated sensibly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Events (Ind/Team) Result Lists Printout ====  &amp;lt;!--T:26--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:QRanking.PNG|thumb|Fig 3.13]]&lt;br /&gt;
This page displays another set of printout layouts. From this page, the user can manage the printing of the tournament Qualification Round, the options are defined by the &#039;Events&#039; that are created for the Tournament defined in the areas below. &lt;br /&gt;
* Individual - [[Competition/Individual Events Setup]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Team - [[ Competition/Team Events Setup ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:27--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These printouts are very important if in the tournament there is a scheduled elimination and final round, on the other hand, they are not necessary for any competition that is not including this kind of matches. The order of the printouts can be defined in the two event setup areas if required. As for the previous printout pages, there is a .pdf file in the central part of the screen, with the complete &#039;&#039;Qualification Round - Complete&#039;&#039; report, on the side columns. The user can find the &#039;&#039;Individual&#039;&#039; and the &#039;&#039;Team&#039;&#039; ones separately too. In the other printout pages, there is a parameter section, with which the user can customize the layouts. Plus, the last default .pdf created by the software is &#039;&#039;Shoot Off/Coin Toss Status Printout&#039;&#039;, that immediately displays if there is any Shot-Off or Coin Toss to be broken, before proceeding to the Elimination and Final Round (see Figure 3.13).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Speaker====  &amp;lt;!--T:28--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This page displays the video printouts for the on-venue speaker. These printouts are mainly&lt;br /&gt;
used in national and international events (see Par. 5.10).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:29--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Qualification]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:30--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Content}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>DellaRossa</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Qualification&amp;diff=3777</id>
		<title>Qualification</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Qualification&amp;diff=3777"/>
		<updated>2026-06-17T13:04:59Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;DellaRossa: accompanying images with the text&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Proofreading}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;languages/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== Qualification Rounds == &amp;lt;!--T:1--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The qualification round is a key phase in each tournament, from local ones to the most important competitions&lt;br /&gt;
in Archery. Qualification can be before match-play as normal, or as the only part of a tournament to give final results (e.g. a WA1440). Everything that is related to scoring, scorecards, and printouts is available in the Qualification item of the main menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Scoring and Printouts === &amp;lt;!--T:2--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Qualification&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; item in the main menu of the software includes the following functions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Input Score ==== &amp;lt;!--T:3--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The main feature in the scores management. Selecting this option, the software will open dropdown submenu with some other items, which are related to the different procedures through which users can input scores in i@nseo. Users can enter scores in the system in four separate ways:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:4--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Qualification ScoringTable Simple.png|thumb|Fig 3.1]]&lt;br /&gt;
1. &#039;&#039;&#039;Standard Table:&#039;&#039;&#039; after selecting the desired Session, Targets and Distance, clicking on &#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;, a screen with a spreadsheet layout will be displayed: here the user can input scores in a simple and fast way (see Figure 3.1). Ticking the box &#039;&#039;G/X&#039;&#039;, the user can manage Xs and 10s (or 9s in indoor tournaments) that each athlete will shoot. Generally, this is a required activity during competitions; it can be skipped when the user needs to manage only some parts of scorecards and Tie-Break data is not relevant (e.g. for scoring at half distance).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:6--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In this page and in all the others, when you enter a value and press &#039;Tab&#039; the cursor will move to the next cell, which is essential for entering data quickly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:7--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|type=reminder|text=Once scores of all archers have been input, or if a score is changed, the user has to click on [Re-Build Teams], [Re-Calculate Distance Rank] and, then [Re-Calculate Final Rank]. The software will open 3 different pop-ups: always click [OK]. The software will, then, generate the Final Rank for the tournament.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:8--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The user could also click on [Save results for snapshot feature], to generate data for the real time displaying of ranks, but it is not necessary, unless there are visual electronic devices (TV or similar systems) in use, for they need to manage in real time the athletes ranks or positions in the entire competition. When not using the HHT or Electronic devices the results will be ranked and displayed only considering sessions and distances in the tournament.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:9--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SetIRMStatus.png|thumb|Fig 3.2]]&lt;br /&gt;
If an athlete decides to retire from the competition, or they have not shown up, the user can set the archers state using the &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Set&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; button on the left side. (see Figure 3.2).&lt;br /&gt;
* Did not start: The athlete will still be counted in the tournament statistics (payments, targets list, and so on), but the software won’t let the user input any scores. &lt;br /&gt;
* Did not finish: The athletes line will turn green, scores cannot be updated but the athlete will continue to the Head to Head event (if any) or receive a final rank from the qualification round&lt;br /&gt;
* Did not finish (No Rank): The athlete will not receive a rank from the qualification round and will not continue into the Head to Head event&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:9--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EnterScores ExtendedInput.png|thumb|Fig 3.3]]&lt;br /&gt;
2. &#039;&#039;&#039;Extended Table:&#039;&#039;&#039; it works just as the Standard Table. You can select all the distances to edit, or just one, but in addition to scores to be input the other distances totals are also shown (see Figure 3.3). It is useful to check the scores that have been&lt;br /&gt;
previously input, have been entered without mistakes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:10--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ArrowbyArrowInsert.png|thumb|Fig 3.4]]&lt;br /&gt;
3. &#039;&#039;&#039;Arrow by Arrow (Advanced users):&#039;&#039;&#039; this function enables the user to manage the score of each arrow in an end for each athlete (see Figure 3.4). This scoring method should not be used when scoring with electronic devices, if the arrow values need editing in this case then use the scorecards view during the verification process (Link to Scorecards verification)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:11--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ArrowbyArrowSC.png|thumb|Fig 3.5]]&lt;br /&gt;
4. &#039;&#039;&#039;Arrow by Arrow (Scorecards View):&#039;&#039;&#039; this function works just as the previous method, but on a different view, that displays a chart, which is similar to a standard printed scorecard (see Figure 3.5).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:12--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CheckDataUpdate.PNG|thumb|Fig 3.6]]&lt;br /&gt;
5. &#039;&#039;&#039;Check Data Update:&#039;&#039;&#039; This command enables the user to check Data Updates of scores, when the&lt;br /&gt;
competition is managed with different networked computers. The table shows the target numbers and they change colour based on when they last updated their data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Snapshot Configuration====&amp;lt;!--T:13--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:14--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ScorecardValidator.PNG|thumb|Fig 3.7]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:15--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
6. &#039;&#039;&#039;Get Score Barcodes:&#039;&#039;&#039;  This is the area where, when using arrow-by-arrow scoring (e.g. Ianseo Scorekeeper NG / NG Pro), you can validate the scorecards. &lt;br /&gt;
* Open the link&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter the separator character in the box (usually a - ) and click &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Go&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Select the Distance and Session in the drop down boxes, and scan the first scorecard. &lt;br /&gt;
* Once you have scanned the first scorecard, and the values are all correctly matching the paper, scan the same scorecard again to confirm it, the target will vanish from the list of missing cards on the right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:16--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The other options after scanning are:&lt;br /&gt;
* Edit arrows: This will take you to the scorecard screen and allow you to edit the arrow values, or search for the mathematical error&lt;br /&gt;
* Edit totals: This will allow you to change the totals electronically recorded (although the WA rules allow you to alter the electronic arrows to match the paper and then use the electronic total) &lt;br /&gt;
* Remove 10: remove all the first tie break arrow totals (again if under WA rules the box is blank) &lt;br /&gt;
* Remove X/nine: remove all the second tie break arrow totals, as above&lt;br /&gt;
* Remove both: If needed and both boxes are blank.&lt;br /&gt;
* Reset both: Used if you have mistakenly removed the totals of the tie break arrows.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:17--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
7. &#039;&#039;&#039;Print barcode Directives:&#039;&#039;&#039; This allows you to print a sheet to perform the barcode verification actions without needing to use a mouse during the process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Export text file ==== &amp;lt;!--T:18--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This function enables the user to save a text file (.txt) with all&lt;br /&gt;
the scores input in the tournament.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Scorecard Printout====  &amp;lt;!--T:19--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ScorecardPrintout.PNG|thumb|Fig 3.8]]&lt;br /&gt;
This function has been recently optimized for being as adaptable as possible. The&lt;br /&gt;
first part is split into two columns, where the user can manage all the variables needed for customizing&lt;br /&gt;
the Scorecard Printout. Generally, to help users print what they need, the first part of the screen&lt;br /&gt;
includes the REQUIRED options by default for a standard printed scorecard (see Figure 3.8)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:20--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Should the user need to print any other kind of scorecards (e.g. &#039;&#039;Only Data&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;Only Target Number&#039;&#039;, or &#039;&#039;Only Drawings&#039;&#039;), the screen offers a selection list (on the left), where the user can choose the options needed. The user can also modify a scorecard, to omit any text string, or picture included in the tournament using the boxes on the right. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:21--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Once the scorecard type is selected and the final appearance is selected, the user can proceed to the actual printing page. In the lower row, the software shows some editable boxes, that enables the user to choose the Session and Number of Targets to be printed (and if empty targets are included or not). Once the Session is selected the target numbers autocomplete any empty part with all the available targets. Once Session and Targets are selected, the user has to choose the distance to be printed below the distance area (see Figure 3.8). When electronic devices are in use for the automatic score management, the user can print scorecards created by the software with scores input directly by the archers, using the &#039;Print Scorecards filled in with all the value from single arrow&#039; option.&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to print a manual collection slip using the &#039;Intermediate Results collecting paper&#039; option at the very bottom.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:22--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AthleteBadge.PNG|thumb|Fig 3.9]]&lt;br /&gt;
====Athlete Numbers==== &lt;br /&gt;
This option enables the user to print the Athlete Numbers for the event. &lt;br /&gt;
* Open the page and select the badge type to &#039;Qualification Athlete number&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter a name for the design (such as &#039;Athlete Number&#039; and click on &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Create new badge&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To edit the parameters of the badge and move/add and remove elements click on &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Edit Badge&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The printing procedure is similar to the Scorecards one, for the user needs to select the desired Session and Targets.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Personal Rank====  &amp;lt;!--T:23--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PersonalRank.PNG|thumb|Fig 3.11]]&lt;br /&gt;
This option enables the user to view a selected athlete in the referring Division and Class Ranking. As search values, the user can opt for the &#039;&#039;BIB number&#039;&#039;, the &#039;&#039;Family Name&#039;&#039; or the &#039;&#039;Name of the archer&#039;&#039;. After clicking on &#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;, the software will open a page displaying the athlete position in the ranking (the corresponding row will be highlighted in yellow), together with the archers in the two places before and after the selected one (see Figure 3.11).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Class and Division Result Lists ====  &amp;lt;!--T:24--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CDResults.PNG|thumb|Fig 3.12]]&lt;br /&gt;
Clicking on this item, the software will open all the printout layouts for the Qualification Rounds. On this page, the main function is represented by the central icon &#039;&#039;Class &amp;amp; Division Result List&#039;&#039;. Clicking on this command, the user can print the Division and Class Ranking, both in the &#039;&#039;Class &amp;amp; Division Result List - Individual&#039;&#039; and in the &#039;&#039;Class &amp;amp; Division Result List - Team&#039;&#039; lists. Similarly, the user can click on the corresponding command on the right and on the left, but, then, only Individual (left) or Team Rankings (right) will be printed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:25--&amp;gt; Below these options, the software offers another row of icons that enable the user to print the rankings, where Medals Winners are highlighted.  These commands enable the user to choose the rankings to be printed, by Division and Class, or extracting a specific number of places and scores (starting from a cutoff) and so on (see Figure 3.12). It will also allow the user to print results based on subclasses, or various groupings if desired. It is recommended that a user checks the printouts they need in advance, and tests to ensure what they need is actually generated sensibly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Events (Ind/Team) Result Lists Printout ====  &amp;lt;!--T:26--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:QRanking.PNG|thumb|Fig 3.13]]&lt;br /&gt;
This page displays another set of printout layouts. From this page, the user can manage the printing of the tournament Qualification Round, the options are defined by the &#039;Events&#039; that are created for the Tournament defined in the areas below. &lt;br /&gt;
* Individual - [[Competition/Individual Events Setup]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Team - [[ Competition/Team Events Setup ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:27--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These printouts are very important if in the tournament there is a scheduled elimination and final round, on the other hand, they are not necessary for any competition that is not including this kind of matches. The order of the printouts can be defined in the two event setup areas if required. As for the previous printout pages, there is a .pdf file in the central part of the screen, with the complete &#039;&#039;Qualification Round - Complete&#039;&#039; report, on the side columns. The user can find the &#039;&#039;Individual&#039;&#039; and the &#039;&#039;Team&#039;&#039; ones separately too. In the other printout pages, there is a parameter section, with which the user can customize the layouts. Plus, the last default .pdf created by the software is &#039;&#039;Shoot Off/Coin Toss Status Printout&#039;&#039;, that immediately displays if there is any Shot-Off or Coin Toss to be broken, before proceeding to the Elimination and Final Round (see Figure 3.13).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Speaker====  &amp;lt;!--T:28--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This page displays the video printouts for the on-venue speaker. These printouts are mainly&lt;br /&gt;
used in national and international events (see Par. 5.10).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:29--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Qualification]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:30--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Content}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>DellaRossa</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Qualification&amp;diff=3776</id>
		<title>Qualification</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Qualification&amp;diff=3776"/>
		<updated>2026-06-17T09:34:31Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;DellaRossa: accompanying images with the text&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Proofreading}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;languages/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== Qualification Rounds == &amp;lt;!--T:1--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:2--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The qualification round is a key phase in each tournament, from local ones to the most important competitions&lt;br /&gt;
in Archery. Qualification can be before match-play as normal, or as the only part of a tournament to give final results (e.g. a WA1440). Everything that is related to scoring, scorecards, and printouts is available in the Qualification item of the main menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Scoring and Printouts === &amp;lt;!--T:3--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:4--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Qualification&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; item in the main menu of the software includes the following functions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Input Score ==== &amp;lt;!--T:5--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The main feature in the scores management. Selecting this option, the software will open dropdown submenu with some other items, which are related to the different procedures through which users can input scores in i@nseo. Users can enter scores in the system in four separate ways:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:6--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Qualification ScoringTable Simple.png|thumb|Fig 3.1]]&lt;br /&gt;
1. &#039;&#039;&#039;Standard Table:&#039;&#039;&#039; after selecting the desired Session, Targets and Distance, clicking on &#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;, a screen with a spreadsheet layout will be displayed: here the user can input scores in a simple and fast way (see Figure 3.1). Ticking the box &#039;&#039;G/X&#039;&#039;, the user can manage Xs and 10s (or 9s in indoor tournaments) that each athlete will shoot. Generally, this is a required activity during competitions; it can be skipped when the user needs to manage only some parts of scorecards and Tie-Break data is not relevant (e.g. for scoring at half distance).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page and in all the others, when you enter a value and press &#039;Tab&#039; the cursor will move to the next cell, which is essential for entering data quickly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|type=reminder|text=Once scores of all archers have been input, or if a score is changed, the user has to click on [Re-Build Teams], [Re-Calculate Distance Rank] and, then [Re-Calculate Final Rank]. The software will open 3 different pop-ups: always click [OK]. The software will, then, generate the Final Rank for the tournament.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user could also click on [Save results for snapshot feature], to generate data for the real time displaying of ranks, but it is not necessary, unless there are visual electronic devices (TV or similar systems) in use, for they need to manage in real time the athletes ranks or positions in the entire competition. When not using the HHT or Electronic devices the results will be ranked and displayed only considering sessions and distances in the tournament.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SetIRMStatus.png|thumb|Fig 3.2]]&lt;br /&gt;
If an athlete decides to retire from the competition, or they have not shown up, the user can set the archers state using the &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Set&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; button on the left side. (see Figure 3.2).&lt;br /&gt;
* Did not start: The athlete will still be counted in the tournament statistics (payments, targets list, and so on), but the software won’t let the user input any scores. &lt;br /&gt;
* Did not finish: The athletes line will turn green, scores cannot be updated but the athlete will continue to the Head to Head event (if any) or receive a final rank from the qualification round&lt;br /&gt;
* Did not finish (No Rank): The athlete will not receive a rank from the qualification round and will not continue into the Head to Head event&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. &#039;&#039;&#039;Extended Table:&#039;&#039;&#039; it works just as the Standard Table. You can select all the distances to edit, or just one, but in addition to scores to be input the other distances totals are also shown (see Figure 3.3). It is useful to check the scores that have been&lt;br /&gt;
previously input, have been entered without mistakes.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EnterScores ExtendedInput.png|thumb|Fig 3.3]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. &#039;&#039;&#039;Arrow by Arrow (Advanced users):&#039;&#039;&#039; this function enables the user to manage the score of each arrow in an end for each athlete (see Figure 3.4). This scoring method should not be used when scoring with electronic devices, if the arrow values need editing in this case then use the scorecards view during the verification process (Link to Scorecards verification)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ArrowbyArrowInsert.png|thumb|Fig 3.4]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:13--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
4. &#039;&#039;&#039;Arrow by Arrow (Scorecards View):&#039;&#039;&#039; this function works just as the previous method, but on a different view, that displays a chart, which is similar to a standard printed scorecard (see Figure 3.5).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ArrowbyArrowSC.png|thumb|Fig 3.5]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:16--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
5. &#039;&#039;&#039;Check Data Update:&#039;&#039;&#039; This command enables the user to check Data Updates of scores, when the&lt;br /&gt;
competition is managed with different networked computers. The table shows the target numbers and they change colour based on when they last updated their data.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CheckDataUpdate.PNG|thumb|Fig 3.6]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Snapshot Configuration====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. &#039;&#039;&#039;Get Score Barcodes:&#039;&#039;&#039;  This is the area where, when using arrow-by-arrow scoring (e.g. Ianseo Scorekeeper NG / NG Pro), you can validate the scorecards. &lt;br /&gt;
* Open the link&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter the separator character in the box (usually a - ) and click &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Go&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Select the Distance and Session in the drop down boxes, and scan the first scorecard. &lt;br /&gt;
* Once you have scanned the first scorecard, and the values are all correctly matching the paper, scan the same scorecard again to confirm it, the target will vanish from the list of missing cards on the right.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ScorecardValidator.PNG|thumb|Fig 3.7]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The other options after scanning are:&lt;br /&gt;
* Edit arrows: This will take you to the scorecard screen and allow you to edit the arrow values, or search for the mathematical error&lt;br /&gt;
* Edit totals: This will allow you to change the totals electronically recorded (although the WA rules allow you to alter the electronic arrows to match the paper and then use the electronic total) &lt;br /&gt;
* Remove 10: remove all the first tie break arrow totals (again if under WA rules the box is blank) &lt;br /&gt;
* Remove X/nine: remove all the second tie break arrow totals, as above&lt;br /&gt;
* Remove both: If needed and both boxes are blank.&lt;br /&gt;
* Reset both: Used if you have mistakenly removed the totals of the tie break arrows.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. &#039;&#039;&#039;Print barcode Directives:&#039;&#039;&#039; This allows you to print a sheet to perform the barcode verification actions without needing to use a mouse during the process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Export text file ==== &amp;lt;!--T:18--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This function enables the user to save a text file (.txt) with all&lt;br /&gt;
the scores input in the tournament.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Scorecard Printout====  &amp;lt;!--T:19--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This function has been recently optimized for being as adaptable as possible. The&lt;br /&gt;
first part is split into two columns, where the user can manage all the variables needed for customizing&lt;br /&gt;
the Scorecard Printout. Generally, to help users print what they need, the first part of the screen&lt;br /&gt;
includes the REQUIRED options by default for a standard printed scorecard (see Figure 3.8)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:20--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ScorecardPrintout.PNG|thumb|Fig 3.8]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:21--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Should the user need to print any other kind of scorecards (e.g. &#039;&#039;Only Data&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;Only Target Number&#039;&#039;, or &#039;&#039;Only Drawings&#039;&#039;), the screen offers a selection list (on the left), where the user can choose the options needed. The user can also modify a scorecard, to omit any text string, or picture included in the tournament using the boxes on the right. &lt;br /&gt;
Once the scorecard type is selected and the final appearance is selected, the user can proceed to the actual printing page. In the lower row, the software shows some editable boxes, that enables the user to choose the Session and Number of Targets to be printed (and if empty targets are included or not). Once the Session is selected the target numbers autocomplete any empty part with all the available targets. Once Session and Targets are selected, the user has to choose the distance to be printed below the distance area (see Figure 3.8). When electronic devices are in use for the automatic score management, the user can print scorecards created by the software with scores input directly by the archers, using the &#039;Print Scorecards filled in with all the value from single arrow&#039; option.&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to print a manual collection slip using the &#039;Intermediate Results collecting paper&#039; option at the very bottom.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Athlete Numbers ====  &amp;lt;!--T:22--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This option enables the user to print the Athlete Numbers for the event. &lt;br /&gt;
* Open the page and select the badge type to &#039;Qualification Athlete number&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter a name for the design (such as &#039;Athlete Number&#039; and click on &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Create new badge&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To edit the parameters of the badge and move/add and remove elements click on &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Edit Badge&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The printing procedure is similar to the Scorecards one, for the user needs to select the desired Session and Targets.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AthleteBadge.PNG|thumb|Fig 3.9|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Personal Rank====  &amp;lt;!--T:27--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This option enables the user to view a selected athlete in the referring Division and Class Ranking. As search values, the user can opt for the &#039;&#039;BIB number&#039;&#039;, the &#039;&#039;Family Name&#039;&#039; or the &#039;&#039;Name of the archer&#039;&#039;. After clicking on &#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;, the software will open a page displaying the athlete position in the ranking (the corresponding row will be highlighted in yellow), together with the archers in the two places before and after the selected one (see Figure 3.11).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:28--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PersonalRank.PNG|thumb|Fig 3.11|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Class and Division Result Lists ====  &amp;lt;!--T:29--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Clicking on this item, the software will open all the printout layouts for the Qualification Rounds. On this page, the main function is represented by the central icon &#039;&#039;Class &amp;amp; Division Result List&#039;&#039;. Clicking on this command, the user can print the Division and Class Ranking, both in the &#039;&#039;Class &amp;amp; Division Result List - Individual&#039;&#039; and in the &#039;&#039;Class &amp;amp; Division Result List - Team&#039;&#039; lists. Similarly, the user can click on the corresponding command on the right and on the left, but, then, only Individual (left) or Team Rankings (right) will be printed. Below these options, the software offers another row of icons that enable the user to print the rankings, where Medals Winners are highlighted.  These commands enable the user to choose the rankings to be printed, by Division and Class, or extracting a specific number of places and scores (starting from a cutoff) and so on (see Figure 3.12). It will also allow the user to print results based on subclasses, or various groupings if desired. It is recommended that a user checks the printouts they need in advance, and tests to ensure what they need is actually generated sensibly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:30--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CDResults.PNG|thumb|Fig 3.12|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Events (Ind/Team) Result Lists Printout ====  &amp;lt;!--T:31--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This page displays another set of printout layouts. From this page, the user can manage the printing of the tournament Qualification Round, the options are defined by the &#039;Events&#039; that are created for the Tournament defined in the areas below. &lt;br /&gt;
* Individual - [[Competition/Individual Events Setup]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Team - [[ Competition/Team Events Setup ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These printouts are very important if in the tournament there is a scheduled elimination and final round, on the other hand, they are not necessary for any competition that is not including this kind of matches. The order of the printouts can be defined in the two event setup areas if required. As for the previous printout pages, there is a .pdf file in the central part of the screen, with the complete &#039;&#039;Qualification Round - Complete&#039;&#039; report, on the side columns. The user can find the &#039;&#039;Individual&#039;&#039; and the &#039;&#039;Team&#039;&#039; ones separately too. In the other printout pages, there is a parameter section, with which the user can customize the layouts. Plus, the last default .pdf created by the software is &#039;&#039;Shoot Off/Coin Toss Status Printout&#039;&#039;, that immediately displays if there is any Shot-Off or Coin Toss to be broken, before proceeding to the Elimination and Final Round (see Figure 3.13).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:32--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:QRanking.PNG|thumb|Fig 3.13|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Speaker====  &amp;lt;!--T:33--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This page displays the video printouts for the on-venue speaker. These printouts are mainly&lt;br /&gt;
used in national and international events (see Par. 5.10).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:34--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Content}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>DellaRossa</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Qualification&amp;diff=3772</id>
		<title>Qualification</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Qualification&amp;diff=3772"/>
		<updated>2026-06-15T22:13:32Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;DellaRossa: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Proofreading}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;languages/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== Qualification Rounds == &amp;lt;!--T:1--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:2--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The qualification round is a key phase in each tournament, from local ones to the most important competitions&lt;br /&gt;
in Archery. Qualification can be before match-play as normal, or as the only part of a tournament to give final results (e.g. a WA1440). Everything that is related to scoring, scorecards, and printouts is available in the Qualification item of the main menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Scoring and Printouts === &amp;lt;!--T:3--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:4--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Qualification&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; item in the main menu of the software includes the following functions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Input Score ==== &amp;lt;!--T:5--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The main feature in the scores management. Selecting this option, the software will open dropdown submenu with some other items, which are related to the different procedures through which users can input scores in i@nseo. Users can enter scores in the system in four separate ways:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:6--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Qualification ScoringTable Simple.png|thumb|Fig 3.1]]&lt;br /&gt;
1. &#039;&#039;&#039;Standard Table:&#039;&#039;&#039; after selecting the desired Session, Targets and Distance, clicking on &#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;, a screen with a spreadsheet layout will be displayed: here the user can input scores in a simple and fast way (see Figure 3.1). Ticking the box &#039;&#039;G/X&#039;&#039;, the user can manage Xs and 10s (or 9s in indoor tournaments) that each athlete will shoot. Generally, this is a required activity during competitions; it can be skipped when the user needs to manage only some parts of scorecards and Tie-Break data is not relevant (e.g. for scoring at half distance).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page and in all the others, when you enter a value and press &#039;Tab&#039; the cursor will move to the next cell, which is essential for entering data quickly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|type=reminder|text=Once scores of all archers have been input, or if a score is changed, the user has to click on [Re-Build Teams], [Re-Calculate Distance Rank] and, then [Re-Calculate Final Rank]. The software will open 3 different pop-ups: always click [OK]. The software will, then, generate the Final Rank for the tournament.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user could also click on [Save results for snapshot feature], to generate data for the real time displaying of ranks, but it is not necessary, unless there are visual electronic devices (TV or similar systems) in use, for they need to manage in real time the athletes ranks or positions in the entire competition. When not using the HHT or Electronic devices the results will be ranked and displayed only considering sessions and distances in the tournament.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SetIRMStatus.png|thumb|Fig 3.2]]&lt;br /&gt;
If an athlete decides to retire from the competition, or they have not shown up, the user can set the archers state using the &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Set&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; button on the left side. (see Figure 3.2).&lt;br /&gt;
* Did not start: The athlete will still be counted in the tournament statistics (payments, targets list, and so on), but the software won’t let the user input any scores. &lt;br /&gt;
* Did not finish: The athletes line will turn green, scores cannot be updated but the athlete will continue to the Head to Head event (if any) or receive a final rank from the qualification round&lt;br /&gt;
* Did not finish (No Rank): The athlete will not receive a rank from the qualification round and will not continue into the Head to Head event&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. &#039;&#039;&#039;Extended Table:&#039;&#039;&#039; it works just as the Standard Table. You can select all the distances to edit, or just one, but in addition to scores to be input the other distances totals are also shown (see Figure 3.3). It is useful to check the scores that have been&lt;br /&gt;
previously input, have been entered without mistakes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EnterScores ExtendedInput.png|thumb|940x940px|Fig 3.3]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. &#039;&#039;&#039;Arrow by Arrow (Advanced users):&#039;&#039;&#039; this function enables the user to manage the score of each arrow in an end for each athlete (see Figure 3.4). This scoring method should not be used when scoring with electronic devices, if the arrow values need editing in this case then use the scorecards view during the verification process (Link to Scorecards verification)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ArrowbyArrowInsert.png|thumb|945x945px|Fig 3.4]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:13--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
4. &#039;&#039;&#039;Arrow by Arrow (Scorecards View):&#039;&#039;&#039; this function works just as the previous method, but on a different view, that displays a chart, which is similar to a standard printed scorecard (see Figure 3.5).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ArrowbyArrowSC.png|thumb|954x954px|Fig 3.5]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:16--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
5. &#039;&#039;&#039;Check Data Update:&#039;&#039;&#039; This command enables the user to check Data Updates of scores, when the&lt;br /&gt;
competition is managed with different networked computers. The table shows the target numbers and they change colour based on when they last updated their data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CheckDataUpdate.PNG|thumb|940x940px|Fig 3.6]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Snapshot Configuration====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. &#039;&#039;&#039;Get Score Barcodes:&#039;&#039;&#039;  This is the area where, when using arrow-by-arrow scoring (e.g. Ianseo Scorekeeper NG / NG Pro), you can validate the scorecards. &lt;br /&gt;
* Open the link&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter the separator character in the box (usually a - ) and click &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Go&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Select the Distance and Session in the drop down boxes, and scan the first scorecard. &lt;br /&gt;
* Once you have scanned the first scorecard, and the values are all correctly matching the paper, scan the same scorecard again to confirm it, the target will vanish from the list of missing cards on the right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ScorecardValidator.PNG|thumb|940x940px|Fig 3.7]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The other options after scanning are:&lt;br /&gt;
* Edit arrows: This will take you to the scorecard screen and allow you to edit the arrow values, or search for the mathematical error&lt;br /&gt;
* Edit totals: This will allow you to change the totals electronically recorded (although the WA rules allow you to alter the electronic arrows to match the paper and then use the electronic total) &lt;br /&gt;
* Remove 10: remove all the first tie break arrow totals (again if under WA rules the box is blank) &lt;br /&gt;
* Remove X/nine: remove all the second tie break arrow totals, as above&lt;br /&gt;
* Remove both: If needed and both boxes are blank.&lt;br /&gt;
* Reset both: Used if you have mistakenly removed the totals of the tie break arrows.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. &#039;&#039;&#039;Print barcode Directives:&#039;&#039;&#039; This allows you to print a sheet to perform the barcode verification actions without needing to use a mouse during the process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Export text file ==== &amp;lt;!--T:18--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This function enables the user to save a text file (.txt) with all&lt;br /&gt;
the scores input in the tournament.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Scorecard Printout====  &amp;lt;!--T:19--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This function has been recently optimized for being as adaptable as possible. The&lt;br /&gt;
first part is split into two columns, where the user can manage all the variables needed for customizing&lt;br /&gt;
the Scorecard Printout. Generally, to help users print what they need, the first part of the screen&lt;br /&gt;
includes the REQUIRED options by default for a standard printed scorecard (see Figure 3.8)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:20--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ScorecardPrintout.PNG|thumb|940x940px|Fig 3.8]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:21--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Should the user need to print any other kind of scorecards (e.g. &#039;&#039;Only Data&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;Only Target Number&#039;&#039;, or &#039;&#039;Only Drawings&#039;&#039;), the screen offers a selection list (on the left), where the user can choose the options needed. The user can also modify a scorecard, to omit any text string, or picture included in the tournament using the boxes on the right. &lt;br /&gt;
Once the scorecard type is selected and the final appearance is selected, the user can proceed to the actual printing page. In the lower row, the software shows some editable boxes, that enables the user to choose the Session and Number of Targets to be printed (and if empty targets are included or not). Once the Session is selected the target numbers autocomplete any empty part with all the available targets. Once Session and Targets are selected, the user has to choose the distance to be printed below the distance area (see Figure 3.8). When electronic devices are in use for the automatic score management, the user can print scorecards created by the software with scores input directly by the archers, using the &#039;Print Scorecards filled in with all the value from single arrow&#039; option.&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to print a manual collection slip using the &#039;Intermediate Results collecting paper&#039; option at the very bottom.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Athlete Numbers ====  &amp;lt;!--T:22--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This option enables the user to print the Athlete Numbers for the event. &lt;br /&gt;
* Open the page and select the badge type to &#039;Qualification Athlete number&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter a name for the design (such as &#039;Athlete Number&#039; and click on &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Create new badge&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To edit the parameters of the badge and move/add and remove elements click on &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Edit Badge&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The printing procedure is similar to the Scorecards one, for the user needs to select the desired Session and Targets.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AthleteBadge.PNG|thumb|931x931px|Fig 3.9|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Personal Rank====  &amp;lt;!--T:27--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This option enables the user to view a selected athlete in the referring Division and Class Ranking. As search values, the user can opt for the &#039;&#039;BIB number&#039;&#039;, the &#039;&#039;Family Name&#039;&#039; or the &#039;&#039;Name of the archer&#039;&#039;. After clicking on &#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;, the software will open a page displaying the athlete position in the ranking (the corresponding row will be highlighted in yellow), together with the archers in the two places before and after the selected one (see Figure 3.11).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:28--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PersonalRank.PNG|thumb|931x931px|Fig 3.11|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Class and Division Result Lists ====  &amp;lt;!--T:29--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Clicking on this item, the software will open all the printout layouts for the Qualification Rounds. On this page, the main function is represented by the central icon &#039;&#039;Class &amp;amp; Division Result List&#039;&#039;. Clicking on this command, the user can print the Division and Class Ranking, both in the &#039;&#039;Class &amp;amp; Division Result List - Individual&#039;&#039; and in the &#039;&#039;Class &amp;amp; Division Result List - Team&#039;&#039; lists. Similarly, the user can click on the corresponding command on the right and on the left, but, then, only Individual (left) or Team Rankings (right) will be printed. Below these options, the software offers another row of icons that enable the user to print the rankings, where Medals Winners are highlighted.  These commands enable the user to choose the rankings to be printed, by Division and Class, or extracting a specific number of places and scores (starting from a cutoff) and so on (see Figure 3.12). It will also allow the user to print results based on subclasses, or various groupings if desired. It is recommended that a user checks the printouts they need in advance, and tests to ensure what they need is actually generated sensibly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:30--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CDResults.PNG|thumb|931x931px|Fig 3.12|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Events (Ind/Team) Result Lists Printout ====  &amp;lt;!--T:31--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This page displays another set of printout layouts. From this page, the user can manage the printing of the tournament Qualification Round, the options are defined by the &#039;Events&#039; that are created for the Tournament defined in the areas below. &lt;br /&gt;
* Individual - [[Competition/Individual Events Setup]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Team - [[ Competition/Team Events Setup ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These printouts are very important if in the tournament there is a scheduled elimination and final round, on the other hand, they are not necessary for any competition that is not including this kind of matches. The order of the printouts can be defined in the two event setup areas if required. As for the previous printout pages, there is a .pdf file in the central part of the screen, with the complete &#039;&#039;Qualification Round - Complete&#039;&#039; report, on the side columns. The user can find the &#039;&#039;Individual&#039;&#039; and the &#039;&#039;Team&#039;&#039; ones separately too. In the other printout pages, there is a parameter section, with which the user can customize the layouts. Plus, the last default .pdf created by the software is &#039;&#039;Shoot Off/Coin Toss Status Printout&#039;&#039;, that immediately displays if there is any Shot-Off or Coin Toss to be broken, before proceeding to the Elimination and Final Round (see Figure 3.13).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:32--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:QRanking.PNG|thumb|931x931px|Fig 3.13|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Speaker====  &amp;lt;!--T:33--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This page displays the video printouts for the on-venue speaker. These printouts are mainly&lt;br /&gt;
used in national and international events (see Par. 5.10).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:34--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Content}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>DellaRossa</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Qualification&amp;diff=3771</id>
		<title>Qualification</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Qualification&amp;diff=3771"/>
		<updated>2026-06-15T22:12:25Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;DellaRossa: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Proofreading}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;languages/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== Qualification Rounds == &amp;lt;!--T:1--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:2--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The qualification round is a key phase in each tournament, from local ones to the most important competitions&lt;br /&gt;
in Archery. Qualification can be before match-play as normal, or as the only part of a tournament to give final results (e.g. a WA1440). Everything that is related to scoring, scorecards, and printouts is available in the Qualification item of the main menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Scoring and Printouts === &amp;lt;!--T:3--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:4--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Qualification&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; item in the main menu of the software includes the following functions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Input Score ==== &amp;lt;!--T:5--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The main feature in the scores management. Selecting this option, the software will open dropdown submenu with some other items, which are related to the different procedures through which users can input scores in i@nseo. Users can enter scores in the system in four separate ways:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:6--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Qualification ScoringTable Simple.png|thumb|Fig 3.1]]&lt;br /&gt;
1. &#039;&#039;&#039;Standard Table:&#039;&#039;&#039; after selecting the desired Session, Targets and Distance, clicking on &#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;, a screen with a spreadsheet layout will be displayed: here the user can input scores in a simple and fast way (see Figure 3.1). Ticking the box &#039;&#039;G/X&#039;&#039;, the user can manage Xs and 10s (or 9s in indoor tournaments) that each athlete will shoot. Generally, this is a required activity during competitions; it can be skipped when the user needs to manage only some parts of scorecards and Tie-Break data is not relevant (e.g. for scoring at half distance).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page and in all the others, when you enter a value and press &#039;Tab&#039; the cursor will move to the next cell, which is essential for entering data quickly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|type=reminder|text=Once scores of all archers have been input, or if a score is changed, the user has to click on [Re-Build Teams], [Re-Calculate Distance Rank] and, then [Re-Calculate Final Rank]. The software will open 3 different pop-ups: always click [OK]. The software will, then, generate the Final Rank for the tournament.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user could also click on [Save results for snapshot feature], to generate data for the real time displaying of ranks, but it is not necessary, unless there are visual electronic devices (TV or similar systems) in use, for they need to manage in real time the athletes ranks or positions in the entire competition. When not using the HHT or Electronic devices the results will be ranked and displayed only considering sessions and distances in the tournament.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SetIRMStatus.png|thumb|957x957px|Fig 3.2]]&lt;br /&gt;
If an athlete decides to retire from the competition, or they have not shown up, the user can set the archers state using the &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Set&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; button on the left side. (see Figure 3.2).&lt;br /&gt;
* Did not start: The athlete will still be counted in the tournament statistics (payments, targets list, and so on), but the software won’t let the user input any scores. &lt;br /&gt;
* Did not finish: The athletes line will turn green, scores cannot be updated but the athlete will continue to the Head to Head event (if any) or receive a final rank from the qualification round&lt;br /&gt;
* Did not finish (No Rank): The athlete will not receive a rank from the qualification round and will not continue into the Head to Head event&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. &#039;&#039;&#039;Extended Table:&#039;&#039;&#039; it works just as the Standard Table. You can select all the distances to edit, or just one, but in addition to scores to be input the other distances totals are also shown (see Figure 3.3). It is useful to check the scores that have been&lt;br /&gt;
previously input, have been entered without mistakes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EnterScores ExtendedInput.png|thumb|940x940px|Fig 3.3]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. &#039;&#039;&#039;Arrow by Arrow (Advanced users):&#039;&#039;&#039; this function enables the user to manage the score of each arrow in an end for each athlete (see Figure 3.4). This scoring method should not be used when scoring with electronic devices, if the arrow values need editing in this case then use the scorecards view during the verification process (Link to Scorecards verification)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ArrowbyArrowInsert.png|thumb|945x945px|Fig 3.4]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:13--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
4. &#039;&#039;&#039;Arrow by Arrow (Scorecards View):&#039;&#039;&#039; this function works just as the previous method, but on a different view, that displays a chart, which is similar to a standard printed scorecard (see Figure 3.5).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ArrowbyArrowSC.png|thumb|954x954px|Fig 3.5]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:16--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
5. &#039;&#039;&#039;Check Data Update:&#039;&#039;&#039; This command enables the user to check Data Updates of scores, when the&lt;br /&gt;
competition is managed with different networked computers. The table shows the target numbers and they change colour based on when they last updated their data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CheckDataUpdate.PNG|thumb|940x940px|Fig 3.6]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Snapshot Configuration====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. &#039;&#039;&#039;Get Score Barcodes:&#039;&#039;&#039;  This is the area where, when using arrow-by-arrow scoring (e.g. Ianseo Scorekeeper NG / NG Pro), you can validate the scorecards. &lt;br /&gt;
* Open the link&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter the separator character in the box (usually a - ) and click &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Go&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Select the Distance and Session in the drop down boxes, and scan the first scorecard. &lt;br /&gt;
* Once you have scanned the first scorecard, and the values are all correctly matching the paper, scan the same scorecard again to confirm it, the target will vanish from the list of missing cards on the right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ScorecardValidator.PNG|thumb|940x940px|Fig 3.7]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The other options after scanning are:&lt;br /&gt;
* Edit arrows: This will take you to the scorecard screen and allow you to edit the arrow values, or search for the mathematical error&lt;br /&gt;
* Edit totals: This will allow you to change the totals electronically recorded (although the WA rules allow you to alter the electronic arrows to match the paper and then use the electronic total) &lt;br /&gt;
* Remove 10: remove all the first tie break arrow totals (again if under WA rules the box is blank) &lt;br /&gt;
* Remove X/nine: remove all the second tie break arrow totals, as above&lt;br /&gt;
* Remove both: If needed and both boxes are blank.&lt;br /&gt;
* Reset both: Used if you have mistakenly removed the totals of the tie break arrows.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. &#039;&#039;&#039;Print barcode Directives:&#039;&#039;&#039; This allows you to print a sheet to perform the barcode verification actions without needing to use a mouse during the process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Export text file ==== &amp;lt;!--T:18--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This function enables the user to save a text file (.txt) with all&lt;br /&gt;
the scores input in the tournament.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Scorecard Printout====  &amp;lt;!--T:19--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This function has been recently optimized for being as adaptable as possible. The&lt;br /&gt;
first part is split into two columns, where the user can manage all the variables needed for customizing&lt;br /&gt;
the Scorecard Printout. Generally, to help users print what they need, the first part of the screen&lt;br /&gt;
includes the REQUIRED options by default for a standard printed scorecard (see Figure 3.8)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:20--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ScorecardPrintout.PNG|thumb|940x940px|Fig 3.8]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:21--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Should the user need to print any other kind of scorecards (e.g. &#039;&#039;Only Data&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;Only Target Number&#039;&#039;, or &#039;&#039;Only Drawings&#039;&#039;), the screen offers a selection list (on the left), where the user can choose the options needed. The user can also modify a scorecard, to omit any text string, or picture included in the tournament using the boxes on the right. &lt;br /&gt;
Once the scorecard type is selected and the final appearance is selected, the user can proceed to the actual printing page. In the lower row, the software shows some editable boxes, that enables the user to choose the Session and Number of Targets to be printed (and if empty targets are included or not). Once the Session is selected the target numbers autocomplete any empty part with all the available targets. Once Session and Targets are selected, the user has to choose the distance to be printed below the distance area (see Figure 3.8). When electronic devices are in use for the automatic score management, the user can print scorecards created by the software with scores input directly by the archers, using the &#039;Print Scorecards filled in with all the value from single arrow&#039; option.&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to print a manual collection slip using the &#039;Intermediate Results collecting paper&#039; option at the very bottom.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Athlete Numbers ====  &amp;lt;!--T:22--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This option enables the user to print the Athlete Numbers for the event. &lt;br /&gt;
* Open the page and select the badge type to &#039;Qualification Athlete number&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter a name for the design (such as &#039;Athlete Number&#039; and click on &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Create new badge&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To edit the parameters of the badge and move/add and remove elements click on &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Edit Badge&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The printing procedure is similar to the Scorecards one, for the user needs to select the desired Session and Targets.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AthleteBadge.PNG|thumb|931x931px|Fig 3.9|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Personal Rank====  &amp;lt;!--T:27--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This option enables the user to view a selected athlete in the referring Division and Class Ranking. As search values, the user can opt for the &#039;&#039;BIB number&#039;&#039;, the &#039;&#039;Family Name&#039;&#039; or the &#039;&#039;Name of the archer&#039;&#039;. After clicking on &#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;, the software will open a page displaying the athlete position in the ranking (the corresponding row will be highlighted in yellow), together with the archers in the two places before and after the selected one (see Figure 3.11).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:28--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PersonalRank.PNG|thumb|931x931px|Fig 3.11|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Class and Division Result Lists ====  &amp;lt;!--T:29--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Clicking on this item, the software will open all the printout layouts for the Qualification Rounds. On this page, the main function is represented by the central icon &#039;&#039;Class &amp;amp; Division Result List&#039;&#039;. Clicking on this command, the user can print the Division and Class Ranking, both in the &#039;&#039;Class &amp;amp; Division Result List - Individual&#039;&#039; and in the &#039;&#039;Class &amp;amp; Division Result List - Team&#039;&#039; lists. Similarly, the user can click on the corresponding command on the right and on the left, but, then, only Individual (left) or Team Rankings (right) will be printed. Below these options, the software offers another row of icons that enable the user to print the rankings, where Medals Winners are highlighted.  These commands enable the user to choose the rankings to be printed, by Division and Class, or extracting a specific number of places and scores (starting from a cutoff) and so on (see Figure 3.12). It will also allow the user to print results based on subclasses, or various groupings if desired. It is recommended that a user checks the printouts they need in advance, and tests to ensure what they need is actually generated sensibly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:30--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CDResults.PNG|thumb|931x931px|Fig 3.12|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Events (Ind/Team) Result Lists Printout ====  &amp;lt;!--T:31--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This page displays another set of printout layouts. From this page, the user can manage the printing of the tournament Qualification Round, the options are defined by the &#039;Events&#039; that are created for the Tournament defined in the areas below. &lt;br /&gt;
* Individual - [[Competition/Individual Events Setup]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Team - [[ Competition/Team Events Setup ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These printouts are very important if in the tournament there is a scheduled elimination and final round, on the other hand, they are not necessary for any competition that is not including this kind of matches. The order of the printouts can be defined in the two event setup areas if required. As for the previous printout pages, there is a .pdf file in the central part of the screen, with the complete &#039;&#039;Qualification Round - Complete&#039;&#039; report, on the side columns. The user can find the &#039;&#039;Individual&#039;&#039; and the &#039;&#039;Team&#039;&#039; ones separately too. In the other printout pages, there is a parameter section, with which the user can customize the layouts. Plus, the last default .pdf created by the software is &#039;&#039;Shoot Off/Coin Toss Status Printout&#039;&#039;, that immediately displays if there is any Shot-Off or Coin Toss to be broken, before proceeding to the Elimination and Final Round (see Figure 3.13).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:32--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:QRanking.PNG|thumb|931x931px|Fig 3.13|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Speaker====  &amp;lt;!--T:33--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This page displays the video printouts for the on-venue speaker. These printouts are mainly&lt;br /&gt;
used in national and international events (see Par. 5.10).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:34--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Content}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>DellaRossa</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Qualification&amp;diff=3770</id>
		<title>Qualification</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Qualification&amp;diff=3770"/>
		<updated>2026-06-15T22:09:34Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;DellaRossa: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Proofreading}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;languages/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== Qualification Rounds == &amp;lt;!--T:1--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:2--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The qualification round is a key phase in each tournament, from local ones to the most important competitions&lt;br /&gt;
in Archery. Qualification can be before match-play as normal, or as the only part of a tournament to give final results (e.g. a WA1440). Everything that is related to scoring, scorecards, and printouts is available in the Qualification item of the main menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Scoring and Printouts === &amp;lt;!--T:3--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:4--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Qualification&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; item in the main menu of the software includes the following functions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Input Score ==== &amp;lt;!--T:5--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The main feature in the scores management. Selecting this option, the software will open dropdown submenu with some other items, which are related to the different procedures through which users can input scores in i@nseo. Users can enter scores in the system in four separate ways:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:6--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Qualification ScoringTable Simple.png|thumb|Fig 3.1]]&lt;br /&gt;
1. &#039;&#039;&#039;Standard Table:&#039;&#039;&#039; after selecting the desired Session, Targets and Distance, clicking on &#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;, a screen with a spreadsheet layout will be displayed: here the user can input scores in a simple and fast way (see Figure 3.1). Ticking the box &#039;&#039;G/X&#039;&#039;, the user can manage Xs and 10s (or 9s in indoor tournaments) that each athlete will shoot. Generally, this is a required activity during competitions; it can be skipped when the user needs to manage only some parts of scorecards and Tie-Break data is not relevant (e.g. for scoring at half distance).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page and in all the others, when you enter a value and press &#039;Tab&#039; the cursor will move to the next cell, which is essential for entering data quickly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|type=reminder|text=Once scores of all archers have been input, or if a score is changed, the user has to click on [Re-Build Teams], [Re-Calculate Distance Rank] and, then [Re-Calculate Final Rank]. The software will open 3 different pop-ups: always click [OK]. The software will, then, generate the Final Rank for the tournament.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user could also click on [Save results for snapshot feature], to generate data for the real time displaying of ranks, but it is not necessary, unless there are visual electronic devices (TV or similar systems) in use, for they need to manage in real time the athletes ranks or positions in the entire competition. When not using the HHT or Electronic devices the results will be ranked and displayed only considering sessions and distances in the tournament.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If an athlete decides to retire from the competition, or they have not shown up, the user can set the archers state using the &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Set&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; button on the left side. (see Figure 3.2).&lt;br /&gt;
* Did not start: The athlete will still be counted in the tournament statistics (payments, targets list, and so on), but the software won’t let the user input any scores. &lt;br /&gt;
* Did not finish: The athletes line will turn green, scores cannot be updated but the athlete will continue to the Head to Head event (if any) or receive a final rank from the qualification round&lt;br /&gt;
* Did not finish (No Rank): The athlete will not receive a rank from the qualification round and will not continue into the Head to Head event&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SetIRMStatus.png|thumb|957x957px|Fig 3.2]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. &#039;&#039;&#039;Extended Table:&#039;&#039;&#039; it works just as the Standard Table. You can select all the distances to edit, or just one, but in addition to scores to be input the other distances totals are also shown (see Figure 3.3). It is useful to check the scores that have been&lt;br /&gt;
previously input, have been entered without mistakes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EnterScores ExtendedInput.png|thumb|940x940px|Fig 3.3]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. &#039;&#039;&#039;Arrow by Arrow (Advanced users):&#039;&#039;&#039; this function enables the user to manage the score of each arrow in an end for each athlete (see Figure 3.4). This scoring method should not be used when scoring with electronic devices, if the arrow values need editing in this case then use the scorecards view during the verification process (Link to Scorecards verification)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ArrowbyArrowInsert.png|thumb|945x945px|Fig 3.4]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:13--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
4. &#039;&#039;&#039;Arrow by Arrow (Scorecards View):&#039;&#039;&#039; this function works just as the previous method, but on a different view, that displays a chart, which is similar to a standard printed scorecard (see Figure 3.5).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ArrowbyArrowSC.png|thumb|954x954px|Fig 3.5]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:16--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
5. &#039;&#039;&#039;Check Data Update:&#039;&#039;&#039; This command enables the user to check Data Updates of scores, when the&lt;br /&gt;
competition is managed with different networked computers. The table shows the target numbers and they change colour based on when they last updated their data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CheckDataUpdate.PNG|thumb|940x940px|Fig 3.6]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Snapshot Configuration====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. &#039;&#039;&#039;Get Score Barcodes:&#039;&#039;&#039;  This is the area where, when using arrow-by-arrow scoring (e.g. Ianseo Scorekeeper NG / NG Pro), you can validate the scorecards. &lt;br /&gt;
* Open the link&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter the separator character in the box (usually a - ) and click &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Go&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Select the Distance and Session in the drop down boxes, and scan the first scorecard. &lt;br /&gt;
* Once you have scanned the first scorecard, and the values are all correctly matching the paper, scan the same scorecard again to confirm it, the target will vanish from the list of missing cards on the right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ScorecardValidator.PNG|thumb|940x940px|Fig 3.7]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The other options after scanning are:&lt;br /&gt;
* Edit arrows: This will take you to the scorecard screen and allow you to edit the arrow values, or search for the mathematical error&lt;br /&gt;
* Edit totals: This will allow you to change the totals electronically recorded (although the WA rules allow you to alter the electronic arrows to match the paper and then use the electronic total) &lt;br /&gt;
* Remove 10: remove all the first tie break arrow totals (again if under WA rules the box is blank) &lt;br /&gt;
* Remove X/nine: remove all the second tie break arrow totals, as above&lt;br /&gt;
* Remove both: If needed and both boxes are blank.&lt;br /&gt;
* Reset both: Used if you have mistakenly removed the totals of the tie break arrows.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. &#039;&#039;&#039;Print barcode Directives:&#039;&#039;&#039; This allows you to print a sheet to perform the barcode verification actions without needing to use a mouse during the process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Export text file ==== &amp;lt;!--T:18--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This function enables the user to save a text file (.txt) with all&lt;br /&gt;
the scores input in the tournament.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Scorecard Printout====  &amp;lt;!--T:19--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This function has been recently optimized for being as adaptable as possible. The&lt;br /&gt;
first part is split into two columns, where the user can manage all the variables needed for customizing&lt;br /&gt;
the Scorecard Printout. Generally, to help users print what they need, the first part of the screen&lt;br /&gt;
includes the REQUIRED options by default for a standard printed scorecard (see Figure 3.8)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:20--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ScorecardPrintout.PNG|thumb|940x940px|Fig 3.8]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:21--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Should the user need to print any other kind of scorecards (e.g. &#039;&#039;Only Data&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;Only Target Number&#039;&#039;, or &#039;&#039;Only Drawings&#039;&#039;), the screen offers a selection list (on the left), where the user can choose the options needed. The user can also modify a scorecard, to omit any text string, or picture included in the tournament using the boxes on the right. &lt;br /&gt;
Once the scorecard type is selected and the final appearance is selected, the user can proceed to the actual printing page. In the lower row, the software shows some editable boxes, that enables the user to choose the Session and Number of Targets to be printed (and if empty targets are included or not). Once the Session is selected the target numbers autocomplete any empty part with all the available targets. Once Session and Targets are selected, the user has to choose the distance to be printed below the distance area (see Figure 3.8). When electronic devices are in use for the automatic score management, the user can print scorecards created by the software with scores input directly by the archers, using the &#039;Print Scorecards filled in with all the value from single arrow&#039; option.&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to print a manual collection slip using the &#039;Intermediate Results collecting paper&#039; option at the very bottom.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Athlete Numbers ====  &amp;lt;!--T:22--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This option enables the user to print the Athlete Numbers for the event. &lt;br /&gt;
* Open the page and select the badge type to &#039;Qualification Athlete number&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter a name for the design (such as &#039;Athlete Number&#039; and click on &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Create new badge&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To edit the parameters of the badge and move/add and remove elements click on &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Edit Badge&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The printing procedure is similar to the Scorecards one, for the user needs to select the desired Session and Targets.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AthleteBadge.PNG|thumb|931x931px|Fig 3.9|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Personal Rank====  &amp;lt;!--T:27--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This option enables the user to view a selected athlete in the referring Division and Class Ranking. As search values, the user can opt for the &#039;&#039;BIB number&#039;&#039;, the &#039;&#039;Family Name&#039;&#039; or the &#039;&#039;Name of the archer&#039;&#039;. After clicking on &#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;, the software will open a page displaying the athlete position in the ranking (the corresponding row will be highlighted in yellow), together with the archers in the two places before and after the selected one (see Figure 3.11).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:28--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PersonalRank.PNG|thumb|931x931px|Fig 3.11|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Class and Division Result Lists ====  &amp;lt;!--T:29--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Clicking on this item, the software will open all the printout layouts for the Qualification Rounds. On this page, the main function is represented by the central icon &#039;&#039;Class &amp;amp; Division Result List&#039;&#039;. Clicking on this command, the user can print the Division and Class Ranking, both in the &#039;&#039;Class &amp;amp; Division Result List - Individual&#039;&#039; and in the &#039;&#039;Class &amp;amp; Division Result List - Team&#039;&#039; lists. Similarly, the user can click on the corresponding command on the right and on the left, but, then, only Individual (left) or Team Rankings (right) will be printed. Below these options, the software offers another row of icons that enable the user to print the rankings, where Medals Winners are highlighted.  These commands enable the user to choose the rankings to be printed, by Division and Class, or extracting a specific number of places and scores (starting from a cutoff) and so on (see Figure 3.12). It will also allow the user to print results based on subclasses, or various groupings if desired. It is recommended that a user checks the printouts they need in advance, and tests to ensure what they need is actually generated sensibly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:30--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CDResults.PNG|thumb|931x931px|Fig 3.12|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Events (Ind/Team) Result Lists Printout ====  &amp;lt;!--T:31--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This page displays another set of printout layouts. From this page, the user can manage the printing of the tournament Qualification Round, the options are defined by the &#039;Events&#039; that are created for the Tournament defined in the areas below. &lt;br /&gt;
* Individual - [[Competition/Individual Events Setup]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Team - [[ Competition/Team Events Setup ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These printouts are very important if in the tournament there is a scheduled elimination and final round, on the other hand, they are not necessary for any competition that is not including this kind of matches. The order of the printouts can be defined in the two event setup areas if required. As for the previous printout pages, there is a .pdf file in the central part of the screen, with the complete &#039;&#039;Qualification Round - Complete&#039;&#039; report, on the side columns. The user can find the &#039;&#039;Individual&#039;&#039; and the &#039;&#039;Team&#039;&#039; ones separately too. In the other printout pages, there is a parameter section, with which the user can customize the layouts. Plus, the last default .pdf created by the software is &#039;&#039;Shoot Off/Coin Toss Status Printout&#039;&#039;, that immediately displays if there is any Shot-Off or Coin Toss to be broken, before proceeding to the Elimination and Final Round (see Figure 3.13).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:32--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:QRanking.PNG|thumb|931x931px|Fig 3.13|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Speaker====  &amp;lt;!--T:33--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This page displays the video printouts for the on-venue speaker. These printouts are mainly&lt;br /&gt;
used in national and international events (see Par. 5.10).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:34--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Content}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>DellaRossa</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Qualification&amp;diff=3767</id>
		<title>Qualification</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Qualification&amp;diff=3767"/>
		<updated>2026-06-14T16:39:06Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;DellaRossa: &amp;#039;Tab&amp;#039; key reminder&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Proofreading}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;languages/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== Qualification Rounds == &amp;lt;!--T:1--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:2--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The qualification round is a key phase in each tournament, from local ones to the most important competitions&lt;br /&gt;
in Archery. Qualification can be before match-play as normal, or as the only part of a tournament to give final results (e.g. a WA1440). Everything that is related to scoring, scorecards, and printouts is available in the Qualification item of the main menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Scoring and Printouts === &amp;lt;!--T:3--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:4--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Qualification&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; item in the main menu of the software includes the following functions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Input Score ==== &amp;lt;!--T:5--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The main feature in the scores management. Selecting this option, the software will open dropdown submenu with some other items, which are related to the different procedures through which users can input scores in i@nseo. Users can enter scores in the system in four separate ways:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:6--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1. &#039;&#039;&#039;Standard Table:&#039;&#039;&#039; after selecting the desired Session, Targets and Distance, clicking on &#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;, a screen with a spreadsheet layout will be displayed: here the user can input scores in a simple and fast way (see Figure 3.1). Ticking the box &#039;&#039;G/X&#039;&#039;, the user can manage Xs and 10s (or 9s in indoor tournaments) that each athlete will shoot. Generally, this is a required activity during competitions; it can be skipped when the user needs to manage only some parts of scorecards and Tie-Break data is not relevant (e.g. for scoring at half distance).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page and in all the others, when you enter a value and press &#039;Tab&#039; the cursor will move to the next cell, which is essential for entering data quickly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Qualification ScoringTable Simple.png|thumb|957x957px|Fig 3.1]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|type=reminder|text=Once scores of all archers have been input, or if a score is changed, the user has to click on [Re-Build Teams], [Re-Calculate Distance Rank] and, then [Re-Calculate Final Rank]. The software will open 3 different pop-ups: always click [OK]. The software will, then, generate the Final Rank for the tournament.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user could also click on [Save results for snapshot feature], to generate data for the real time displaying of ranks, but it is not necessary, unless there are visual electronic devices (TV or similar systems) in use, for they need to manage in real time the athletes ranks or positions in the entire competition. When not using the HHT or Electronic devices the results will be ranked and displayed only considering sessions and distances in the tournament.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If an athlete decides to retire from the competition, or they have not shown up, the user can set the archers state using the &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Set&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; button on the left side. (see Figure 3.2).&lt;br /&gt;
* Did not start: The athlete will still be counted in the tournament statistics (payments, targets list, and so on), but the software won’t let the user input any scores. &lt;br /&gt;
* Did not finish: The athletes line will turn green, scores cannot be updated but the athlete will continue to the Head to Head event (if any) or receive a final rank from the qualification round&lt;br /&gt;
* Did not finish (No Rank): The athlete will not receive a rank from the qualification round and will not continue into the Head to Head event&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SetIRMStatus.png|thumb|957x957px|Fig 3.2]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. &#039;&#039;&#039;Extended Table:&#039;&#039;&#039; it works just as the Standard Table. You can select all the distances to edit, or just one, but in addition to scores to be input the other distances totals are also shown (see Figure 3.3). It is useful to check the scores that have been&lt;br /&gt;
previously input, have been entered without mistakes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EnterScores ExtendedInput.png|thumb|940x940px|Fig 3.3]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. &#039;&#039;&#039;Arrow by Arrow (Advanced users):&#039;&#039;&#039; this function enables the user to manage the score of each arrow in an end for each athlete (see Figure 3.4). This scoring method should not be used when scoring with electronic devices, if the arrow values need editing in this case then use the scorecards view during the verification process (Link to Scorecards verification)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ArrowbyArrowInsert.png|thumb|945x945px|Fig 3.4]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:13--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
4. &#039;&#039;&#039;Arrow by Arrow (Scorecards View):&#039;&#039;&#039; this function works just as the previous method, but on a different view, that displays a chart, which is similar to a standard printed scorecard (see Figure 3.5).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ArrowbyArrowSC.png|thumb|954x954px|Fig 3.5]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:16--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
5. &#039;&#039;&#039;Check Data Update:&#039;&#039;&#039; This command enables the user to check Data Updates of scores, when the&lt;br /&gt;
competition is managed with different networked computers. The table shows the target numbers and they change colour based on when they last updated their data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CheckDataUpdate.PNG|thumb|940x940px|Fig 3.6]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Snapshot Configuration====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. &#039;&#039;&#039;Get Score Barcodes:&#039;&#039;&#039;  This is the area where, when using arrow-by-arrow scoring (e.g. Ianseo Scorekeeper NG / NG Pro), you can validate the scorecards. &lt;br /&gt;
* Open the link&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter the separator character in the box (usually a - ) and click &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Go&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Select the Distance and Session in the drop down boxes, and scan the first scorecard. &lt;br /&gt;
* Once you have scanned the first scorecard, and the values are all correctly matching the paper, scan the same scorecard again to confirm it, the target will vanish from the list of missing cards on the right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ScorecardValidator.PNG|thumb|940x940px|Fig 3.7]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The other options after scanning are:&lt;br /&gt;
* Edit arrows: This will take you to the scorecard screen and allow you to edit the arrow values, or search for the mathematical error&lt;br /&gt;
* Edit totals: This will allow you to change the totals electronically recorded (although the WA rules allow you to alter the electronic arrows to match the paper and then use the electronic total) &lt;br /&gt;
* Remove 10: remove all the first tie break arrow totals (again if under WA rules the box is blank) &lt;br /&gt;
* Remove X/nine: remove all the second tie break arrow totals, as above&lt;br /&gt;
* Remove both: If needed and both boxes are blank.&lt;br /&gt;
* Reset both: Used if you have mistakenly removed the totals of the tie break arrows.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. &#039;&#039;&#039;Print barcode Directives:&#039;&#039;&#039; This allows you to print a sheet to perform the barcode verification actions without needing to use a mouse during the process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Export text file ==== &amp;lt;!--T:18--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This function enables the user to save a text file (.txt) with all&lt;br /&gt;
the scores input in the tournament.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Scorecard Printout====  &amp;lt;!--T:19--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This function has been recently optimized for being as adaptable as possible. The&lt;br /&gt;
first part is split into two columns, where the user can manage all the variables needed for customizing&lt;br /&gt;
the Scorecard Printout. Generally, to help users print what they need, the first part of the screen&lt;br /&gt;
includes the REQUIRED options by default for a standard printed scorecard (see Figure 3.8)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:20--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ScorecardPrintout.PNG|thumb|940x940px|Fig 3.8]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:21--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Should the user need to print any other kind of scorecards (e.g. &#039;&#039;Only Data&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;Only Target Number&#039;&#039;, or &#039;&#039;Only Drawings&#039;&#039;), the screen offers a selection list (on the left), where the user can choose the options needed. The user can also modify a scorecard, to omit any text string, or picture included in the tournament using the boxes on the right. &lt;br /&gt;
Once the scorecard type is selected and the final appearance is selected, the user can proceed to the actual printing page. In the lower row, the software shows some editable boxes, that enables the user to choose the Session and Number of Targets to be printed (and if empty targets are included or not). Once the Session is selected the target numbers autocomplete any empty part with all the available targets. Once Session and Targets are selected, the user has to choose the distance to be printed below the distance area (see Figure 3.8). When electronic devices are in use for the automatic score management, the user can print scorecards created by the software with scores input directly by the archers, using the &#039;Print Scorecards filled in with all the value from single arrow&#039; option.&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to print a manual collection slip using the &#039;Intermediate Results collecting paper&#039; option at the very bottom.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Athlete Numbers ====  &amp;lt;!--T:22--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This option enables the user to print the Athlete Numbers for the event. &lt;br /&gt;
* Open the page and select the badge type to &#039;Qualification Athlete number&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter a name for the design (such as &#039;Athlete Number&#039; and click on &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Create new badge&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To edit the parameters of the badge and move/add and remove elements click on &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Edit Badge&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The printing procedure is similar to the Scorecards one, for the user needs to select the desired Session and Targets.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AthleteBadge.PNG|thumb|931x931px|Fig 3.9|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Personal Rank====  &amp;lt;!--T:27--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This option enables the user to view a selected athlete in the referring Division and Class Ranking. As search values, the user can opt for the &#039;&#039;BIB number&#039;&#039;, the &#039;&#039;Family Name&#039;&#039; or the &#039;&#039;Name of the archer&#039;&#039;. After clicking on &#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;, the software will open a page displaying the athlete position in the ranking (the corresponding row will be highlighted in yellow), together with the archers in the two places before and after the selected one (see Figure 3.11).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:28--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PersonalRank.PNG|thumb|931x931px|Fig 3.11|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Class and Division Result Lists ====  &amp;lt;!--T:29--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Clicking on this item, the software will open all the printout layouts for the Qualification Rounds. On this page, the main function is represented by the central icon &#039;&#039;Class &amp;amp; Division Result List&#039;&#039;. Clicking on this command, the user can print the Division and Class Ranking, both in the &#039;&#039;Class &amp;amp; Division Result List - Individual&#039;&#039; and in the &#039;&#039;Class &amp;amp; Division Result List - Team&#039;&#039; lists. Similarly, the user can click on the corresponding command on the right and on the left, but, then, only Individual (left) or Team Rankings (right) will be printed. Below these options, the software offers another row of icons that enable the user to print the rankings, where Medals Winners are highlighted.  These commands enable the user to choose the rankings to be printed, by Division and Class, or extracting a specific number of places and scores (starting from a cutoff) and so on (see Figure 3.12). It will also allow the user to print results based on subclasses, or various groupings if desired. It is recommended that a user checks the printouts they need in advance, and tests to ensure what they need is actually generated sensibly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:30--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CDResults.PNG|thumb|931x931px|Fig 3.12|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Events (Ind/Team) Result Lists Printout ====  &amp;lt;!--T:31--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This page displays another set of printout layouts. From this page, the user can manage the printing of the tournament Qualification Round, the options are defined by the &#039;Events&#039; that are created for the Tournament defined in the areas below. &lt;br /&gt;
* Individual - [[Competition/Individual Events Setup]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Team - [[ Competition/Team Events Setup ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These printouts are very important if in the tournament there is a scheduled elimination and final round, on the other hand, they are not necessary for any competition that is not including this kind of matches. The order of the printouts can be defined in the two event setup areas if required. As for the previous printout pages, there is a .pdf file in the central part of the screen, with the complete &#039;&#039;Qualification Round - Complete&#039;&#039; report, on the side columns. The user can find the &#039;&#039;Individual&#039;&#039; and the &#039;&#039;Team&#039;&#039; ones separately too. In the other printout pages, there is a parameter section, with which the user can customize the layouts. Plus, the last default .pdf created by the software is &#039;&#039;Shoot Off/Coin Toss Status Printout&#039;&#039;, that immediately displays if there is any Shot-Off or Coin Toss to be broken, before proceeding to the Elimination and Final Round (see Figure 3.13).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:32--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:QRanking.PNG|thumb|931x931px|Fig 3.13|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Speaker====  &amp;lt;!--T:33--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This page displays the video printouts for the on-venue speaker. These printouts are mainly&lt;br /&gt;
used in national and international events (see Par. 5.10).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:34--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Content}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>DellaRossa</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Update_i@nseo/it&amp;diff=3744</id>
		<title>Update i@nseo/it</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Update_i@nseo/it&amp;diff=3744"/>
		<updated>2026-05-26T13:31:29Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;DellaRossa: Created page with &amp;quot;{{note|Si prega di salvare sempre i tornei in un luogo sicuro prima di eseguire l&amp;#039;aggiornamento!}}&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Proofreading}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
L&#039;aggiornamento del software è fondamentale per garantire un funzionamento sempre efficiente.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La versione è rappresentata dalla data di pubblicazione. La versione e la revisione del software sono visibili nella barra del titolo o cliccando sul logo i@nseo all&#039;estremità destra della barra dei menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Ianseo-Version-IT.png|thumb|alt=I@nseo Version|Controllo versione di I@nseo]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
L&#039;aggiornamento di i@nseo è una procedura semplice. Dopo aver aperto l&#039;applicazione e con una stabile connessione internet, spostarsi nella pagina &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Moduli =&amp;gt; Aggiorna I@nseo&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{note|Si prega di salvare sempre i tornei in un luogo sicuro prima di eseguire l&#039;aggiornamento!}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Il sistema chiederà prima di tutto di accettare la licenza (leggere attentamente perché si tratta di una licenza legalmente vincolante) e poi di eseguire l&#039;aggiornamento.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Content}}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>DellaRossa</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Translations:Update_i@nseo/7/it&amp;diff=3743</id>
		<title>Translations:Update i@nseo/7/it</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Translations:Update_i@nseo/7/it&amp;diff=3743"/>
		<updated>2026-05-26T13:31:24Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;DellaRossa: Created page with &amp;quot;{{note|Si prega di salvare sempre i tornei in un luogo sicuro prima di eseguire l&amp;#039;aggiornamento!}}&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{note|Si prega di salvare sempre i tornei in un luogo sicuro prima di eseguire l&#039;aggiornamento!}}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>DellaRossa</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Install_i@nseo/it&amp;diff=3742</id>
		<title>Install i@nseo/it</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Install_i@nseo/it&amp;diff=3742"/>
		<updated>2026-05-26T13:29:17Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;DellaRossa: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Proofreading}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== Preparazione dell&#039;installazione ==&lt;br /&gt;
I@nseo funziona come un sito web, quindi è necessario installare prima il cosiddetto pacchetto AMP (Apache, Mysql, Php). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;hr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Windows ===&lt;br /&gt;
Per installare I@nseo su un sistema operativo Windows, seguire i seguenti passaggi: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Scaricare il software da [https://ianseo.net/Releases.php ianseo.net]. Il metodo preferito è quello di scaricare il programma di installazione completo che installerà XAMPP.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Decomprimere il file nella cartella desiderata. Il metodo raccomandato è quello di decomprimere il file in C:\ e ianseo si troverà in C:\ianseo &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Eseguire il file di &#039;&#039;&#039;setup_xampp.bat&#039;&#039;&#039;, presente nella cartella appena creata. Si aprirà automaticamente un Prompt dei comandi: nel caso in cui ci sia qualche impostazione da modificare, il sistema mostrerà 2 domande precompilate: basterà premere “Invio”; altrimenti verrà visualizzato un messaggio che dice “Niente da fare”. Chiudere quindi il Prompt dei comandi.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;ianseo-alert-info&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==== Post Installazione ====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;In Windows 11&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; Windows Defender apparentemente interferisce con XAMPP e talvolta manda in crash i@nseo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-collapsible-content&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Install_Post_Installation}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Esegui XAMPP====&lt;br /&gt;
Dopo aver configurato gli archivi, attivare XAMPP cliccando l&#039;icona &#039;&#039;&#039;Xampp-control&#039;&#039;&#039;, quindi, nella finestra appena aperta cliccare su ‘Start’ sia sulla riga di Apache che su quella di MySQL.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;ianseo-alert-danger&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=====ATTENZIONE=====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Se viene visualizzato un avviso che indica che VCRUNTIME140.dll non è stato trovato, installare la [https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/cpp/windows/latest-supported-vc-redist?view=msvc-170#latest-microsoft-visual-c-redistributable-version Ultima versione di Microsoft Visual C++ Redistributable] Si consiglia la versione x86. In caso di dubbio installare entrambe!&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
N.B.: è possibile chiudere XAMPP Control (minimizzarlo) cliccando sulla X, XAMPP continuerà a funzionare ridotto a icona senza alcun problema.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Verificate che la cartella &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;C:\ianseo\htdocs&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; sia modificabile da chiunque: cliccate con il pulsante destro del mouse sulla cartella, selezionate Proprietà e modificate i permessi in modo che tutti possano avere accesso in lettura e scrittura alla cartella e ai sottofile file e alle sottocartelle cartelle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;hr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===MacOs===&lt;br /&gt;
Non disponiamo di un programma di installazione per Mac, pertanto il pacchetto AMP (Apache, Mysql, Php) deve essere installato separatamente.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Scaricare XAMPP/MAMP====&lt;br /&gt;
Scaricare XAMPP ([https://www.apachefriends.org/]) o MAMP ([https://www.mamp.info/en/downloads/]) e seguire le istruzioni per l&#039;installazione. La seguente guida è per MAMP ma è valida anche per XAMPP.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Scegli la versione corretta a seconda che tu utilizzi un processore Intel o Apple Silicon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Esegui il programma di installazione. In questo modo verranno installati MAMP e una versione demo di MAMP Pro. Ianseo richiede solo le funzionalità di MAMP, quindi non è necessario acquistare MAMP Pro, a meno che tu non lo desideri.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Una volta completata l&#039;installazione, troverai una cartella denominata MAMP nella cartella Applicazioni. Apri questa cartella facendo doppio clic su di essa e avvia l&#039;applicazione MAMP.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La maggior parte delle impostazioni predefinite è sufficiente per Ianseo, ma è necessario effettuare prima alcune modifiche. Seleziona “Preferenze” e poi la scheda ‘Porte’. Fai clic sul pulsante “80 &amp;amp; 3306” per impostare MAMP sulle porte predefinite per il web e MySQL.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Scaricare i@nseo====&lt;br /&gt;
Da [https://ianseo.net/Releases.php ianseo.net] scaricare il pacchetto .zip e decomprimerlo nella cartella &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;htdocs&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; di XAMPP/MAMP (dentro &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;/Applicazioni&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ai fini della presente guida, Ianseo verrà installato in una cartella dedicata, denominata «ianseo», e l&#039;URL per accedervi sarà &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;http://localhost/ianseo&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Apri la cartella “/Applications/MAMP/htdocs”&lt;br /&gt;
* Crea una cartella al suo interno e chiamala “ianseo” (tutto minuscolo, senza virgolette)&lt;br /&gt;
* Decomprimere il contenuto del file zip scaricato all&#039;interno della cartella ianseo&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;IMPORTANTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; Aprire la cartella &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;/Applications/MAMP/htdocs/ianseo/Common&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; ed eliminare il file &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;config.inc.php&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (se presente) per consentire l&#039;avvio della procedura di installazione.&lt;br /&gt;
* Apri una finestra di terminale (Applications -&amp;gt; Utilities -&amp;gt; Terminal)&lt;br /&gt;
* Vai alla cartella MAMP digitando il comando qui sotto, includendo uno spazio tra cd e /, e premi &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Invio&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;:&lt;br /&gt;
    cd /Applications/MAMP/htdocs&lt;br /&gt;
* Digita il seguente comando e premi &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Invio&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. Ti verrà richiesta la password del tuo utente: inseriscila, ma ricorda che non verrà visualizzato nulla durante la digitazione, nemmeno *.&lt;br /&gt;
    sudo chown -R nobody:admin ianseo&lt;br /&gt;
* Digita il seguente comando e premi Invio (potrebbe essere richiesta nuovamente la password):&lt;br /&gt;
    sudo chmod -R a+rwX ianseo&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Avvio di MAMP====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Avvia l&#039;applicazione MAMP, quindi premi il pulsante “Start”. In questo modo si avvieranno il server web Apache e il database MySQL. Potrebbe essere richiesto di inserire la password; inseriscila per continuare.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Una volta avviato MAMP, il browser dovrebbe aprirsi automaticamente sulla pagina “Benvenuto in MAMP”, che mostra il numero della versione corrente.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Per avviare Ianseo, inserisci l&#039;indirizzo &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;http://localhost/ianseo&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; in una nuova scheda. Dovrai prima accettare il Contratto di licenza. Seleziona la casella e clicca sul pulsante ACCETTO.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Se si tratta di una nuova installazione, segui le istruzioni visualizzate sullo schermo. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|Durante l&#039;installazione MAMP non imposta la password di root di MySQL, quindi quando il programma di installazione la richiede, lascia il campo vuoto. Gli altri campi possono essere lasciati con i valori predefiniti. Fai clic sul pulsante «Crea utente e database» per procedere. }}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|Se il programma di installazione visualizza un messaggio di errore che indica l&#039;impossibilità di connettersi al database, inserisci “root” nei campi Password amministratore per creare utenti e database e fai clic sul pulsante “Crea utente e database” per riprovare.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Una volta configurate le impostazioni del database, dovrebbe apparire un messaggio che indica che Ianseo è ora installato sul tuo sistema.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clicca sul link «Vai a IANSEO!» per aggiornare il tuo sistema all&#039;ultima versione. In questo modo verrà scaricata automaticamente l&#039;ultima versione del software e verranno aggiornati i file di lingua. Al termine dell&#039;operazione, verrà visualizzato il messaggio «L&#039;aggiornamento è concluso.». Clicca sul pulsante per continuare.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;hr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Linux===&lt;br /&gt;
Il modo corretto di installare il pacchetto AMP(Apache, Mysql, Php) è chiamato LAMP: si tenga presente che i@nseo funzionerà su php 8 o successivo. Installare con il proprio package manager (è necessario disporre di privilegi di amministratore):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*apache2&lt;br /&gt;
*mysql-server&lt;br /&gt;
*mysql-client&lt;br /&gt;
*php&lt;br /&gt;
*php-mysql&lt;br /&gt;
*php-gd&lt;br /&gt;
*php-curl&lt;br /&gt;
*imagemagick&lt;br /&gt;
*php-imagick&lt;br /&gt;
*php-xml&lt;br /&gt;
*php-zip&lt;br /&gt;
*php-intl&lt;br /&gt;
*php-mbstring&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Create un utente per ianseo nel server mysql. Questo può essere fatto da Debian nelle moderne distribuzioni derivate  con (copiando e incollando la seguente riga in un terminale):&lt;br /&gt;
 sudo mysql -e &amp;quot;create user ianseo@localhost identified by &#039;ianseo&#039;;grant all privileges on ianseo.* to ianseo@localhost;create database ianseo;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Se si verifica un errore di password mancante, è necessario aggiungere l&#039;interruttore della password. Tenete presente che non vedrete la password mentre la digitate, quindi non dimenticate di premere “invio” al termine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 sudo mysql -p -e &amp;quot;create user ianseo@localhost identified by &#039;ianseo&#039;;grant all privileges on ianseo.* to ianseo@localhost;create database ianseo;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Create la cartella &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;/opt/ianseo&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; e assegnate la cartella al vostro utente.&lt;br /&gt;
Scaricare il file .zip da [https://ianseo.net/Releases.php ianseo.net] e decomprimetelo in &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;/opt/ianseo.&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Assegnate tutti i permessi di scrittura alla cartella e ai file con il seguente comando.&lt;br /&gt;
 sudo chmod -R a+rwX /opt/ianseo&lt;br /&gt;
Copiate il file di configurazione di apache che si trova in &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;/opt/ianseo/Install/apache-ianseo.conf&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; in &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;/etc/apache2/conf-available&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; e abilitate la modifica in apache&lt;br /&gt;
 sudo cp  /opt/ianseo/Install/apache-ianseo.conf /etc/apache2/conf-available&lt;br /&gt;
 sudo a2enconf apache-ianseo&lt;br /&gt;
 sudo service apache2 reload&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Configurazione finale di i@nseo==&lt;br /&gt;
Controllare che in &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Common&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; non ci sia il file chiamato &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;config.inc.php&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Aprire un browser Internet e navigare su &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;http://localhost/ianseo&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Seguire le istruzioni sullo schermo fornite dal software.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Content}}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>DellaRossa</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Translations:Install_i@nseo/41/it&amp;diff=3741</id>
		<title>Translations:Install i@nseo/41/it</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Translations:Install_i@nseo/41/it&amp;diff=3741"/>
		<updated>2026-05-26T13:28:59Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;DellaRossa: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Note|Se il programma di installazione visualizza un messaggio di errore che indica l&#039;impossibilità di connettersi al database, inserisci “root” nei campi Password amministratore per creare utenti e database e fai clic sul pulsante “Crea utente e database” per riprovare.}}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>DellaRossa</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Translations:Install_i@nseo/40/it&amp;diff=3740</id>
		<title>Translations:Install i@nseo/40/it</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Translations:Install_i@nseo/40/it&amp;diff=3740"/>
		<updated>2026-05-26T13:28:55Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;DellaRossa: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Note|Durante l&#039;installazione MAMP non imposta la password di root di MySQL, quindi quando il programma di installazione la richiede, lascia il campo vuoto. Gli altri campi possono essere lasciati con i valori predefiniti. Fai clic sul pulsante «Crea utente e database» per procedere. }}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>DellaRossa</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Qualification&amp;diff=3739</id>
		<title>Qualification</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Qualification&amp;diff=3739"/>
		<updated>2026-05-26T13:00:42Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;DellaRossa: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Proofreading}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;languages/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== Qualification Rounds == &amp;lt;!--T:1--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:2--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The qualification round is a key phase in each tournament, from local ones to the most important competitions&lt;br /&gt;
in Archery. Qualification can be before match-play as normal, or as the only part of a tournament to give final results (e.g. a WA1440). Everything that is related to scoring, scorecards, and printouts is available in the Qualification item of the main menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Scoring and Printouts === &amp;lt;!--T:3--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:4--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Qualification&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; item in the main menu of the software includes the following functions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Input Score ==== &amp;lt;!--T:5--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The main feature in the scores management. Selecting this option, the software will open dropdown submenu with some other items, which are related to the different procedures through which users can input scores in i@nseo. Users can enter scores in the system in four separate ways:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:6--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1. &#039;&#039;&#039;Standard Table:&#039;&#039;&#039; after selecting the desired Session, Targets and Distance, clicking on &#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;, a screen with a spreadsheet layout will be displayed: here the user can input scores in a simple and fast way (see Figure 3.1). Ticking the box &#039;&#039;G/X&#039;&#039;, the user can manage Xs and 10s (or 9s in indoor tournaments) that each athlete will shoot. Generally, this is a required activity during competitions; it can be skipped when the user needs to manage only some parts of scorecards and Tie-Break data is not relevant (e.g. for scoring at half distance).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Qualification ScoringTable Simple.png|thumb|957x957px|Fig 3.1]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|type=reminder|text=Once scores of all archers have been input, or if a score is changed, the user has to click on [Re-Build Teams], [Re-Calculate Distance Rank] and, then [Re-Calculate Final Rank]. The software will open 3 different pop-ups: always click [OK]. The software will, then, generate the Final Rank for the tournament.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user could also click on [Save results for snapshot feature], to generate data for the real time displaying of ranks, but it is not necessary, unless there are visual electronic devices (TV or similar systems) in use, for they need to manage in real time the athletes ranks or positions in the entire competition. When not using the HHT or Electronic devices the results will be ranked and displayed only considering sessions and distances in the tournament.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If an athlete decides to retire from the competition, or they have not shown up, the user can set the archers state using the &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Set&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; button on the left side. (see Figure 3.2).&lt;br /&gt;
* Did not start: The athlete will still be counted in the tournament statistics (payments, targets list, and so on), but the software won’t let the user input any scores. &lt;br /&gt;
* Did not finish: The athletes line will turn green, scores cannot be updated but the athlete will continue to the Head to Head event (if any) or receive a final rank from the qualification round&lt;br /&gt;
* Did not finish (No Rank): The athlete will not receive a rank from the qualification round and will not continue into the Head to Head event&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SetIRMStatus.png|thumb|957x957px|Fig 3.2]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. &#039;&#039;&#039;Extended Table:&#039;&#039;&#039; it works just as the Standard Table. You can select all the distances to edit, or just one, but in addition to scores to be input the other distances totals are also shown (see Figure 3.3). It is useful to check the scores that have been&lt;br /&gt;
previously input, have been entered without mistakes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EnterScores ExtendedInput.png|thumb|940x940px|Fig 3.3]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. &#039;&#039;&#039;Arrow by Arrow (Advanced users):&#039;&#039;&#039; this function enables the user to manage the score of each arrow in an end for each athlete (see Figure 3.4). This scoring method should not be used when scoring with electronic devices, if the arrow values need editing in this case then use the scorecards view during the verification process (Link to Scorecards verification)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ArrowbyArrowInsert.png|thumb|945x945px|Fig 3.4]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:13--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
4. &#039;&#039;&#039;Arrow by Arrow (Scorecards View):&#039;&#039;&#039; this function works just as the previous method, but on a different view, that displays a chart, which is similar to a standard printed scorecard (see Figure 3.5).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ArrowbyArrowSC.png|thumb|954x954px|Fig 3.5]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:16--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
5. &#039;&#039;&#039;Check Data Update:&#039;&#039;&#039; This command enables the user to check Data Updates of scores, when the&lt;br /&gt;
competition is managed with different networked computers. The table shows the target numbers and they change colour based on when they last updated their data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CheckDataUpdate.PNG|thumb|940x940px|Fig 3.6]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Snapshot Configuration====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. &#039;&#039;&#039;Get Score Barcodes:&#039;&#039;&#039;  This is the area where, when using arrow-by-arrow scoring (e.g. Ianseo Scorekeeper NG / NG Pro), you can validate the scorecards. &lt;br /&gt;
* Open the link&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter the separator character in the box (usually a - ) and click &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Go&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Select the Distance and Session in the drop down boxes, and scan the first scorecard. &lt;br /&gt;
* Once you have scanned the first scorecard, and the values are all correctly matching the paper, scan the same scorecard again to confirm it, the target will vanish from the list of missing cards on the right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ScorecardValidator.PNG|thumb|940x940px|Fig 3.7]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The other options after scanning are:&lt;br /&gt;
* Edit arrows: This will take you to the scorecard screen and allow you to edit the arrow values, or search for the mathematical error&lt;br /&gt;
* Edit totals: This will allow you to change the totals electronically recorded (although the WA rules allow you to alter the electronic arrows to match the paper and then use the electronic total) &lt;br /&gt;
* Remove 10: remove all the first tie break arrow totals (again if under WA rules the box is blank) &lt;br /&gt;
* Remove X/nine: remove all the second tie break arrow totals, as above&lt;br /&gt;
* Remove both: If needed and both boxes are blank.&lt;br /&gt;
* Reset both: Used if you have mistakenly removed the totals of the tie break arrows.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. &#039;&#039;&#039;Print barcode Directives:&#039;&#039;&#039; This allows you to print a sheet to perform the barcode verification actions without needing to use a mouse during the process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Export text file ==== &amp;lt;!--T:18--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This function enables the user to save a text file (.txt) with all&lt;br /&gt;
the scores input in the tournament.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Scorecard Printout====  &amp;lt;!--T:19--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This function has been recently optimized for being as adaptable as possible. The&lt;br /&gt;
first part is split into two columns, where the user can manage all the variables needed for customizing&lt;br /&gt;
the Scorecard Printout. Generally, to help users print what they need, the first part of the screen&lt;br /&gt;
includes the REQUIRED options by default for a standard printed scorecard (see Figure 3.8)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:20--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ScorecardPrintout.PNG|thumb|940x940px|Fig 3.8]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:21--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Should the user need to print any other kind of scorecards (e.g. &#039;&#039;Only Data&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;Only Target Number&#039;&#039;, or &#039;&#039;Only Drawings&#039;&#039;), the screen offers a selection list (on the left), where the user can choose the options needed. The user can also modify a scorecard, to omit any text string, or picture included in the tournament using the boxes on the right. &lt;br /&gt;
Once the scorecard type is selected and the final appearance is selected, the user can proceed to the actual printing page. In the lower row, the software shows some editable boxes, that enables the user to choose the Session and Number of Targets to be printed (and if empty targets are included or not). Once the Session is selected the target numbers autocomplete any empty part with all the available targets. Once Session and Targets are selected, the user has to choose the distance to be printed below the distance area (see Figure 3.8). When electronic devices are in use for the automatic score management, the user can print scorecards created by the software with scores input directly by the archers, using the &#039;Print Scorecards filled in with all the value from single arrow&#039; option.&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to print a manual collection slip using the &#039;Intermediate Results collecting paper&#039; option at the very bottom.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Athlete Numbers ====  &amp;lt;!--T:22--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This option enables the user to print the Athlete Numbers for the event. &lt;br /&gt;
* Open the page and select the badge type to &#039;Qualification Athlete number&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter a name for the design (such as &#039;Athlete Number&#039; and click on &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Create new badge&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To edit the parameters of the badge and move/add and remove elements click on &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Edit Badge&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The printing procedure is similar to the Scorecards one, for the user needs to select the desired Session and Targets.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AthleteBadge.PNG|thumb|931x931px|Fig 3.9|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Personal Rank====  &amp;lt;!--T:27--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This option enables the user to view a selected athlete in the referring Division and Class Ranking. As search values, the user can opt for the &#039;&#039;BIB number&#039;&#039;, the &#039;&#039;Family Name&#039;&#039; or the &#039;&#039;Name of the archer&#039;&#039;. After clicking on &#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;, the software will open a page displaying the athlete position in the ranking (the corresponding row will be highlighted in yellow), together with the archers in the two places before and after the selected one (see Figure 3.11).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:28--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PersonalRank.PNG|thumb|931x931px|Fig 3.11|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Class and Division Result Lists ====  &amp;lt;!--T:29--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Clicking on this item, the software will open all the printout layouts for the Qualification Rounds. On this page, the main function is represented by the central icon &#039;&#039;Class &amp;amp; Division Result List&#039;&#039;. Clicking on this command, the user can print the Division and Class Ranking, both in the &#039;&#039;Class &amp;amp; Division Result List - Individual&#039;&#039; and in the &#039;&#039;Class &amp;amp; Division Result List - Team&#039;&#039; lists. Similarly, the user can click on the corresponding command on the right and on the left, but, then, only Individual (left) or Team Rankings (right) will be printed. Below these options, the software offers another row of icons that enable the user to print the rankings, where Medals Winners are highlighted.  These commands enable the user to choose the rankings to be printed, by Division and Class, or extracting a specific number of places and scores (starting from a cutoff) and so on (see Figure 3.12). It will also allow the user to print results based on subclasses, or various groupings if desired. It is recommended that a user checks the printouts they need in advance, and tests to ensure what they need is actually generated sensibly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:30--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CDResults.PNG|thumb|931x931px|Fig 3.12|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Events (Ind/Team) Result Lists Printout ====  &amp;lt;!--T:31--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This page displays another set of printout layouts. From this page, the user can manage the printing of the tournament Qualification Round, the options are defined by the &#039;Events&#039; that are created for the Tournament defined in the areas below. &lt;br /&gt;
* Individual - [[Competition/Individual Events Setup]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Team - [[ Competition/Team Events Setup ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These printouts are very important if in the tournament there is a scheduled elimination and final round, on the other hand, they are not necessary for any competition that is not including this kind of matches. The order of the printouts can be defined in the two event setup areas if required. As for the previous printout pages, there is a .pdf file in the central part of the screen, with the complete &#039;&#039;Qualification Round - Complete&#039;&#039; report, on the side columns. The user can find the &#039;&#039;Individual&#039;&#039; and the &#039;&#039;Team&#039;&#039; ones separately too. In the other printout pages, there is a parameter section, with which the user can customize the layouts. Plus, the last default .pdf created by the software is &#039;&#039;Shoot Off/Coin Toss Status Printout&#039;&#039;, that immediately displays if there is any Shot-Off or Coin Toss to be broken, before proceeding to the Elimination and Final Round (see Figure 3.13).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:32--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:QRanking.PNG|thumb|931x931px|Fig 3.13|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Speaker====  &amp;lt;!--T:33--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This page displays the video printouts for the on-venue speaker. These printouts are mainly&lt;br /&gt;
used in national and international events (see Par. 5.10).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:34--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Content}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>DellaRossa</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Qualification/it&amp;diff=3738</id>
		<title>Qualification/it</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Qualification/it&amp;diff=3738"/>
		<updated>2026-05-26T12:55:45Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;DellaRossa: Created page with &amp;quot;&amp;lt;placeholder Figura 3.1: Inserimento punti tramite la Tabella Normale.&amp;gt;&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Page in progress}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;languages/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	&lt;br /&gt;
== Sessioni di Qualificazione ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La sessione di qualificazione è una fase fondamentale di ogni torneo, da quelli interregionali alle competizioni più importanti nel tiro con l&#039;arco. Per quanto riguarda i@nseo, tutto ciò che riguarda il punteggio, gli score e le stampe è disponibile sotto la voce Qualificazione del menu principale.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Inserimento punti e Stampe ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La voce &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Qualificazione&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; del menu principale del software comprende le seguenti funzioni:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Inserimento Punti ====&lt;br /&gt;
La funzione principale nella gestione dei punteggi. Selezionando questa opzione il software aprirà un sottomenu a tendina con altre voci, relative alle diverse procedure con cui gli utenti possono inserire i punteggi in i@nseo. Gli utenti possono inserire i punteggi nel sistema in quattro modi diversi:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. &#039;&#039;&#039;Tabella Normale:&#039;&#039;&#039; dopo aver selezionato il Turno, le Piazzole e la Distanza desiderata e aver cliccato su «Ok», verrà mostrata una schermata a foglio di calcolo: qui l&#039;utente potrà inserire i punteggi in modo semplice e veloce (vedi Figura 3.1). Spuntando la casella “G/X”, l&#039;utente ha la possibilità gestire i 10 e le X (oppure i 9 e i 10 nelle competizioni indoor) che ogni atleta ha tirato. Generalmente, questa è un&#039;attività obbligatoria durante le competizioni; può essere saltata quando l&#039;utente deve gestire solo alcune parti degli score e i 10 non sono rilevanti (ad esempio per l&#039;inserimento dei punteggi di metà distanza).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;placeholder Figura 3.1: Inserimento punti tramite la Tabella Normale.&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Once scores of all archers are inputted, the user has to click on [Re-Build Teams], [Re-Calculate Distance Rank] and, then [Re-Calculate Final Rank]. The software will open 3 different pop-ups: always click [OK]. The software will, then, generate the Final Rank for the tournament. The user could also click on [Save results for snapshot feature], to generate data for the real time displaying of ranks, but it is not necessary, unless there are visual electronic devices (TV or similar systems) in use, for they need to manage in real time the athletes ranks or positions in the entire competition. Plus, without using HTTs, this command is partly effective, for results will be ranked and displayed only considering sessions and distances in the tournament.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
2. &#039;&#039;&#039;Extended Table:&#039;&#039;&#039; it works just as the Standard Table. It differs only for the output, that shows, in addition to scores to be inputted, the scores of the previous end (after the first one), or the sum of the scores of the previous ends (see Figure 3.2). It is useful to check that scores, that have been&lt;br /&gt;
previously inputted, have been entered without mistakes.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;placeholder Figure 3.2: Scoring through the Extended Table.&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
3. &#039;&#039;&#039;Arrow by Arrow (Advanced users):&#039;&#039;&#039; this function enables the user to manage the score of each arrow in an end for each athlete (see Figure 3.3). This scoring method should not be used when scoring with electronic devices, for the user can enter in the program only the total scores per end, and not the score of each arrow.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;placeholder Figure 3.3: Arrow by Arrow Scoring.&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
4. &#039;&#039;&#039;Arrow by Arrow (Scorecards View):&#039;&#039;&#039; this function works just as the previous method, but on a different view, that displays a chart, which is similar to a standard printed scorecard (see Figure 3.4).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;placeholder Figure 3.4: Scorecards View Scoring&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Under the same menu (Input Score), the user can also find:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==== Check Data Update ====&lt;br /&gt;
This command enables the user to check Data Updates of scores, when the&lt;br /&gt;
competition is managed with different networked computers.&lt;br /&gt;
If an athlete decides to retire from the competition, or he/she has been disqualified, the user can&lt;br /&gt;
set the archer as ‘pulled out’. The athlete will still be counted in the tournament statistics&lt;br /&gt;
(payments, targets list, and so on), but the software won’t let the user input any scores. To set an&lt;br /&gt;
archer as retired, the user just has to click on the two options on the left of the athlete’s name in&lt;br /&gt;
the Scoring Panel: &#039;&#039;Set as Pull Out&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;Set as DSQ&#039;&#039;. The row will be turned into red, for athletes&lt;br /&gt;
that have been set as disqualified, and yellow, for archers that have been set as pulled out, and&lt;br /&gt;
any of their previously entered scores will be deleted (see Figure 3.5).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;placeholder Figure 3.5: Setting an athlete as pulled out or DSQ.&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==== Export text file ====&lt;br /&gt;
As for the item name, this function enables the user to save a text file (.txt) with all&lt;br /&gt;
the scores inputted in the tournament.&lt;br /&gt;
3.1 Scoring and Printouts 37&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==== Scorecard Printout====&lt;br /&gt;
This function has been recently optimized for being as adaptable as possible. The&lt;br /&gt;
first part is split into two columns, where the user can manage all the variables needed for customizing&lt;br /&gt;
the Scorecard Printout. Generally, to help users printing what they need, the first part of the screen&lt;br /&gt;
includes the REQUIRED options for composing a standard printed scorecard (see Figure 3.6).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;placeholder Figure 3.6: Scorecard Printout page.&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Should the user need to print any other kind of scorecards (e.g. &#039;&#039;Only Data&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;Only Target Number&#039;&#039;,&lt;br /&gt;
or &#039;&#039;Only Drawings&#039;&#039;), the screen offers a selection list (on the left), where the user can choose the&lt;br /&gt;
wished option. Obviously, the user can also modify a scorecard, to omit any text string, or picture&lt;br /&gt;
included in the tournament. Once the scorecard type is selected and the final appearance is composed,&lt;br /&gt;
the user can proceed to the actual printing page. In the lower row, the software shows some editable&lt;br /&gt;
boxes, that enable the user to choose the wished Session and Number of Targets to be printed. The&lt;br /&gt;
program, once the Session is selected, autocompletes any empty part with all the available targets.&lt;br /&gt;
The user can also print all the targets, except for the empty ones only, by ticking the box on the right&lt;br /&gt;
part of the row. Once Session and Targets are selected, the user has to choose the wished distance to&lt;br /&gt;
be printed (see Figure 3.8). When electronic devices are in use for the automatic scores management,&lt;br /&gt;
the user can print also scorecards created by the software with scores inputted directly by the archers.&lt;br /&gt;
Eventually, the user can also print Mini Scorecards, to manually collect partial scoring results.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==== Athlete Numbers ====&lt;br /&gt;
This option enables the user to print the Athlete Numbers for the wished event. Editing&lt;br /&gt;
the parameters, the user can modify the page composition, moving the &#039;&#039;Target Number&#039;&#039;, the &#039;&#039;Athlete&lt;br /&gt;
Name&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;Country/Club&#039;&#039;. Plus, this page offers the tools both for adding customized images and&lt;br /&gt;
importing graphic settings from another program (see Figure 3.7). The printing procedure is similar to&lt;br /&gt;
the Scorecards one, for the user needs to select the desired Session and Targets.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;placeholder Figure 3.7: Athlete Numbers composition page.&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;placeholder Figure 3.8: Standard Scorecard print sample.&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==== Qualification Field of Play Layout====&lt;br /&gt;
Clicking on this item, the user can view the composition page for&lt;br /&gt;
the targets positioning in the tournament field. It enables the user to view distances and the related&lt;br /&gt;
Target Numbers in an intuitive and direct way (see Figure 3.9).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;placeholder Figure 3.9: Qualification Field of Play Layout printing sample.&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==== Personal Rank====&lt;br /&gt;
This option enables the user to view the wished athlete in the referring Division and Class&lt;br /&gt;
Ranking. As search values, the user can opt for the &#039;&#039;BIB number&#039;&#039;, the &#039;&#039;Family Name&#039;&#039; or the &#039;&#039;Name of&lt;br /&gt;
the archer&#039;&#039;. After clicking on &#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;, the software will open a page displaying the athlete position in the&lt;br /&gt;
ranking (the corresponding row will be highlighted in yellow), together with the archers in the two&lt;br /&gt;
places before and after the wished one (see Figure 3.10).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;placeholder Figure 3.10: Personal Rank output page.&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==== Class and Division Result Lists ====&lt;br /&gt;
Clicking on this item, the software will open all the printout layouts for the&lt;br /&gt;
Qualification Rounds. On this page, the main function is represented by the central icon&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Class &amp;amp; Division Result List&#039;&#039;. Clicking on this command, the user can print the Division and Class&lt;br /&gt;
Ranking, both in the &#039;&#039;Class &amp;amp; Division Result List - Individual&#039;&#039; and in the &#039;&#039;Class &amp;amp; Division Result List - Team&#039;&#039; lists. Similarly, the user can click on the corresponding command on the right and on the left, but, then, only Individual (left) or Team Rankings (right) will be printed. Below these options, the software offers another row of icons that enable the user to print the rankings, where Medals Winners are highlighted. As for the above section, these commands enable the user to choose the rankings to be printed, by Division and Class, or extracting a specific number of places and scores (starting from a cutoff) and so on (see Figure 3.11).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;placeholder Figure 3.11: Rankings printout customization page.&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==== Events (Ind/Team) Result Lists Printout ====&lt;br /&gt;
This page displays another set of printout layouts. From this page, the&lt;br /&gt;
user can manage the printing of the tournament Qualification Round. Obviously, these printouts are&lt;br /&gt;
very important if in the tournament there is a scheduled elimination and final round, on the other&lt;br /&gt;
hand, they are not necessary for any competition that is not including this kind of matches. As for the&lt;br /&gt;
previous printout pages, there is a .pdf file in the central part of the screen, with the complete&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Qualification Round - Complete&#039;&#039; report, on the side columns, instead, the user can find the &#039;&#039;Individual&#039;&#039; and the &#039;&#039;Team&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
ones. Still in the other printout pages, there is a parameter section, with which the user can customize&lt;br /&gt;
the layouts. Plus, the last default .pdf created by the software is &#039;&#039;Shoot Off/Coin Toss Status Printout&#039;&#039;, that immediately displays if there is any Shot-Off or Coin Toss to be broken, before proceeding to the Elimination and Final Round (see Figure 3.12).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;placeholder Figure 3.12: Qualification Round Rankings printout page&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==== Speaker====&lt;br /&gt;
This page displays the video printouts for the on-venue speaker. These printouts are mainly&lt;br /&gt;
used in national and international events (see Par. 5.10).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Content}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>DellaRossa</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Translations:Qualification/7/it&amp;diff=3737</id>
		<title>Translations:Qualification/7/it</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Translations:Qualification/7/it&amp;diff=3737"/>
		<updated>2026-05-26T12:55:41Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;DellaRossa: Created page with &amp;quot;&amp;lt;placeholder Figura 3.1: Inserimento punti tramite la Tabella Normale.&amp;gt;&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;placeholder Figura 3.1: Inserimento punti tramite la Tabella Normale.&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>DellaRossa</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Qualification/it&amp;diff=3736</id>
		<title>Qualification/it</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Qualification/it&amp;diff=3736"/>
		<updated>2026-05-26T12:51:05Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;DellaRossa: Created page with &amp;quot;1. &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Tabella Normale:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; dopo aver selezionato il Turno, le Piazzole e la Distanza desiderata e aver cliccato su «Ok», verrà mostrata una schermata a foglio di calcolo: qui l&amp;#039;utente potrà inserire i punteggi in modo semplice e veloce (vedi Figura 3.1). Spuntando la casella “G/X”, l&amp;#039;utente ha la possibilità gestire i 10 e le X (oppure i 9 e i 10 nelle competizioni indoor) che ogni atleta ha tirato. Generalmente, questa è un&amp;#039;attività obbligatoria durante le com...&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Page in progress}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;languages/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	&lt;br /&gt;
== Sessioni di Qualificazione ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La sessione di qualificazione è una fase fondamentale di ogni torneo, da quelli interregionali alle competizioni più importanti nel tiro con l&#039;arco. Per quanto riguarda i@nseo, tutto ciò che riguarda il punteggio, gli score e le stampe è disponibile sotto la voce Qualificazione del menu principale.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Inserimento punti e Stampe ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La voce &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Qualificazione&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; del menu principale del software comprende le seguenti funzioni:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Inserimento Punti ====&lt;br /&gt;
La funzione principale nella gestione dei punteggi. Selezionando questa opzione il software aprirà un sottomenu a tendina con altre voci, relative alle diverse procedure con cui gli utenti possono inserire i punteggi in i@nseo. Gli utenti possono inserire i punteggi nel sistema in quattro modi diversi:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. &#039;&#039;&#039;Tabella Normale:&#039;&#039;&#039; dopo aver selezionato il Turno, le Piazzole e la Distanza desiderata e aver cliccato su «Ok», verrà mostrata una schermata a foglio di calcolo: qui l&#039;utente potrà inserire i punteggi in modo semplice e veloce (vedi Figura 3.1). Spuntando la casella “G/X”, l&#039;utente ha la possibilità gestire i 10 e le X (oppure i 9 e i 10 nelle competizioni indoor) che ogni atleta ha tirato. Generalmente, questa è un&#039;attività obbligatoria durante le competizioni; può essere saltata quando l&#039;utente deve gestire solo alcune parti degli score e i 10 non sono rilevanti (ad esempio per l&#039;inserimento dei punteggi di metà distanza).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;placeholder Figure 3.1: Scoring through the Standard Table.&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Once scores of all archers are inputted, the user has to click on [Re-Build Teams], [Re-Calculate Distance Rank] and, then [Re-Calculate Final Rank]. The software will open 3 different pop-ups: always click [OK]. The software will, then, generate the Final Rank for the tournament. The user could also click on [Save results for snapshot feature], to generate data for the real time displaying of ranks, but it is not necessary, unless there are visual electronic devices (TV or similar systems) in use, for they need to manage in real time the athletes ranks or positions in the entire competition. Plus, without using HTTs, this command is partly effective, for results will be ranked and displayed only considering sessions and distances in the tournament.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
2. &#039;&#039;&#039;Extended Table:&#039;&#039;&#039; it works just as the Standard Table. It differs only for the output, that shows, in addition to scores to be inputted, the scores of the previous end (after the first one), or the sum of the scores of the previous ends (see Figure 3.2). It is useful to check that scores, that have been&lt;br /&gt;
previously inputted, have been entered without mistakes.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;placeholder Figure 3.2: Scoring through the Extended Table.&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
3. &#039;&#039;&#039;Arrow by Arrow (Advanced users):&#039;&#039;&#039; this function enables the user to manage the score of each arrow in an end for each athlete (see Figure 3.3). This scoring method should not be used when scoring with electronic devices, for the user can enter in the program only the total scores per end, and not the score of each arrow.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;placeholder Figure 3.3: Arrow by Arrow Scoring.&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
4. &#039;&#039;&#039;Arrow by Arrow (Scorecards View):&#039;&#039;&#039; this function works just as the previous method, but on a different view, that displays a chart, which is similar to a standard printed scorecard (see Figure 3.4).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;placeholder Figure 3.4: Scorecards View Scoring&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Under the same menu (Input Score), the user can also find:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==== Check Data Update ====&lt;br /&gt;
This command enables the user to check Data Updates of scores, when the&lt;br /&gt;
competition is managed with different networked computers.&lt;br /&gt;
If an athlete decides to retire from the competition, or he/she has been disqualified, the user can&lt;br /&gt;
set the archer as ‘pulled out’. The athlete will still be counted in the tournament statistics&lt;br /&gt;
(payments, targets list, and so on), but the software won’t let the user input any scores. To set an&lt;br /&gt;
archer as retired, the user just has to click on the two options on the left of the athlete’s name in&lt;br /&gt;
the Scoring Panel: &#039;&#039;Set as Pull Out&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;Set as DSQ&#039;&#039;. The row will be turned into red, for athletes&lt;br /&gt;
that have been set as disqualified, and yellow, for archers that have been set as pulled out, and&lt;br /&gt;
any of their previously entered scores will be deleted (see Figure 3.5).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;placeholder Figure 3.5: Setting an athlete as pulled out or DSQ.&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==== Export text file ====&lt;br /&gt;
As for the item name, this function enables the user to save a text file (.txt) with all&lt;br /&gt;
the scores inputted in the tournament.&lt;br /&gt;
3.1 Scoring and Printouts 37&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==== Scorecard Printout====&lt;br /&gt;
This function has been recently optimized for being as adaptable as possible. The&lt;br /&gt;
first part is split into two columns, where the user can manage all the variables needed for customizing&lt;br /&gt;
the Scorecard Printout. Generally, to help users printing what they need, the first part of the screen&lt;br /&gt;
includes the REQUIRED options for composing a standard printed scorecard (see Figure 3.6).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;placeholder Figure 3.6: Scorecard Printout page.&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Should the user need to print any other kind of scorecards (e.g. &#039;&#039;Only Data&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;Only Target Number&#039;&#039;,&lt;br /&gt;
or &#039;&#039;Only Drawings&#039;&#039;), the screen offers a selection list (on the left), where the user can choose the&lt;br /&gt;
wished option. Obviously, the user can also modify a scorecard, to omit any text string, or picture&lt;br /&gt;
included in the tournament. Once the scorecard type is selected and the final appearance is composed,&lt;br /&gt;
the user can proceed to the actual printing page. In the lower row, the software shows some editable&lt;br /&gt;
boxes, that enable the user to choose the wished Session and Number of Targets to be printed. The&lt;br /&gt;
program, once the Session is selected, autocompletes any empty part with all the available targets.&lt;br /&gt;
The user can also print all the targets, except for the empty ones only, by ticking the box on the right&lt;br /&gt;
part of the row. Once Session and Targets are selected, the user has to choose the wished distance to&lt;br /&gt;
be printed (see Figure 3.8). When electronic devices are in use for the automatic scores management,&lt;br /&gt;
the user can print also scorecards created by the software with scores inputted directly by the archers.&lt;br /&gt;
Eventually, the user can also print Mini Scorecards, to manually collect partial scoring results.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==== Athlete Numbers ====&lt;br /&gt;
This option enables the user to print the Athlete Numbers for the wished event. Editing&lt;br /&gt;
the parameters, the user can modify the page composition, moving the &#039;&#039;Target Number&#039;&#039;, the &#039;&#039;Athlete&lt;br /&gt;
Name&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;Country/Club&#039;&#039;. Plus, this page offers the tools both for adding customized images and&lt;br /&gt;
importing graphic settings from another program (see Figure 3.7). The printing procedure is similar to&lt;br /&gt;
the Scorecards one, for the user needs to select the desired Session and Targets.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;placeholder Figure 3.7: Athlete Numbers composition page.&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;placeholder Figure 3.8: Standard Scorecard print sample.&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==== Qualification Field of Play Layout====&lt;br /&gt;
Clicking on this item, the user can view the composition page for&lt;br /&gt;
the targets positioning in the tournament field. It enables the user to view distances and the related&lt;br /&gt;
Target Numbers in an intuitive and direct way (see Figure 3.9).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;placeholder Figure 3.9: Qualification Field of Play Layout printing sample.&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==== Personal Rank====&lt;br /&gt;
This option enables the user to view the wished athlete in the referring Division and Class&lt;br /&gt;
Ranking. As search values, the user can opt for the &#039;&#039;BIB number&#039;&#039;, the &#039;&#039;Family Name&#039;&#039; or the &#039;&#039;Name of&lt;br /&gt;
the archer&#039;&#039;. After clicking on &#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;, the software will open a page displaying the athlete position in the&lt;br /&gt;
ranking (the corresponding row will be highlighted in yellow), together with the archers in the two&lt;br /&gt;
places before and after the wished one (see Figure 3.10).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;placeholder Figure 3.10: Personal Rank output page.&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==== Class and Division Result Lists ====&lt;br /&gt;
Clicking on this item, the software will open all the printout layouts for the&lt;br /&gt;
Qualification Rounds. On this page, the main function is represented by the central icon&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Class &amp;amp; Division Result List&#039;&#039;. Clicking on this command, the user can print the Division and Class&lt;br /&gt;
Ranking, both in the &#039;&#039;Class &amp;amp; Division Result List - Individual&#039;&#039; and in the &#039;&#039;Class &amp;amp; Division Result List - Team&#039;&#039; lists. Similarly, the user can click on the corresponding command on the right and on the left, but, then, only Individual (left) or Team Rankings (right) will be printed. Below these options, the software offers another row of icons that enable the user to print the rankings, where Medals Winners are highlighted. As for the above section, these commands enable the user to choose the rankings to be printed, by Division and Class, or extracting a specific number of places and scores (starting from a cutoff) and so on (see Figure 3.11).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;placeholder Figure 3.11: Rankings printout customization page.&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==== Events (Ind/Team) Result Lists Printout ====&lt;br /&gt;
This page displays another set of printout layouts. From this page, the&lt;br /&gt;
user can manage the printing of the tournament Qualification Round. Obviously, these printouts are&lt;br /&gt;
very important if in the tournament there is a scheduled elimination and final round, on the other&lt;br /&gt;
hand, they are not necessary for any competition that is not including this kind of matches. As for the&lt;br /&gt;
previous printout pages, there is a .pdf file in the central part of the screen, with the complete&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Qualification Round - Complete&#039;&#039; report, on the side columns, instead, the user can find the &#039;&#039;Individual&#039;&#039; and the &#039;&#039;Team&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
ones. Still in the other printout pages, there is a parameter section, with which the user can customize&lt;br /&gt;
the layouts. Plus, the last default .pdf created by the software is &#039;&#039;Shoot Off/Coin Toss Status Printout&#039;&#039;, that immediately displays if there is any Shot-Off or Coin Toss to be broken, before proceeding to the Elimination and Final Round (see Figure 3.12).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;placeholder Figure 3.12: Qualification Round Rankings printout page&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==== Speaker====&lt;br /&gt;
This page displays the video printouts for the on-venue speaker. These printouts are mainly&lt;br /&gt;
used in national and international events (see Par. 5.10).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Content}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>DellaRossa</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Translations:Qualification/6/it&amp;diff=3735</id>
		<title>Translations:Qualification/6/it</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Translations:Qualification/6/it&amp;diff=3735"/>
		<updated>2026-05-26T12:50:55Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;DellaRossa: Created page with &amp;quot;1. &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Tabella Normale:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; dopo aver selezionato il Turno, le Piazzole e la Distanza desiderata e aver cliccato su «Ok», verrà mostrata una schermata a foglio di calcolo: qui l&amp;#039;utente potrà inserire i punteggi in modo semplice e veloce (vedi Figura 3.1). Spuntando la casella “G/X”, l&amp;#039;utente ha la possibilità gestire i 10 e le X (oppure i 9 e i 10 nelle competizioni indoor) che ogni atleta ha tirato. Generalmente, questa è un&amp;#039;attività obbligatoria durante le com...&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;1. &#039;&#039;&#039;Tabella Normale:&#039;&#039;&#039; dopo aver selezionato il Turno, le Piazzole e la Distanza desiderata e aver cliccato su «Ok», verrà mostrata una schermata a foglio di calcolo: qui l&#039;utente potrà inserire i punteggi in modo semplice e veloce (vedi Figura 3.1). Spuntando la casella “G/X”, l&#039;utente ha la possibilità gestire i 10 e le X (oppure i 9 e i 10 nelle competizioni indoor) che ogni atleta ha tirato. Generalmente, questa è un&#039;attività obbligatoria durante le competizioni; può essere saltata quando l&#039;utente deve gestire solo alcune parti degli score e i 10 non sono rilevanti (ad esempio per l&#039;inserimento dei punteggi di metà distanza).&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>DellaRossa</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Template:Install_Post_Installation/it&amp;diff=3630</id>
		<title>Template:Install Post Installation/it</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Template:Install_Post_Installation/it&amp;diff=3630"/>
		<updated>2026-04-25T08:55:20Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;DellaRossa: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Per evitare interferenze tra Windows Defender e XAMPP, segui questi passaggi&amp;lt;ref group=&amp;quot;Win11&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Arnaud Chalmel, Arciere di Saint Loup&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 1&#039;&#039;&#039;: Apri &amp;quot;Sicurezza di Windows&amp;quot; e vai alla sezione &amp;quot;Protezione da virus e minacce&amp;quot; e clicca su &amp;quot;Gestisci impostazioni&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Win11-defender-1-en-IT.png|none|thumb|Step 1]]&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 2&#039;&#039;&#039;: In fondo alla pagina clicca su &amp;quot;Aggiungi o rimuovi esclusioni&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Win11-defender-2-en-IT.png|none|thumb|Step 2]]&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 3&#039;&#039;&#039;: Inserisci gli elementi da escludere dalla scansione, prestando attenzione alle maiuscole e alle minuscole:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Selezione cartella da escludere:&lt;br /&gt;
**C:\ianseo&lt;br /&gt;
* Tipi di file da escludere:&lt;br /&gt;
**.mysql&lt;br /&gt;
**.php&lt;br /&gt;
* Processi da escludere (digitare esattamente come indicato):&lt;br /&gt;
** Apache HTTP Server&lt;br /&gt;
** mysqld&lt;br /&gt;
** xampp-control&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Win11-defender-3-en-IT.png|none|thumb|Step 3]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;references group=&amp;quot;Win11&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>DellaRossa</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Translations:Template:Install_Post_Installation/4/it&amp;diff=3629</id>
		<title>Translations:Template:Install Post Installation/4/it</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Translations:Template:Install_Post_Installation/4/it&amp;diff=3629"/>
		<updated>2026-04-25T08:54:51Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;DellaRossa: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[File:Win11-defender-3-en-IT.png|none|thumb|Step 3]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>DellaRossa</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Translations:Template:Install_Post_Installation/2/it&amp;diff=3628</id>
		<title>Translations:Template:Install Post Installation/2/it</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Translations:Template:Install_Post_Installation/2/it&amp;diff=3628"/>
		<updated>2026-04-25T08:54:41Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;DellaRossa: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 1&#039;&#039;&#039;: Apri &amp;quot;Sicurezza di Windows&amp;quot; e vai alla sezione &amp;quot;Protezione da virus e minacce&amp;quot; e clicca su &amp;quot;Gestisci impostazioni&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Win11-defender-1-en-IT.png|none|thumb|Step 1]]&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 2&#039;&#039;&#039;: In fondo alla pagina clicca su &amp;quot;Aggiungi o rimuovi esclusioni&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Win11-defender-2-en-IT.png|none|thumb|Step 2]]&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 3&#039;&#039;&#039;: Inserisci gli elementi da escludere dalla scansione, prestando attenzione alle maiuscole e alle minuscole:&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>DellaRossa</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=File:Win11-defender-3-en-IT.png&amp;diff=3627</id>
		<title>File:Win11-defender-3-en-IT.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=File:Win11-defender-3-en-IT.png&amp;diff=3627"/>
		<updated>2026-04-25T08:53:32Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;DellaRossa: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>DellaRossa</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=File:Win11-defender-2-en-IT.png&amp;diff=3626</id>
		<title>File:Win11-defender-2-en-IT.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=File:Win11-defender-2-en-IT.png&amp;diff=3626"/>
		<updated>2026-04-25T08:53:21Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;DellaRossa: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>DellaRossa</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=File:Win11-defender-1-en-IT.png&amp;diff=3625</id>
		<title>File:Win11-defender-1-en-IT.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=File:Win11-defender-1-en-IT.png&amp;diff=3625"/>
		<updated>2026-04-25T08:53:03Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;DellaRossa: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>DellaRossa</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Template:Install_Post_Installation/it&amp;diff=3624</id>
		<title>Template:Install Post Installation/it</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Template:Install_Post_Installation/it&amp;diff=3624"/>
		<updated>2026-04-25T07:57:53Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;DellaRossa: Created page with &amp;quot;&amp;lt;references group=&amp;quot;Win11&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Per evitare interferenze tra Windows Defender e XAMPP, segui questi passaggi&amp;lt;ref group=&amp;quot;Win11&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Arnaud Chalmel, Arciere di Saint Loup&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 1&#039;&#039;&#039;: Apri &amp;quot;Sicurezza di Windows&amp;quot; e vai alla sezione &amp;quot;Protezione da virus e minacce&amp;quot; e clicca su &amp;quot;Gestisci impostazioni&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Win11-defender-1-en.png|none|thumb|Step 1]]&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 2&#039;&#039;&#039;: In fondo alla pagina clicca su &amp;quot;Aggiungi o rimuovi esclusioni&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Win11-defender-2-en.png|none|thumb|Step 2]]&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 3&#039;&#039;&#039;: Inserisci gli elementi da escludere dalla scansione, prestando attenzione alle maiuscole e alle minuscole:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Selezione cartella da escludere:&lt;br /&gt;
**C:\ianseo&lt;br /&gt;
* Tipi di file da escludere:&lt;br /&gt;
**.mysql&lt;br /&gt;
**.php&lt;br /&gt;
* Processi da escludere (digitare esattamente come indicato):&lt;br /&gt;
** Apache HTTP Server&lt;br /&gt;
** mysqld&lt;br /&gt;
** xampp-control&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Win11-defender-3-en.png|none|thumb|Step 3]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;references group=&amp;quot;Win11&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>DellaRossa</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Translations:Template:Install_Post_Installation/5/it&amp;diff=3623</id>
		<title>Translations:Template:Install Post Installation/5/it</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Translations:Template:Install_Post_Installation/5/it&amp;diff=3623"/>
		<updated>2026-04-25T07:57:48Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;DellaRossa: Created page with &amp;quot;&amp;lt;references group=&amp;quot;Win11&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;references group=&amp;quot;Win11&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>DellaRossa</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Template:Install_Post_Installation/it&amp;diff=3622</id>
		<title>Template:Install Post Installation/it</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Template:Install_Post_Installation/it&amp;diff=3622"/>
		<updated>2026-04-25T07:57:46Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;DellaRossa: Created page with &amp;quot;Step 3&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Per evitare interferenze tra Windows Defender e XAMPP, segui questi passaggi&amp;lt;ref group=&amp;quot;Win11&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Arnaud Chalmel, Arciere di Saint Loup&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 1&#039;&#039;&#039;: Apri &amp;quot;Sicurezza di Windows&amp;quot; e vai alla sezione &amp;quot;Protezione da virus e minacce&amp;quot; e clicca su &amp;quot;Gestisci impostazioni&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Win11-defender-1-en.png|none|thumb|Step 1]]&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 2&#039;&#039;&#039;: In fondo alla pagina clicca su &amp;quot;Aggiungi o rimuovi esclusioni&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Win11-defender-2-en.png|none|thumb|Step 2]]&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 3&#039;&#039;&#039;: Inserisci gli elementi da escludere dalla scansione, prestando attenzione alle maiuscole e alle minuscole:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Selezione cartella da escludere:&lt;br /&gt;
**C:\ianseo&lt;br /&gt;
* Tipi di file da escludere:&lt;br /&gt;
**.mysql&lt;br /&gt;
**.php&lt;br /&gt;
* Processi da escludere (digitare esattamente come indicato):&lt;br /&gt;
** Apache HTTP Server&lt;br /&gt;
** mysqld&lt;br /&gt;
** xampp-control&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Win11-defender-3-en.png|none|thumb|Step 3]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;references group=&amp;quot;Win11&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>DellaRossa</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Translations:Template:Install_Post_Installation/4/it&amp;diff=3621</id>
		<title>Translations:Template:Install Post Installation/4/it</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Translations:Template:Install_Post_Installation/4/it&amp;diff=3621"/>
		<updated>2026-04-25T07:57:43Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;DellaRossa: Created page with &amp;quot;Step 3&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[File:Win11-defender-3-en.png|none|thumb|Step 3]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>DellaRossa</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Template:Install_Post_Installation/it&amp;diff=3620</id>
		<title>Template:Install Post Installation/it</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Template:Install_Post_Installation/it&amp;diff=3620"/>
		<updated>2026-04-25T07:57:27Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;DellaRossa: Created page with &amp;quot;* Selezione cartella da escludere: **C:\ianseo * Tipi di file da escludere: **.mysql **.php * Processi da escludere (digitare esattamente come indicato): ** Apache HTTP Server ** mysqld ** xampp-control&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Per evitare interferenze tra Windows Defender e XAMPP, segui questi passaggi&amp;lt;ref group=&amp;quot;Win11&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Arnaud Chalmel, Arciere di Saint Loup&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 1&#039;&#039;&#039;: Apri &amp;quot;Sicurezza di Windows&amp;quot; e vai alla sezione &amp;quot;Protezione da virus e minacce&amp;quot; e clicca su &amp;quot;Gestisci impostazioni&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Win11-defender-1-en.png|none|thumb|Step 1]]&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 2&#039;&#039;&#039;: In fondo alla pagina clicca su &amp;quot;Aggiungi o rimuovi esclusioni&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Win11-defender-2-en.png|none|thumb|Step 2]]&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 3&#039;&#039;&#039;: Inserisci gli elementi da escludere dalla scansione, prestando attenzione alle maiuscole e alle minuscole:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Selezione cartella da escludere:&lt;br /&gt;
**C:\ianseo&lt;br /&gt;
* Tipi di file da escludere:&lt;br /&gt;
**.mysql&lt;br /&gt;
**.php&lt;br /&gt;
* Processi da escludere (digitare esattamente come indicato):&lt;br /&gt;
** Apache HTTP Server&lt;br /&gt;
** mysqld&lt;br /&gt;
** xampp-control&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Win11-defender-3-en.png|none|thumb|Step 3]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;references group=&amp;quot;Win11&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>DellaRossa</name></author>
	</entry>
</feed>